2015 C Sedan OperatorsManual

C-Class
Operator's Manual
C-Class Operator's Manual
2055844601F
2055844601
Order no. 6515 0935 13 Part no. 2055844601 Edition C-2015

Symbols X This symbol indicates an instruction Publication details
Registered trademarks: that must be followed. Internet
RBluetooth X Several of these symbols in succes-
is a registered trademark of
sion indicate an instruction with sev- Further information about Mercedes-Benz
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
eral steps. vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can on the following websites:
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
page) find more information about a topic. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
of DOLBY Laboratories.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or an http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
RBabySmart, ESP and PRE-SAFE are
instruction that is continued on the only)
registered trademarks of Daimler AG. next page.
RHomeLink is a registered trademark of
Dis This font indicates a display in the
Johnson Controls. play multifunction display/COMAND dis- Editorial office
RiPod and iTunes are registered trade- play.
marks of Apple Inc. Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-
RBurmester is a registered trademark of tected by copyright 2005 or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. The FreeType Project without written permission from Daimler AG.
RMicrosoft and Windows media are reg- http://www.freetype.org. All rights
istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- reserved.
Vehicle manufacturer
tion.
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
Daimler AG
XM Radio Inc.
Mercedesstrae 137
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-
70327 Stuttgart
uity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote is a registered trademark of
Germany
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you. As at 29.10.2013
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-
tions and warning notices in this manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Android
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- App may not yet be available in your country.
Benz Limited Warranty. The technical documentation team at
The equipment or product designation of your Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
vehicle may vary depending on: motoring.
Rmodel Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Rorder Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Rcountry specification A Daimler Company
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
You can also use the CClass Guide smart-
phone App:
Apple iOS
2055844601 2055844601F
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31
Introduction ......................................... 22 Safety ................................................... 41
Opening and closing ........................... 79
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 107
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 123
Climate control ................................. 137
Driving and parking .......................... 155
On-board computer and displays .... 229
Stowage and features ...................... 297
Maintenance and care ...................... 323
Roadside Assistance ........................ 339
Wheels and tires ............................... 357
Technical data ................................... 395

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 267
12 V socket Function/notes ............................. 127
see Sockets Switching on/off ........................... 128
360 camera Additional speedometer ................... 248
Cleaning ......................................... 335 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 400
Function/notes ............................. 211 AGILITY SELECT switch
4ETS
Automatic transmission ................. 167
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Climate control (3-zone automatic
tion System) climate control) ............................. 142
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
Climate control (dual-zone auto-
drive) .................................................. 199 matic climate control) .................... 140
Air bags
A Deployment ..................................... 56
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 263
Display message ............................ 251 Front air bag (driver, front
Function/notes ................................ 66 passenger) ....................................... 49
Important safety notes .................... 66 Important safety notes .................... 48
Warning lamp ................................. 286 Introduction ..................................... 48
Accident Knee bag .......................................... 50
Automatic measures after an acci- PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
dent ................................................. 59 lamps ............................................... 43
Activating/deactivating cooling Side impact air bag .......................... 50
with air dehumidification ................. 143 Window curtain air bag .................... 51
Active Blind Spot Assist Air-conditioning system
Activating/deactivating (on- see Climate control
board computer) ............................ 246 AIRMATIC
Display message ............................ 273 Display message ............................ 271
Function/information .................... 221 Function/notes ............................. 197
Active Lane Keeping Assist AIRPANEL (cleaning instructions) .... 334
Activating/deactivating (on- Air vents
board computer) ............................ 246 Important safety notes .................. 152
Display message ............................ 272 Rear ............................................... 153
Function/information .................... 224 Setting ........................................... 152
Active Parking Assist Setting the center air vents ........... 152
Detecting parking spaces .............. 203 Setting the side air vents ............... 153
Display message ............................ 273 Alarm
Exiting a parking space .................. 205 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76
Function/notes ............................. 202 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 76
Important safety notes .................. 202 Switching the function on/off
Parking .......................................... 204 (ATA) ................................................ 76
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 74 Alarm system
Adaptive Brake Assist see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Function/notes ................................ 70 Anti-lock Braking system
Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 198 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-Theft Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Index 5
Armrest Engaging neutral ............................ 165

Stowage compartment .................. 300 Engaging park position automati-
Ashtray ............................................... 309 cally ............................................... 165
Assistance display (on-board com- Engaging reverse gear ................... 165
puter) .................................................. 243 Engaging the park position ............ 164
Assistance menu (on-board com- Kickdown ....................................... 167
puter) .................................................. 244 Manual shifting .............................. 169
ASSYST PLUS Overview ........................................ 164
Displaying a service message ........ 329 Problem (malfunction) ................... 171
Hiding a service message .............. 328 Pulling away ................................... 160
Notes ............................................. 328 Starting the engine ........................ 159
Resetting the service interval dis- Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 169
play ................................................ 329 Transmission position display
Service message ............................ 328 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 166
Special service requirements ......... 329 Transmission positions .................. 166
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Automatic transmission emer-
Activating/deactivating ................... 76 gency mode ....................................... 171
Function ........................................... 76
Switching off the alarm .................... 76 B
ATTENTION ASSIST Backup lamp
Activating/deactivating ................. 246 Changing bulbs .............................. 132
Display message ............................ 271 Bag hook ............................................ 304
Function/notes ............................. 216 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 67
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist
see Qualified specialist workshop (Brake Assist PLUS with Cross-
Authorized workshop Traffic Assist)
see Qualified specialist workshop Function/notes ................................ 67
AUTO lights Important safety notes .................... 67
Display message ............................ 266 Battery (SmartKey)
see Lights Checking .......................................... 84
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 330 Important safety notes .................... 83
Automatic engine start (ECO start/ Replacing ......................................... 84
stop function) .................................... 161 Battery (vehicle)
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO Charging ........................................ 347
start/stop function) .......................... 161 Display message ............................ 268
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 124 Important safety notes .................. 345
Automatic transmission Jump starting ................................. 349
Accelerator pedal position ............. 167 Belt
AGILITY SELECT switch .................. 167 see Seat belts
Changing gear ............................... 167 Blind Spot Assist
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 164 Activating/deactivating (on-
Display message ............................ 280 board computer) ............................ 246
Drive program ................................ 168 Display message ............................ 273
Drive program display .................... 166 Notes/function .............................. 217
Driving tips .................................... 167 see Active Blind Spot Assist
Emergency running mode .............. 171 Box (trunk) ......................................... 304
Engaging drive position .................. 166
6 Index
Brake Assist Care

see BAS (Brake Assist System) 360 camera ................................. 335
Brake fluid AIRPANEL ...................................... 334
Display message ............................ 258 Carpets .......................................... 337
Notes ............................................. 401 Car wash ........................................ 330
Brake force distribution, elec- Display ........................................... 336
tronic Exhaust pipe .................................. 335
see EBD (electronic brake force Exterior lights ................................ 333
distribution) Gear or selector lever .................... 336
Brake lamps Interior ........................................... 336
Display message ............................ 265 Matte finish ................................... 332
Brakes Notes ............................................. 329
ABS .................................................. 66 Paint .............................................. 332
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70 Plastic trim .................................... 336
BAS .................................................. 67 Power washer ................................ 331
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Rear view camera .......................... 334
Assist ............................................... 67 Roof lining ...................................... 337
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 401 Seat belt ........................................ 337
Display message ............................ 251 Seat cover ..................................... 337
EBD .................................................. 73 Sensors ......................................... 334
Hill start assist ............................... 160 Steering wheel ............................... 336
HOLD function ............................... 196 Trim pieces .................................... 336
Important safety notes .................. 180 Washing by hand ........................... 331
Maintenance .................................. 181 Wheels ........................................... 333
Parking brake ................................ 176 Windows ........................................ 333
Riding tips ...................................... 180 Wiper blades .................................. 333
Warning lamp ................................. 285 Wooden trim .................................. 336
Breakdown Cargo tie down rings ......................... 303
see Flat tire Car key
see Towing away see SmartKey
Brightness control (instrument CD player/CD changer (on-board
cluster lighting) ................................... 32 computer) .......................................... 241
Bulbs Center console
see Replacing bulbs Lower section .................................. 37
Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 231 Upper section .................................. 36
Central locking
C Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 81
Changing bulbs
California High-beam headlamps ................... 132
Important notice for retail cus- Low-beam headlamps .................... 131
tomers and lessees .......................... 24 Reversing lamps ............................ 132
Calling up a malfunction Turn signals (front) ......................... 132
see Display messages Turn signals (rear) .......................... 132
Camera Child-proof locks
see 360 camera Important safety notes .................... 64
Car Rear doors ....................................... 65
see Vehicle
Index 7
Children Setting the temperature ................ 145

In the vehicle ................................... 59 Switching air-recirculation mode
Restraint systems ............................ 61 on/off ............................................ 149
Special seat belt retractor ............... 60 Switching on/off ........................... 142
Child seat Switching residual heat on/off ...... 149
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 64 Switching the rear window
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat defroster on/off ............................ 148
anchors ............................................ 62 Switching the synchronization
On the front-passenger seat ............ 63 function on and off ........................ 147
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 64 Climate control system
Top Tether ....................................... 62 Automatic engine start .................. 161
Cigarette lighter ................................ 309 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 161
Cleaning Climate control (3-zone automatic
Mirror turn signal ........................... 334 climate control) ............................. 142
Climate control Deactivating/activating ................. 162
Automatic climate control (3- Important safety notes .................. 161
zone) .............................................. 141 Introduction ................................... 161
Controlling automatically ............... 144 Cockpit
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 143 Overview .......................................... 32
Defrosting the windows ................. 148 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Defrosting the windshield .............. 147 PLUS
Dual-zone automatic climate con- Activating/deactivating ................. 245
trol ................................................. 139 Display message ............................ 258
ECO start/stop function (3-zone Operation/notes .............................. 69
automatic climate control) ............. 142 COMAND display
ECO start/stop function (dual- Cleaning ......................................... 336
zone automatic climate control) .... 139 Combination switch .......................... 126
Important safety notes .................. 138 Consumption statistics (on-board
Indicator lamp ................................ 144 computer) .......................................... 237
Information about using auto- Convenience box ............................... 304
matic climate control ..................... 142 Convenience closing feature .............. 99
Information about using dual-zone Convenience opening feature ............ 98
automatic climate control .............. 139 Coolant (engine)
Ionization ....................................... 152 Checking the level ......................... 327
Overview of systems ...................... 138 Display message ............................ 267
Perfume atomizer .......................... 150 Filling capacity ............................... 402
Problems with cooling with air Important safety notes .................. 401
dehumidification ............................ 144 Temperature display in the instru-
Problem with the rear window ment cluster .................................. 231
defroster ........................................ 149 Temperature display in the on-
Rear control panel ......................... 141 board computer ............................. 244
Refrigerant ..................................... 402 Warning lamp ................................. 291
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 403 Cooling
Setting the air distribution ............. 146 see Climate control
Setting the airflow ......................... 146 Copyright ............................................. 29
Setting the air vents ...................... 152
Setting the climate mode ............... 145
8 Index
Cornering light function Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 250

Display message ............................ 264 Introduction ................................... 250
Function/notes ............................. 127 Lights ............................................. 264
Crash-responsive emergency light- Safety systems .............................. 251
ing ....................................................... 130 SmartKey ....................................... 282
Crosswind Assist ................................. 73 Tires ............................................... 277
Cruise control Vehicle ........................................... 280
Cruise control lever ....................... 184 Distance recorder ............................. 236
Deactivating ................................... 185 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 293
Display message ............................ 276 Distance warning function
Driving system ............................... 183 Function/notes ................................ 69
Function/notes ............................. 183 DISTRONIC PLUS
Important safety notes .................. 183 Activating ....................................... 188
Setting a speed .............................. 185 Activation conditions ..................... 188
Storing and maintaining current Cruise control lever ....................... 187
speed ............................................. 184 Deactivating ................................... 192
Cup holder Display message ............................ 274
Center console .............................. 307 Displays in the multifunction dis-
Important safety notes .................. 306 play ................................................ 191
Rear compartment ......................... 307 Driving tips .................................... 192
Customer Assistance Center Function/notes ............................. 185
(CAC) ..................................................... 27 Important safety notes .................. 186
Customer Relations Department ....... 27 Selecting ........................................ 187
Setting the specified minimum
D distance ......................................... 191
Doors
Data Automatic locking (switch) ............... 88
see Technical data Central locking/unlocking
Daytime running lamps (SmartKey) ....................................... 81
Display message ............................ 266 Control panel ................................... 39
Function/notes ............................. 124 Display message ............................ 281
Switching on/off (on-board com- Emergency locking ........................... 89
puter) ............................................. 247 Emergency unlocking ....................... 88
Declarations of conformity ................. 26 Important safety notes .................... 87
Diagnostics connection ...................... 26 Opening (from inside) ...................... 87
Digital speedometer ......................... 237 Drinking and driving ......................... 178
DIRECT SELECT lever Drive program
Automatic transmission ................. 164 Automatic transmission ................. 168
Display Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 166
see Display messages Driver's door
see Warning and indicator lamps see Doors
Display messages Driving abroad
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 328 Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 329
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 250 Symmetrical low beam .................. 124
Driving systems ............................. 271 Driving Assistance package ............. 221
Engine ............................................ 267 Driving on flooded roads .................. 182
General notes ................................ 250
Index 9
Driving safety system Driving abroad ............................... 124

BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Driving in winter ............................. 182
Assist ............................................... 67 Driving on flooded roads ................ 182
Driving safety systems Driving on wet roads ...................... 182
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66 Exhaust check ............................... 178
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 74 Fuel ................................................ 178
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70 General .......................................... 178
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 67 Hydroplaning ................................. 182
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Icy road surfaces ........................... 182
PLUS ................................................ 69 Limited braking efficiency on sal-
Distance warning function ............... 69 ted roads ....................................... 181
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Snow chains .................................. 361
bution) ............................................. 73 Symmetrical low beam .................. 124
ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 156
gram) ............................................... 71 Wet road surface ........................... 181
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction DVD video
System) ........................................... 72 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 241
Important safety information ........... 66
Overview .......................................... 66 E
PRE-SAFE Brake ............................. 74 EASY-ENTRY feature
STEER CONTROL ............................. 76 Function/notes ............................. 116
Driving systems EASY-EXIT feature
360camera .................................. 211 Function/notes ............................. 116
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 221 EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 304
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 224 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Active Parking Assist ..................... 202 bution)
AIRMATIC ...................................... 197
Display message ............................ 254
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 216
Function/notes ................................ 73
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 217
ECO display
Cruise control ................................ 183
Function/notes ............................. 179
Display message ............................ 271
On-board computer ....................... 236
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 185
ECO start/stop function
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Climate control (dual-zone auto-
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 194
matic climate control) .................... 140
Driving Assistance package ........... 221
General information ....................... 161
HOLD function ............................... 196
Electronic Stability Program
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 219
Lane Tracking package .................. 217 see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
PARKTRONIC ................................. 199 Emergency
Rear view camera .......................... 207 Automatic measures after an acci-
Driving tips dent ................................................. 59
Automatic transmission ................. 167 Emergency release
Brakes ........................................... 180 Driver's door .................................... 88
Break-in period .............................. 156 Trunk ............................................... 97
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 192 Vehicle ............................................. 88
Downhill gradient ........................... 180 Emergency Tensioning Devices
Drinking and driving ....................... 178 Activation ......................................... 56
10 Index
Emissions control Exterior lighting

Service and warranty information .... 23 Cleaning ......................................... 333
Engine see Lights
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 291 Exterior mirrors
Display message ............................ 267 Adjusting ....................................... 118
ECO start/stop function ................ 161 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 119
Engine number ............................... 397 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 118
Irregular running ............................ 163 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 118
Jump-starting ................................. 349 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 119
Starting problems .......................... 163 Setting ........................................... 118
Starting the engine with the Storing settings (memory func-
SmartKey ....................................... 159 tion) ............................................... 121
Starting with the Start/Stop but- Storing the parking position .......... 119
ton ................................................. 159 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 299
Switching off .................................. 175
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 354 F
Engine electronics
Features ............................................. 306
Problem (malfunction) ................... 163
Engine oil Filler cap
Adding ........................................... 326 see Fuel filler flap
Additives ........................................ 400 Flat tire
Checking the oil level ..................... 325 Changing a wheel/mounting the
Checking the oil level using the spare wheel ................................... 381
dipstick .......................................... 325 MOExtended tires .......................... 341
Display message ............................ 269 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 341
Filling capacity ............................... 400 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 342
Notes about oil grades ................... 400 Floormats ........................................... 322
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 325 Fording
Viscosity ........................................ 400 On flooded roads ........................... 182
ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- Fuel
gram) Additives ........................................ 399
Characteristics ................................. 72 Consumption information .............. 399
Deactivating/activating ................... 72 Consumption statistics .................. 237
Display message ............................ 251 Displaying the current consump-
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 72 tion ................................................ 236
Function/notes ................................ 71 Displaying the range ...................... 236
General notes .................................. 71 Driving tips .................................... 178
Important safety information ........... 72 Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Warning lamp ................................. 288 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 398
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Important safety notes .................. 398
tem) ...................................................... 72 Problem (malfunction) ................... 174
Exhaust Refueling ........................................ 171
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 398
see Exhaust pipe
Fuel filler flap
Exhaust check ................................... 178
Opening ......................................... 172
Exhaust pipe
Fuel level
Cleaning ......................................... 335
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 236
Index 11
Fuel tank Storing settings (memory func-

Capacity ........................................ 398 tion) ............................................... 121
Problem (malfunction) ................... 174 Switching on or off ......................... 234
Fuses Switching the display on/off ......... 246
Allocation chart ............................. 356 Heating
Before changing ............................. 354 see Climate control
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 355 High beam flasher ............................. 126
Fuse box in the engine compart- High-beam headlamps
ment .............................................. 355 Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 127
Fuse box in the front-passenger Changing bulbs .............................. 132
footwell .......................................... 355 Display message ............................ 265
Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 356 Switching on/off ........................... 126
Important safety notes .................. 354 Hill start assist .................................. 160
HOLD function
G Activating ....................................... 197
Garage door opener Deactivating ................................... 197
Display message ............................ 274
Clearing the memory ..................... 321
Function/notes ............................. 196
General notes ................................ 318
Hood
Important safety notes .................. 319
Opening/closing the garage door .. 321 Closing ........................................... 325
Programming (button in the rear- Display message ............................ 281
view mirror) ................................... 319 Important safety notes .................. 324
Gasoline ............................................. 398 Opening ......................................... 324
Horn ...................................................... 32
Genuine parts ...................................... 22
Hydroplaning ..................................... 182
Glove box ........................................... 299
H I
Ignition lock
Handbrake
see Key positions
see Parking brake
Immobilizer .......................................... 76
HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 93
Indicator and warning lamps
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 127
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Headlamps
PLUS .............................................. 293
Cleaning system (notes) ................ 402
Indicator lamps
Fogging up ..................................... 128
see Warning and indicator lamps
see Automatic headlamp mode
Indicators
Head restraints
see Turn signals
Adjusting ....................................... 111
Insect protection on the radiator .... 325
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 112
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 111 Instrument cluster
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 112 Overview .......................................... 33
Installing/removing (rear) .............. 112 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34
Head-up display Instrument cluster lighting .............. 230
Adjusting the brightness ................ 247 Interior lighting
Function/notes ............................. 233 Control ........................................... 129
Important safety notes .................. 233 Emergency lighting ........................ 130
Setting the position ....................... 247
12 Index
Overview ........................................ 129 High-beam headlamps ................... 126

Reading lamp ................................. 129 Light switch ................................... 124
Low-beam headlamps .................... 125
J Parking lamps ................................ 126
Rear fog lamp ................................ 125
Jack
Setting exterior lighting ................. 124
Using ............................................. 382 Standing lamps .............................. 126
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 349 Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board com-
K puter) ............................................. 247
KEYLESS-GO Turn signals ................................... 126
Convenience closing feature ............ 99 see Interior lighting
Deactivation ..................................... 81 see Replacing bulbs
Locking ............................................ 81 Light sensor (display message) ....... 266
Unlocking ......................................... 81 Loading guidelines ............................ 298
Key positions Locking
SmartKey ....................................... 157 see Central locking
Start/Stop button .......................... 157 Locking (doors)
Kickdown Automatic ........................................ 88
Driving tips .................................... 167 Emergency locking ........................... 89
Knee bag .............................................. 50 From inside (central locking but-
ton) .................................................. 87
L Locking centrally
see Central locking
Lamps Low-beam headlamps
see Warning and indicator lamps Changing bulbs .............................. 131
Lane Keeping Assist Display message ............................ 264
Activating/deactivating (on- Setting for driving abroad (sym-
board computer) ............................ 246 metrical) ........................................ 124
Display message ............................ 272 Switching on/off ........................... 125
Function/information .................... 219 Lumbar support
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Lane Tracking package ..................... 217 port ................................................ 112
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ................................................ 62 M
License plate lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 265 M+S tires ............................................ 360
Light function, active Maintenance
Display message ............................ 266 see ASSYST PLUS
Lights Malfunction message
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 127 see Display messages
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 124 Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
Cornering light function ................. 127 tions) .................................................. 332
Driving abroad ............................... 124 mbrace
Fogged up headlamps .................... 128 Call priority .................................... 314
Hazard warning lamps ................... 127 Display message ............................ 258
High beam flasher .......................... 126 Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 315
Index 13
Downloading routes ....................... 318 Messages

Emergency call .............................. 312 see Display messages
General notes ................................ 310 see Warning and indicator lamps
Geo fencing ................................... 318 Mirrors
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 317 see Exterior mirrors
MB info call button ........................ 314 see Rear-view mirror
Remote vehicle locking .................. 316 see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Roadside Assistance button .......... 313 Mirror turn signal
Search & Send ............................... 315 Cleaning ......................................... 334
Self-test ......................................... 311 Mobile phone
Speed alert .................................... 318 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 242
System .......................................... 311 Modifying the programming
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 318 (SmartKey) ........................................... 82
Vehicle remote malfunction diag- MOExtended tires .............................. 341
nosis .............................................. 317 Mounting wheels
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 316 Lowering the vehicle ...................... 386
Mechanical key Mounting a new wheel ................... 385
Function/notes ................................ 83 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 381
Inserting .......................................... 83 Raising the vehicle ......................... 382
Locking vehicle ................................ 89 Removing a wheel .......................... 385
Removing ......................................... 83 Securing the vehicle against roll-
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 88 ing away ........................................ 382
Memory card (audio) ......................... 241 MP3
Memory function Operation ....................................... 241
Seats, steering wheel, exterior Multifunction display
mirrors ........................................... 120 Function/notes ............................. 233
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Permanent display ......................... 248
360camera .................................. 211 Multifunction steering wheel
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 221 Operating the on-board computer .. 231
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 224 Overview .......................................... 35
Active Parking Assist ..................... 202
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 216 N
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 217
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 185 Navigation
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Menu (on-board computer) ............ 238
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 194 Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
General notes ................................ 183 cle ....................................................... 156
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 219
PARKTRONIC ................................. 199 O
PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- Occupant Classification System
pant protection) ............................... 58 (OCS)
PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory Conditions ....................................... 51
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 58 Faults ............................................... 55
Rear view camera .......................... 207
Message memory (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 250
14 Index
Operation ......................................... 52 Operating system

System self-test ............................... 54 see On-board computer
Occupant safety Operator's Manual
Automatic measures after an acci- Overview .......................................... 23
dent ................................................. 59 Vehicle equipment ........................... 23
Children in the vehicle ..................... 59 Outside temperature display ........... 231
Important safety notes .................... 43 Overhead control panel ...................... 38
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 65 Override feature
PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- Rear side windows ........................... 65
pant protection) ............................... 58
Seat belt .......................................... 44 P
OCS
Conditions ....................................... 51 Paint code number ............................ 396
Faults ............................................... 55 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 332
Operation ......................................... 52 Panic alarm .......................................... 42
System self-test ............................... 54 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Odometer ........................................... 236 sliding panel
Oil Important safety notes .................. 101
see Engine oil Opening/closing ............................ 103
On-board computer Problem (malfunction) ................... 106
Assistance graphic menu ............... 243 Resetting ....................................... 105
Assistance menu ........................... 244 Parking
Displaying a service message ........ 329 Important safety notes .................. 174
Display messages .......................... 250 Parking brake ................................ 176
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 191 Position of exterior mirror, front-
Factory settings ............................. 249 passenger side ............................... 119
Head-up display ............................. 233 Rear view camera .......................... 207
Important safety notes .................. 230 see PARKTRONIC
Instrument cluster menu ............... 248 Parking aid
Lights menu ................................... 247 Active Parking Assist ..................... 202
Media menu ................................... 240 see Exterior mirrors
Menu overview .............................. 235 see PARKTRONIC
Message memory .......................... 250 Parking assistance
Navigation menu ............................ 238 see PARKTRONIC
Operation ....................................... 231 Parking brake
Radio menu ................................... 240 Display message ............................ 254
Service menu ................................. 244 Electric parking brake .................... 176
Settings menu ............................... 244 Warning lamp ................................. 290
Standard display ............................ 236 Parking lamps
Telephone menu ............................ 242 Switching on/off ........................... 126
Trip menu ...................................... 236 PARKTRONIC
Video DVD operation ..................... 241 Deactivating/activating ................. 201
Opening and closing the side trim Driving system ............................... 199
panels ................................................. 132 Function/notes ............................. 199
Operating safety Important safety notes .................. 199
Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Problem (malfunction) ................... 202
Important safety notes .................... 25
Index 15
Range of the sensors ..................... 199 Radio-wave reception/transmis-

Warning display ............................. 200 sion in the vehicle
PASSENGER AIR BAG Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Indicator lamps ................................ 43 Reading lamp ..................................... 129
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator Rear compartment
lamp Setting the airflow ......................... 146
Problem (malfunction) ................... 263 Setting the air vents ...................... 153
Perfume atomizer Setting the temperature ................ 145
Operating ....................................... 150 Rear fog lamp
Perfume vial ................................... 150 Switching on/off ........................... 125
Problem (malfunction) ................... 152 Rear lamps
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 65 see Lights
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Rear seat (folding the backrest for-
tions) .................................................. 336 wards/back) ...................................... 302
Power washers .................................. 331 Rear seats
Power windows Display message ............................ 281
see Side windows Rear view camera
PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant Cleaning instructions ..................... 334
protection) Function/notes ............................. 207
Display message ............................ 259 Switching on/off ........................... 208
Operation ......................................... 58 Rear-view mirror
PRE-SAFE Brake Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 117
Activating/deactivating ................. 245 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 119
Display message ............................ 259 Rear window blind ............................ 308
Function/notes ................................ 74 Rear window defroster
Important safety notes .................... 74 Problem (malfunction) ................... 149
Warning lamp ................................. 293 Switching on/off ........................... 148
PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory Recuperation display ........................ 236
occupant protection PLUS) Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
Operation ......................................... 58 tem)
Protection against theft Important safety notes .................. 402
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76 Refueling
Immobilizer ...................................... 76 Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Protection of the environment Important safety notes .................. 171
General notes .................................. 22 Refueling process .......................... 172
Pulling away see Fuel
Automatic transmission ................. 160 Remote control
Hill start assist ............................... 160 Garage door opener ....................... 318
Programming (garage door
Q opener) .......................................... 319
Replacing bulbs
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26 General notes ................................ 130
R Overview of bulb types .................. 130
Radiator cover ................................... 325 Removing/replacing the cover
Radio (front wheel arch) .......................... 131
Selecting a station ......................... 240 Reporting safety defects .................... 27
16 Index
Reserve (fuel tank) center rear-compartment seat ......... 47

see Fuel Cleaning ......................................... 337
Reserve fuel Correct usage .................................. 45
Display message ............................ 270 Fastening ......................................... 46
Warning lamp ................................. 291 Important safety guidelines ............. 44
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 149 Introduction ..................................... 44
Restraint system Releasing ......................................... 47
Display message ............................ 260 Warning lamp ................................. 284
Introduction ..................................... 42 Warning lamp (function) ................... 48
Warning lamp ................................. 290 Seats
Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 110
Reversing feature Adjusting (manually and electri-
Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 102 cally) .............................................. 110
Roller sunblinds ............................. 104 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Side windows ................................... 97 port ................................................ 112
Sliding sunroof ............................... 102 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 111
Trunk lid ........................................... 91 Cleaning the cover ......................... 337
Reversing lamps (display mes- Correct driver's seat position ........ 108
sage) ................................................... 266 Important safety notes .................. 109
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24 Seat heating .................................. 112
Roller sunblind Seat heating problem .................... 114
Panorama roof with power tilt/ Seat ventilation .............................. 114
sliding panel .................................. 104 Seat ventilation problem ................ 115
Rear side windows ......................... 308 Storing settings (memory func-
Rear window .................................. 308 tion) ............................................... 121
Roller sunblinds (panorama roof Switching seat heating on/off ....... 112
with power tilt/sliding panel) Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 114
Operating ....................................... 105 Selector lever
Roof carrier ........................................ 306 Cleaning ......................................... 336
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning see Automatic transmission
guidelines) ......................................... 337 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 334
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 403 Service menu (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 244
S Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 401
Safety Coolant (engine) ............................ 401
Children in the vehicle ..................... 59 Engine oil ....................................... 400
Child restraint systems .................... 61 Fuel ................................................ 397
Occupant Classification System Important safety notes .................. 397
(OCS) ............................................... 51 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
see Operating safety tem) ............................................... 402
Safety system Washer fluid ................................... 402
see Driving safety systems Settings
Seat belts Factory (on-board computer) ......... 249
Adjusting the driver's and front- On-board computer ....................... 244
passenger seat belt ......................... 47 Side impact air bag ............................. 50
Adjusting the height ......................... 46
Index 17
Side marker lamp (display mes- Segments ...................................... 231

sage) ................................................... 266 Selecting the unit of measure-
Side windows ment .............................................. 248
Cleaning ......................................... 333 see Instrument cluster
Convenience closing feature ............ 99 Standing lamps
Convenience opening feature .......... 98 Display message ............................ 266
Important safety information ........... 97 Switching on/off ........................... 126
Opening/closing .............................. 98 Start/Stop button
Problem (malfunction) ................... 101 Starting the engine ........................ 159
Resetting ......................................... 99 Start/stop function
Sliding sunroof see ECO start/stop function
Opening/closing ............................ 102 Starting (engine) ................................ 159
Resetting ....................................... 103 STEER CONTROL .................................. 76
see Panorama roof with power Steering
tilt/sliding panel Warning lamps ............................... 295
SmartKey Steering (display message) .............. 281
Changing the battery ....................... 84 Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
Changing the programming ............. 82 (DISTRONIC PLUS)
Checking the battery ....................... 84 Display message ............................ 276
Convenience closing feature ............ 99 Steering assistant STEER CON-
Convenience opening feature .......... 98 TROL
Display message ............................ 282 see STEER CONTROL
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 81 Steering wheel
Important safety notes .................... 80 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 116
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 82 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 115
Loss ................................................. 85 Button overview ............................... 35
Mechanical key ................................ 83 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 231
Overview .......................................... 80 Cleaning ......................................... 336
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 157 EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 116
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 85 Important safety notes .................. 115
Starting the engine ........................ 159 Paddle shifters ............................... 169
Snow chains ...................................... 361 Storing settings (memory func-
Sockets tion) ............................................... 121
Center console .............................. 310 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 169
General notes ................................ 310 Stowage areas ................................... 298
Rear compartment ......................... 310 Stowage compartments
Specialist workshop ............................ 26 Armrest (under) ............................. 300
Special seat belt retractor .................. 60 Center console .............................. 299
Speed, controlling Cup holders ................................... 306
see Cruise control Door ............................................... 300
Speedometer Eyeglasses compartment ............... 299
Activating/deactivating the addi- Glove box ....................................... 299
tional speedometer ........................ 248 Important safety information ......... 298
Digital ............................................ 237 Map pockets .................................. 300
In the Instrument cluster ................. 33 Rear ............................................... 300
Stowage net ................................... 300
Stowage net ....................................... 300
18 Index
Stowage well beneath the trunk Notes ............................................. 363

floor .................................................... 305 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 344
Summer tires Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 344
In winter ........................................ 360 Recommended ............................... 361
Sun visor ............................................ 307 Tire pressure loss warning sys-
Suspension tuning tem
AIRMATIC ...................................... 198 General notes ................................ 368
Switching air-recirculation mode Important safety notes .................. 368
on/off ................................................. 149 Restarting ...................................... 369
Tire pressure monitor
T Checking the tire pressure elec-
tronically ........................................ 367
Tachometer ........................................ 231 Function/notes ............................. 365
Tail lamps General notes ................................ 365
Display message ............................ 265 Important safety notes .................. 365
see Lights Radio type approval for the tire
Tank content pressure monitor ........................... 368
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Restarting ...................................... 367
Technical data Warning lamp ................................. 294
Capacities ...................................... 397 Warning message .......................... 367
Information .................................... 396 Tires
Tires/wheels ................................. 386 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 380
Vehicle data ................................... 403 Average weight of the vehicle
Telephone occupants (definition) .................... 379
Accepting a call (multifunction Bar (definition) ............................... 378
steering wheel) .............................. 242 Changing a wheel .......................... 381
Display message ............................ 282 Characteristics .............................. 378
Introduction ................................... 242 Checking ........................................ 359
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 242 Curb weight (definition) ................. 380
Number from the phone book ........ 243 Definition of terms ......................... 378
Redialing ........................................ 243 Direction of rotation ...................... 381
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 242 Display message ............................ 277
Temperature Distribution of the vehicle occu-
Coolant (display in the instrument pants (definition) ............................ 381
cluster) .......................................... 231 DOT, Tire Identification Number
Coolant (display in the on-board (TIN) ............................................... 378
computer) ...................................... 244 DOT (Department of Transporta-
Outside temperature ...................... 231 tion) (definition) ............................. 379
Setting (climate control) ................ 145 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Through-loading feature ................... 301 (definition) ..................................... 379
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 342 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
Tire pressure inition) ........................................... 379
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 365 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Checking manually ........................ 365 ing) (definition) .............................. 379
Display message ............................ 277 Important safety notes .................. 358
Important safety notes .................. 365 Increased vehicle weight due to
Maximum ....................................... 364 optional equipment (definition) ...... 379
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 379
Index 19
Labeling (overview) ........................ 375 Top Tether ............................................ 62

Load bearing index (definition) ...... 380 Towing away
Load index ..................................... 377 Important safety guidelines ........... 351
Load index (definition) ................... 379 Installing the towing eye ................ 352
Maximum loaded vehicle weight Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 354
(definition) ..................................... 379 Removing the towing eye ............... 353
Maximum load on a tire (defini- With both axles on the ground ....... 353
tion) ............................................... 380 With the rear axle raised ................ 353
Maximum permissible tire pres- Towing eye ......................................... 340
sure (definition) ............................. 380 Tow-starting
Maximum tire load ......................... 377 Emergency engine starting ............ 354
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 380 Important safety notes .................. 351
MOExtended tires .......................... 360 Transfer case ..................................... 171
Optional equipment weight (defi- Transmission
nition) ............................................ 380 see Automatic transmission
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- Transmission position display ......... 166
inition) ........................................... 380 Transmission position display
Replacing ....................................... 381 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 166
Service life ..................................... 360 Transporting the vehicle .................. 353
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 380 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
Speed rating (definition) ................ 379 tions) .................................................. 336
Storing ........................................... 381 Trip computer (on-board com-
Structure and characteristics
puter) .................................................. 237
(definition) ..................................... 378
Trip odometer
Summer tires in winter .................. 360
Calling up ....................................... 236
Temperature .................................. 374
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 237
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Trunk
(definition) ..................................... 380
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 380 Emergency release .......................... 96
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 380 Important safety notes .................... 90
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 379 Locking separately ........................... 96
Tire size (data) ............................... 386 Opening/closing (automatically
Tire size designation, load-bearing from inside) ...................................... 95
capacity, speed rating .................... 375 Opening/closing (automatically
Tire tread ....................................... 359 from outside) ................................... 92
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 380 Opening/closing (from outside,
Total load limit (definition) ............. 381 HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 93
Traction ......................................... 374 Opening/closing (manually from
Traction (definition) ....................... 380 outside) ............................................ 91
Tread wear ..................................... 374 Opening (automatically from
Uniform Tire Quality Grading inside) .............................................. 95
Standards ...................................... 373 Opening (automatically from out-
Uniform Tire Quality Grading side) ................................................. 93
Standards (definition) .................... 379 Trunk lid
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 380 Display message ............................ 280
Wheel and tire combination ........... 388 Obstacle recognition ........................ 91
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 379 Opening/closing .............................. 90
see Flat tire Opening dimensions ...................... 403
20 Index
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 403 Vehicle identification number

Turn signals see VIN
Changing bulbs (front) ................... 132 Vehicle identification plate .............. 396
Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 132 Vehicle level
Display message ............................ 264 AIRMATIC ...................................... 198
Switching on/off ........................... 126 Display message ............................ 271
Type identification plate Vehicle maintenance
see Vehicle identification plate see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 340
U Video
Unlocking Operating the DVD ......................... 241
VIN ...................................................... 396
Emergency unlocking ....................... 88
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 87 W
Warning and indicator lamps
V ABS ................................................ 286
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 308 Brakes ........................................... 285
Vehicle Check Engine ................................. 291
Coolant .......................................... 291
Correct use ...................................... 27
Distance warning ........................... 293
Data acquisition ............................... 28
Display message ............................ 280 ESP .............................................. 288
Equipment ....................................... 23 ESP OFF ....................................... 289
Individual settings .......................... 244 Overview .......................................... 34
Limited Warranty ............................. 27 Parking brake ................................ 290
Loading .......................................... 369 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 43
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 89 Reserve fuel ................................... 291
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 81 Restraint system ............................ 290
Lowering ........................................ 386 Seat belt ........................................ 284
Maintenance .................................... 24 Steering ......................................... 295
Operating safety .............................. 25 Tire pressure monitor .................... 294
Parking for a long period ................ 177 Warranty .............................................. 23
Pulling away ................................... 160 Washer fluid
Raising ........................................... 382 Display message ............................ 282
Reporting problems ......................... 27 Wheel and tire combination
Securing from rolling away ............ 382 see Tires
Towing away .................................. 351 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 386
Transporting .................................. 353 Wheel chock ...................................... 382
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 88 Wheels
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 81 Changing a wheel .......................... 381
Vehicle data ................................... 403 Checking ........................................ 359
Vehicle data Cleaning ......................................... 333
Roof load (maximum) ..................... 403 Important safety notes .................. 358
Trunk load (maximum) ................... 403 Interchanging/changing ................ 381
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 403 Mounting a new wheel ................... 385
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 89 Mounting a wheel .......................... 381
Removing a wheel .......................... 385
Index 21
Storing ........................................... 381

Tightening torque ........................... 386
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 386
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 261
Operation ......................................... 51
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 147
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 327
Notes ............................................. 402
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 136
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 134
Switching on/off ........................... 133
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 182
Snow chains .................................. 361
Winter operation
Radiator cover ............................... 325
Summer tires ................................. 360
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 360
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 333
Replacing ....................................... 134
Replacing (windshield) ................... 134
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 336
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
22 Introduction
Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require
and humanity into account. you to dispose of materials, first try to regen-
You too can help to protect the environment erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- environmental rules and regulations when
tally responsible manner. disposing of materials. In this way you will
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, help to protect the environment.
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions:
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
sumption. parts.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
the following areas of your vehicle:
them.
Rdoors
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should Rdoor pillars
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rdoor sills
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rseats
qualified specialist workshop. Rcockpit
Personal driving style: Rinstrument cluster
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rcenter console
starting the engine. Do not install accessories such as audio
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle systems in these areas. Do not carry out
is stationary. repairs or welding. You could impair the
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
from the vehicle in front. tems.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
braking. qualified specialist workshop.
Introduction 23
You could jeopardize the operating safety of The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels Booklet are important documents and should
as well as accessories relevant to safety be kept in the vehicle.
which have not been approved by Mercedes.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use Service and vehicle operation
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and Warranty
accessories that have been specifically The implied warranty for your vehicle applies
approved for your vehicle. in accordance with the warranty terms and
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- mation booklet.
cifically developed, manufactured or selected Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should accordance with the following warranty terms
therefore be used. and conditions:
More than 300,000 different genuine RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for REmission System Warranty
Mercedes-Benz models.
REmission Performance Warranty
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
for necessary service and repair work. In addi- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
tion, strategically located parts delivery cen- Island and Vermont Emission Control Sys-
ters provide quick and reliable parts service. tem Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
Always specify the vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes- laws)
Benz parts (Y page 396). Replacement parts and accessories are cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-
sories warranties. These are available at any
Operator's Manual authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and War-

ranty Information booklet, have an author-
This Operator's Manual describes all models ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
and all standard and optional equipment of replacement. The new Service and War-
your vehicle available at the time of going to ranty Information booklet will be posted to
print. Country-specific differences are possi- you.
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
24 Introduction
Information for customers in Califor- Maintenance

nia
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals.
purchase price or lease price, if after a rea- Always have the Service and Warranty Book-
sonable number of repair attempts let with you when you bring the vehicle to an
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-
ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or vice advisor will record every service for you
more substantial defects or malfunctions in in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
the vehicle that are covered by its express
warranty. During the period of 18 months
from original delivery of the vehicle or the Roadside Assistance
accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately
29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
whichever occurs first, a reasonable number Program offers technical help in the event of a
of repair attempts is presumed for a retail breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
buyer or lessee if one or more of the following Assistance Hotline are answered by our
occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc- (USA)
tion results in a condition that is likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury if the 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc- For additional information, refer to the
tion has been subject to repair two or Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
more times, and you have directly noti- gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-
fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing tance" section in the Service and Warranty
of the need for its repair, booklet (Canada). You will find both in your
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc- vehicle literature portfolio.
tion of a less serious nature than cate-
gory (1) has been subject to repair four or
more times and you have directly notified Change of address or change of own-
us in writing of the need for its repair, or ership
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of In the event of a change of address, please
repair of the same or different substantial send us the "Notification of Address Change"
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-
total of more than 30 calendar days. ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center (USA) at the hotline number
Please send your written notice to:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (Canada) at
Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-
One Mercedes Drive tacting you in a timely manner should the
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
Introduction 25
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Center (USA) at the hotline number Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or nance work as well as any required repairs
Customer Service (Canada) at carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
1-800-387-0100.
G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Vehicle operation outside the USA
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
and Canada
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign of fire.
countries, please be aware that: When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
not be readily available. particular, remove parts of plants or other
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic flammable materials which have become
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
may cause damage to the catalytic con- qualified specialist workshop.
verter.
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower
G WARNING
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause Modifications to electronic components, their
engine damage. software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available
worked components. In particular, systems
for delivery in Europe through our European
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
Delivery Program. For details, consult an
result, these may no longer function as inten-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
one of the following addresses.
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
In the USA accident and injury.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
European Delivery Department tronic components or their software. You
One Mercedes Drive should have all work to electrical and elec-
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
In Canada specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-
European Delivery Department tronics, the general operating permit is ren-
98 Vanderhoof Avenue dered invalid.
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
Operating safety curb or an unpaved road

Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
Important safety notes curb or a hole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage
G WARNING
or parts of the chassis
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
Z
26 Introduction
In situations like this, the body, the under- Diagnostics connection

carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires
could be damaged without the damage The diagnostics connection is only intended
being visible. Components damaged in this for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of a qualified specialist workshop.
an accident, no longer withstand the strain G WARNING
they are designed to. If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
If the underbody paneling is damaged, connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
combustible materials such as leaves, operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
grass or twigs can gather between the the operating safety of the vehicle could be
underbody and the underbody paneling. If affected. There is a risk of an accident.
these materials come in contact with hot Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
parts of the exhaust system, they can catch tics connection in the vehicle.
fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle G WARNING
checked and repaired immediately at a Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
qualified specialist workshop. If on con- pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
tinuing your journey you notice that driving The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
safety is impaired, pull over and stop the jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
vehicle immediately, paying attention to
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
road and traffic conditions. In such cases,
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
visit a qualified specialist workshop.
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
Declarations of conformity
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
Vehicle components which receive top of one another.
and/or transmit radio waves
! If the engine is switched off and equip-
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle ment on the diagnostics connection is
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper- used, the starter battery may discharge.
ation is subject to the following two condi-
tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm- Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
ful interference, and 2) These devices must connection can lead to emissions monitoring
accept any interference received, including information being reset, for example. This
interference that may cause undesired oper- may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
ation. Changes or modifications not expressly requirements of the next emissions test dur-
approved by the party responsible for coming the main inspection.
pliance could void the users authority to
operate the equipment."
Qualified specialist workshop
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the qualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-
following two conditions: (1) These devices essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-
may not cause interference, and (2) These fications to correctly carry out the work
devices must accept any interference, includ- required on your vehicle. This is especially the
ing interference that may cause undesired case for work relevant to safety.
operation of the device."
Introduction 27
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- 98 Vanderhoof Avenue

let. Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety Reporting safety defects
Rservice and maintenance work USA only:
Rrepair work The following text is published as required of
Ralterations, installation work and modifica- manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
tions Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
Rwork on electronic components
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
Correct use which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
If you remove any warning stickers, you or inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-
Leave warning stickers in position. ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
Observe the following information when driv- If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
ing your vehicle: open an investigation, and if it finds that a
Rthe safety notes in this manual safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
Rthe Technical Data section in this manual may order a recall and remedy campaign.
Rtraffic rules and regulations
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
motor vehicles
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
Problems with your vehicle 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you should experience a problem with your Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may SW., Washington, DC 20590.
affect its safe operation, we urge you to con- You can also obtain other information about
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center motor vehicle safety from
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
http://www.safercar.gov
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-
Limited Warranty
tact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA ! Follow the instructions in this manual
Customer Assistance Center about the proper operation of your vehicle
as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
One Mercedes Drive culpable contraventions against these
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 instructions is not covered either by the
In Canada Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
Customer Relations Department New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Z
28 Introduction
Data stored in the vehicle Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
Data recording Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling
This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic This data can help provide a better under-
information relating to vehicle operation, mal- standing of the circumstances in which
functions, and user settings. This may include crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is
information about the performance or status recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
of various systems, including but not limited crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
to, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys- the EDR under normal driving conditions and
tems, that is stored and can be read out with no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
suitable devices, particularly when the vehi- and crash location) are recorded. However,
cle is serviced. The data obtained is used to other parties, such as law enforcement, can
properly diagnose and service your vehicle or combine the EDR data with the type of per-
to further optimize and develop vehicle func- sonal identification data routinely acquired
tions. during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
COMAND/mbrace cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
mbrace, additional data about the vehicles the special equipment, such as law enforce-
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain ment, can read the information by accessing
situations, and the location of the vehicle may the vehicle or the EDR.
be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace EDR data may be used in civil and criminal
system. matters as a tool in accident reconstruction,
For additional information please refer to the accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the
COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to
Terms and Conditions. extract data from the EDR is commercially
available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-
Event data recorders bility arising from the extraction of this infor-
mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-
This vehicle is equipped with an event data sonnel.
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
is to record data that will assist in under-
without the consent of the vehicle owners or,
standing how a vehicles systems performed
if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of
in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
the lessee. Exceptions to this representation
such as during air bag deployment or when
include responses to subpoenas by law
hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed
enforcement; by federal, state or local gov-
to record data related to vehicle dynamics
ernment; in connection with or arising out of
and safety systems for a short period of time,
litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries
typically 30 seconds or less.
and affiliates; or, as required by law.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
such data as:
Restraint System Module. Tampering with,
Rhow various systems in your vehicle are altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-
operating ponent may result in a malfunction of the
Rwhether or not the driver and passenger Restraint System Module and other systems.
seat belts are fastened
Introduction 29
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that

conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-
ted. This means that in the event of such con-
flict, the federal regulation governs. As of
February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws
relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the fol-
lowing website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Z
30
31
Cockpit ................................................. 32
Instrument cluster .............................. 33
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35
At a glance
Center console .................................... 36
Overhead control panel ...................... 38
Door control panel .............................. 39
32 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle H Electric parking brake 176
shifters 169
I Diagnostics connection 26
; Combination switch 126
J Opens the hood 324
= Horn
K Light switch 124
? Instrument cluster 33
L Control panel for:
A DIRECT SELECT lever 164 Activating Steering Assist 194
B Climate control systems 138 Switching on Active Lane
Keeping Assist 224
C Overhead control panel 38 Deactivating PARKTRONIC 199
D Control panel for COMAND Switching on 360 camera 211
and vehicle functions 36 Switching on the head-up
display 233
E Ignition lock 157
Vehicles without a driver
Start/Stop button 157
assistance system: map/
F Adjusts the steering wheel 115 coin holder
G Cruise control lever 184
Instrument cluster 33
Instrument cluster
Displays
At a glance
: Speedometer ? Coolant temperature dis-
play 231
; Multifunction display 233
A Fuel gauge
= Tachometer 231
34 Instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

: ESP OFF 288 H J Brakes (yellow) 285
; ESP 288 I 6 Restraint system 42
= Distance warning 293 J Seat belt 284
? Power steering 295 K K High-beam head-

lamps 126
A #! Turn signals 126
L L Low-beam head-
B ! Electric parking brake lamps 125
(yellow) 290
M 8 Reserve fuel 291
C ! ABS 286
N T Parking lamps,
D ; Check Engine 291 license plate and instru-
E Electric parking brake (red) 290 ment cluster lighting 126
F USA only O N This lamp has no func-
! Canada only tion
F Brakes (red) 285 P R Rear fog lamps 125
$ USA only Q h Tire pressure monitor 294
J Canada only
G ? Coolant 291
Multifunction steering wheel 35
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 233 ?
; Audio 20/COMAND Online Calls up the main menu
display; see the separate 9:
operating instructions Selects a menu/submenu
or scrolls through lists 231
= ~
a
Rejects or ends a call 242
Confirms your selection 231
Exits phone book/redial
Hides display messages 250
memory
%
6
Back 231
Makes or accepts a call

Switches to the redial mem-
ory Switches off the Voice Con-
trol System; see the sepa-
WX
rate operating instructions
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute

Switches on the Voice Con-
trol System; see the sepa-
rate operating instructions
36 Center console
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance

: Climate control systems 138 B Analog clock
; Hazard warning C Media button (see the sep-
lamps 127 arate Operator's Manual)
= Vehicle functions/system D Radio button (see the sep-
settings button (see the arate Operator's Manual)
separate Operator's Man-
ual) E Navigation button (see the
? Telephone button (see the ual)
ual) F Inserts/removes a
CD/DVD; see the separate
A PASSENGER AIR BAG indi- Operator's Manual)
cator lamp 43
ATA indicator lamp 76
Center console 37
Center console, lower section
At a glance
: Cup holder 306 C u Rear window roller
sunblind 308
; Adjusts the volume/mute
(see the separate Opera- D Sets the vehicle level 197
tor's Manual)
E AGILITY SELECT switch 167
= Switches audio/COMAND
on/off; see the separate F Back button (see the sepa-
Operator's Manual rate Operator's Manual)
? ECO start/stop func- G Audio 20/COMAND con-

tion 161 troller (see the separate
Operator's Manual)
A Touchpad (see the separate
Operator's Manual) H g Switches to the favor-
ites button (see the sepa-
B Stowage compartment 298 rate Operator's Manual)
38 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: p Switches the left- E 3 Opens/closes the
hand reading lamp on/off 129 panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel 103
; | Switches the auto-
matic interior lighting con- Opens/closes the roller
trol on/off 129 sunblinds 104
= G SOS button (mbrace F Rear-view mirror 117

system) 312 G Buttons for the garage door
? c Switches the front opener 319
interior lighting on/off 129 H Microphone for mbrace
A u Switches the rear (emergency call system),
interior lighting on/off 129 telephone and the Voice
Control System; see the
B p Switches the right- separate operating instruc-
hand reading lamp on/off 129 tions
C MB Info call button I F Roadside Assistance
(mbrace system) 314 call button (mbrace sys-
tem) 313
D Eyeglasses compartment 299
Door control panel 39
Door control panel
At a glance
: r45= E 7Z\
Stores settings for the seat, Adjusts and folds the exte-
exterior mirrors and steer- rior mirrors in/out electri-
ing wheel 120 cally 118
; Adjusts the seats electri- F W Opens/closes the
cally 110 right side window 97
= c Seat heating 112 G W Opens/closes the
rear right side window 97
? s Seat ventilation 114
H n Override feature for
A Opens the door 87 the controls in the rear
B % & Unlocks/locks compartment 65
the vehicle 87 I p Opens/closes the
C W Opens/closes the trunk lid 95
rear left side window 97
D W Opens/closes the left
side window 97
40
41
Useful information .............................. 42

Panic alarm .......................................... 42
Occupant safety .................................. 42
Children in the vehicle ........................ 59
Safety
Pets in the vehicle .............................. 65
Driving safety systems ....................... 66
Protection against theft ..................... 76
42 Occupant safety
Useful information Occupant safety

Restraint system: introduction
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional equip- The restraint system reduces the risk of vehi-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of cle occupants coming into contact with parts
publication of the Operator's Manual.
Safety
of the vehicle's interior in the event of an

Country-specific differences are possible. accident. The restraint system can also
Please note that your vehicle may not be reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants
equipped with all features described. This are subjected during an accident.
also applies to safety-related systems and The restraint system comprises:
functions.
RSeat belt system
i Read the information on qualified special- RAir bags
ist workshops (Y page 26). RChild restraint system
RChild seat securing systems
Panic alarm The components of the restraint system work

in conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times,
all vehicle occupants:
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 45)
Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint
properly (Y page 109).
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the cor-
rect driver's seat position (Y page 108).
X To activate: press ! button : for at You also have to make sure that an air bag can
least one second. inflate properly if deployed (Y page 48).
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting An air bag supplements a correctly fastened
flashes. seat belt and is an additional safety device
X To deactivate: press ! button : providing increased protection for vehicle
again. occupants in appropriate accident situations.
For example, if, in the event of an accident,
or
the protection offered by the seat belt is suf-
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
ficient, the air bags are not deployed. When
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func- an accident occurs, only the air bags that
tion or KEYLESSGO increase protection in that particular accident
X Press the Start/Stop button. situation are deployed. However, seat belts
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. and air bags generally do not protect against
objects penetrating the vehicle from the out-
side.
Information on restraint system operation
can be found under "Triggering of the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device and air bags"
(Y page 56).
Occupant safety 43
For more information about children traveling G WARNING

with you in the vehicle and on child restraint If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint
systems, see "Children in the vehicle" system components may be triggered unin-
(Y page 59). tentionally or might not be triggered at all in
the event of an accident with a high rate of
Safety
vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-
Important safety notes gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-
G WARNING ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The Have the restraint system checked and
restraint system may then not perform its repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as
intended protective function and may fail in an soon as possible.
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details. USA only: for further information con-
tact our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).
Restraint system warning lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp :

and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
The functions of the restraint system are lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classifica-
checked after the ignition is switched on and tion System (OCS).
at regular intervals while the engine is run-
The indicator lamps display the status of the
ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-
front-passenger front air bag.
ted in good time.
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON : lights up: the
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up when the igni- front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If,
tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a in the event of an accident, all deployment
few seconds after the engine is started. The criteria are met, the front-passenger front
components of the restraint system are in air bag is deployed.
operational readiness. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; lights up: the
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-

restraint system warning lamp: ted. They will then not be deployed in the
event of an accident.
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is
switched on
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with
the engine running
Rlights up again while the engine is running
Z
44 Occupant safety
Depending on the person in the front- If the seat belt is pulled quickly or suddenly
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air from the belt sash guide, the inertia reel
bag must either be disabled or enabled; see locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out fur-
the following points. You must make sure of ther.
this both before and during a journey. Emergency Tensioning Devices tighten the
seat belts in an accident, pulling them close
Safety
RChildren in a child restraint system:

whether the front-passenger front air bag is against the occupant's body. They do not,
enabled or deactivated depends on the however, pull vehicle occupants back
installed child restraint system, and the age towards the backrest.
and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to Emergency Tensioning Devices do not cor-
observe the notes on the "Occupant clas- rect an incorrect seat position or incorrectly
sification system (OCS)" (Y page 51) and worn seat belts.
on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59). When activated, the belt force limiters reduce
There you will also find instructions on the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehi-
backwards- and forwards-facing child cle occupants.
restraint systems on the front-passenger The belt force limiters for the front seats are
seat. synchronized with the front air bags, which
RAll other persons: depending on the clas- absorb part of the deceleration force. This
sification of the person in the front- makes it possible to reduce the forces to
passenger seat, the front-passenger front which vehicle occupants are subjected during
air bag is enabled or deactivated an accident.
(Y page 51). Be sure to observe the notes
on "Seat belts (Y page 44) and "Air bags" ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,
(Y page 48). There you can also find infor- do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle
mation on the correct seat position. of the front-passenger seat. This may oth-
erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device in the event of an
Seat belts accident, which will then need to be
replaced.
Introduction
Important safety notes
A correctly fastened seat belt is the most
effective means of restraining the movement The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
of vehicle occupants in the event of an acci- tems is required by law in:
dent or overturn. This reduces the risk of Rall 50 states
vehicle occupants coming into contact with
Rthe U.S. territories
parts of the vehicle interior or being thrown
from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt Rthe District of Columbia
helps to keep the vehicle occupants in the Rall Canadian provinces
best position in relation to the air bag. Even where this is not required by law, all
The seat belt system consists of: vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
RSeat belts their seat belts before starting the journey.
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the G WARNING
front seat belts and the outer seat belts in If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-
the rear compartment not protect as intended. Furthermore, an
RBelt force limiters for the front seat belts incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-
and the outer seat belts in the rear tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-
Occupant safety 45
ing braking or when abruptly changing direc- (Y page 59) in addition to the child
tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or restraint system manufacturer's installa-
even fatal injury. tion instructions
Make sure that all vehicle occupants are Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
seated properly with a correctly fastened seat safety notes on the "Occupant classifica-
tion system (OCS)" (Y page 51)
Safety
belt.
G WARNING
G WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended
The seat belt does not offer the intended level protective function if:
of protection if you have not moved the back-
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could dirty, bleach or dyed
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This extremely dirty
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
injury. anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
Adjust the seat properly before beginning fied
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
is in an almost vertical position and that the an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,
across the center of your shoulder. e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or
G WARNING fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
tional suitable restraint system. If the seat sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia
belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas- undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
example, in an accident, during braking or an immediately at a qualified specialist work-
abrupt change of direction. This poses an shop.
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under Only use seat belts that have been approved
5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any such
systems. modifications could invalidate the vehicle's
general operating permit.
If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft
(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Proper use of the seat belts
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz (Y page 44).
vehicle. The child restraint system must be All vehicle occupants must be wearing the
appropriate to the age, weight and size of seat belt correctly before beginning the jour-
the child ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-
Ralways observe the instructions and safety pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-
notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec- rectly while the vehicle is in motion.
tion of this Operator's Manual
Z
46 Occupant safety
When fastening the seat belt, always make Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
sure that:
Please take note of the safety notes on seat
Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belts (Y page 44) and the notes on their cor-
belt buckle belonging to that seat. rect use (Y page 45).
Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. If the center rear seat belt is used, observe
Safety
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter the information about the seat belt for the
coat. center rear seat (Y page 47).
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Only then can the forces which occur be
distributed over the area of the belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
routed across the center of your shoulder.
The shoulder section of the belt must not
come into contact with your neck or be
routed under your arm. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate
height.
Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down
as possible across your lap.
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdo-
men. This applies particularly to pregnant
women. If necessary, push the lap belt X Adjust the seat (Y page 108).
down to your hip joint and pull it tight using The seat backrest must be in an almost
the shoulder section of the belt. upright position.
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,
X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of belt outlet
pointed or fragile objects. = and engage belt tongue ; in buckle :.
If you have such items located on or in your The driver's and front-passenger's seat
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, belts are automatically pulled taut as
store these in a suitable place. required, see Belt adjustment
Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a (Y page 47).
time. X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
Infants and children must never travel sit- section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the across your body.
event of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat
belt.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe
the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,
luggage or loads (Y page 298).
Occupant safety 47
The shoulder section of the belt must always

run over the center of the shoulder. Adjust the
belt outlet if necessary.
X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.
The belt outlet engages in various posi-
Safety
tions.
X To lower: slide the belt outlet downward,
pressing belt outlet release catch :.
X Once the desired position has been
reached, release belt outlet release
catch : and ensure the belt outlet
engages in place.
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-
er's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat
belt retractor to secure child restraint sys-
tems properly. Further information can be X Press release button :, hold belt
found under "Special seat belt retractor" tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards
(Y page 60). belt outlet =.
Seat belt for the center rear seat Seat belt adjustment
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
down and back up again, the rear center seat the PRE-SAFE convenience function. This
belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be function adjusts the driver's and front-
pulled out. passenger seat belt to the upper body of the
X To release the rear center seat belt: pull occupants.
the seat belt out approximately 1 in The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
(25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrest Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle
and then release it again.
and
The seat belt is retracted and released.
Rthe ignition is switched on
Releasing seat belts The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain

tightening force if any slack is detected
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled between the vehicle occupant and the seat
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly
will be trapped in the door or in the seat while it is adjusting.
mechanism. This could damage the door, You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- and off using COMAND or Audio 20. Informa-
aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their tion on activating and deactivating the seat-
protective function and must be replaced. belt adjustment function can be found in the
Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Digital Operator's Manual or in the separate
COMAND or Audio 20 operating instructions.
Z
48 Occupant safety
Belt warning for the driver and front belt. The air bag provides additional protec-
passenger tion in applicable accident situations.
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
ment cluster is a reminder that all occupants The different air bag systems function inde-
must fasten their seat belts. It may light up pendently from one another (Y page 56).
Safety
continuously or flash. In addition, there may However, no system available today can com-
be a warning tone. pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
Regardless of whether the driver's and front- It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
passenger seat belts have already been fas- caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
tened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights which the air bag must be deployed.
up for six seconds each time the engine is
started. If, after six seconds, the driver or Important safety notes
front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-
tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat G WARNING
belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
driver's and front-passenger seat belts are the air bag cannot protect as intended and
fastened or a front door is opened again, the could even cause additional injury when
7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. deployed. This poses an increased risk of
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after injury or even fatal injury.
the engine is started, an additional warning To avoid hazardous situations, always make
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,
fastened. including pregnant women
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front- est possible distance to the air bags
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a Rfollow the following instructions
warning tone sounds. A warning tone also
Always make sure that there are no objects
sounds with increasing intensity for
between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
60 seconds or until the driver or front
pants.
passenger have fastened their seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their RAdjust the seats properly before beginning
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt your journey. Always make sure that the
warning is activated again. seat is in an almost upright position. The
i For more information on the 7 seat center of the head restraint must support
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi- the head at about eye level.
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat RMove the driver's and front-passenger
belts" (Y page 284). seats as far back as possible. The driver's
seat position must allow the vehicle to be
driven safely.
Air bags ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-
side. This allows the air bag to be fully
Introduction deployed.
The installation point of an air bag can be rec- RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against
An air bag complements the correctly fas- the door or side window. You may other-
tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat
Occupant safety 49
wise be in the deployment area of the air ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side
bags. windows, rear side trim or side walls.
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects
front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the are in the pockets of your clothing. Store
dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth- such objects in a suitable place.
erwise be in the deployment area of the air
Safety
bag. G WARNING
RFor this reason, always secure persons less
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint
function correctly. There is an increased risk
systems. Up to this height, the seat belt
of injury.
cannot be worn correctly.
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
to it.
observe the following notes:
RAlways secure children under 12 years of G WARNING
age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in Sensors to control the air bags are located in
suitable child restraint systems. the doors. Modifications or work not per-
RChild restraint systems should be installed formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
on the rear seats. ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing function of the sensors being impaired. The air
child restraint system to the front- bags might therefore not function properly
passenger seat when the front-passenger any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot
front air bag is disabled. If the PASSENGER protect vehicle occupants as they are
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently designed to do. There is an increased risk of
lit, the front-passenger front air bag is dis- injury.
abled (Y page 43). Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
RAlways observe the instructions and safety Always have work on the doors or door pan-
notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys- eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
tem (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children shop.
in the vehicle" (Y page 59) in addition to
the child restraint system manufacturer's Front air bags
installation instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-
vent the air bag from functioning cor-
rectly. Before starting your journey and to
avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air
bag as it deploys, make sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on Driver's air bag : inflates in front of the
the grab handles or coat hooks. steering wheel; front-passenger front air
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are bag ; inflates in front of and above the glove
attached to the vehicle within the deploy- box.
Z
50 Occupant safety
The front air bags for the front seats offer (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
additional protection for the head and thorax. increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and You should only use seat covers that have
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps been approved for the respective seat by
inform you about the status of the front- Mercedes-Benz.
passenger front air bag (Y page 43).
Safety
Front-passenger front air bag ; will only

deploy if:
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen-
sor readings, detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied (Y page 51).
The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp lights up (Y page 52)
Rthe restraint system predicts a high
severity of an accident
Driver's knee bag Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
bolster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. However, it does
not protect the:
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms
In the event of a side impact, the side impact
air bag is deployed on the side on which the
Driver's knee bag : inflates underneath the impact occurs.
steering column. The driver's knee bag is The side impact air bag on the front-
always deployed along with the driver's front passenger side (front) deploys in the follow-
air bag. ing situations:
The driver's knee bag on the driver's seat Rthe OCS system detects that the front-
offers additional protection for the thigh, passenger seat is occupied or
knee and lower leg. Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle of the front-passenger seat
Side impact air bags If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
G WARNING buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even
dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy-
prevent the deployment of the air bags inte-
ment is independent of whether the front-
grated into the seats. Consequently, the air
passenger seat is occupied or not.
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the func-
tion of the Occupant Classification System
Occupant safety 51
Window curtain air bags Prerequisites

To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
Rin an almost upright position with their
Safety
back against the seat backrest
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi-
ble
If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce a false classi-
fication, e.g. because the front passenger:
Window curtain air bags : are integrated Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-
into the side of the roof frame and deployed in selves on a vehicle armrest
the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised
When deployed, the window curtain air bag from the seat cushion
enhances the level of protection for the head.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
However, it does not protect the chest or
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
arms.
be sure to observe the correct positioning of
In the event of a side impact, the window cur- the child restraint system. Never place
tain air bag is deployed on the side on which objects under or behind the child restraint
the impact occurs. system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the
If the system determines that they can offer child restraint system must always rest on the
additional protection to that provided by the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be backrest of the forwards-facing child restraint
deployed in other accident situations system must, as far as possible, be resting on
(Y page 56). the backrest of the front-passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be put under strain by the head
Occupant Classification System restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-
(OCS) rest and the head restraint position accord-
Introduction ingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) correctly. Always observe the child restraint
categorizes the person in the front-passenger system manufacturer's installation instruc-
seat. Depending on that result, the front- tions.
passenger front air bag is either enabled or
deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
Z
52 Occupant safety
Occupant Classification System opera- front air bag both before and during the jour-
tion (OCS) ney.
G WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
Safety
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of

an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. A person in the front-
passenger seat could then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-
cially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
always ensure that:
The indicator lamps inform you whether the Rthe classification of the person in the front-
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
passenger seat is correct and the front-
enabled.
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, bled in accordance with the person in the
or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in front-passenger seat
the ignition lock. Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
The system carries out a self-diagnosis. back as far back as possible.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and Rthe person is seated correctly.
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps Make sure, both before and during the jour-
must light up simultaneously for approx- ney, that the status of the front-passenger
imately six seconds. front air bag is correct.
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag. G WARNING
RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON : lights up: the If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, restraint system on the front-passenger seat
in the event of an accident, all deployment and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
criteria are met, the front-passenger front lamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bag
air bag is deployed. may deploy in an accident. The child could be
RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; lights up: the struck by the air bag. This poses an increased
front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- risk of injury or even fatal injury.
ted. They will then not be deployed in the Make sure that the front-passenger front air
event of an accident. bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
If the status of the front-passenger front air BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an
air bag display message appears in the instru-
lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR
ment cluster (Y page 263). When the front-
BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten-
a rearward-facing child restraint system on
tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
the front-passenger seat. You can find more
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamps. Be
information on OCS under "Problems with the
aware of the status of the front-passenger
Occupant safety 53
Occupant Classification System" indicates that the front-passenger front air

(Y page 55). bag is activated. The result of the classifi-
cation is dependent on, among other fac-
G WARNING tors, the child restraint system and the
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child child's stature. It is recommended that you
restraint system on the front-passenger seat install the restraint system on a suitable
Safety
and you position the front-passenger seat too rear seat.
close to the dashboard, in the event of an Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
accident, the child could:
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager
Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte- or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp is lit, for example cator lamp lights up and remains lit after
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER the system self-test depending on the
AIR BAG ON is lit up result of the classification.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even - if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
fatal injury. lamp lights up, move the front-passenger
Always move the front-passenger seat as far seat as far back as possible. Alterna-
back as possible and fully retract the seat tively, a person of smaller stature can sit
cushion length. Always make sure that the on a rear seat.
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from - if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
belt guide on the child restraint system. The should not use the front-passenger seat.
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an
and downwards from the vehicle belt sash adult or a person of a stature correspond-
guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR
sash guide and the front-passenger seat BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the
accordingly. Always observe the child system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
restraint system manufacturer's installation cates that the front-passenger front air bag
instructions. is activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure
If OCS determines that:
to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the cle" (Y page 59).
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6
lights up after the system self-test and restraint system warning lamp in the instru-
remains lit. This indicates that the front- ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG
passenger front air bag is deactivated. OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
child of up to 12 months old, in a standard ted in this case and does not deploy during an
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR accident. Have the system checked by quali-
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the fied technicians as soon as possible. Consult
system self-test and remains lit. This indi- an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
cates that the front-passenger front air bag front-passenger seat should only be repaired
is deactivated. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
But in the case of a 12-month-old child, in a If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
standard child restraint system, the the seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up per-
manently after the system self-test. This
Z
54 Occupant safety
essary repair work carried out at an author- When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. always ensure that:
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Rthe classification of the person in the front-
mends that you only use seat accessories passenger seat is correct and the front-
that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
Safety
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not bled in accordance with the person in the
mean that the front-passenger front air bag front-passenger seat
will also deploy. The Occupant Classification Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the rectly fastened seatbelt
front-passenger seat. Depending on that
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
result, the front-passenger front air bag is
back as far back as possible
either enabled or deactivated.
System self-test lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
passenger seat may not be used. Do not
G DANGER install a child restraint system on the front-
If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
not light up during the system self-test, the immediately at a qualified specialist work-
system is malfunctioning. The front- shop.
passenger front air bag might be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all G WARNING
in the event of an accident with high deceler- Objects between the seat surface and the
ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
even fatal injury. ation. This could result in the front-passenger
In this case the front-passenger seat may not air bag not functioning as intended during an
be used. Do not install a child restraint system accident. This poses an increased risk of
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu- injury or even fatal injury.
pant Classification System (OCS) checked Do not place any objects between the seat
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- surface and the child restraint system. The
cialist workshop. entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
G DANGER passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator facing child restraint system must, as far as
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
this case, the front-passenger front air bag lation instructions.
cannot perform its intended protective func-
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER
passenger seat.
AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON
indicator lamp display the status of the front-
That person could, for example, come into passenger front air bag (Y page 52).
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
For more information about the OCS, see
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
even fatal injury.
System" (Y page 55).
Occupant safety 55
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 54).
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is
Safety
BAG OFF indicator incorrect.
lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-
remains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 51).
though the front- X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the
passenger seat is occu-
front-passenger seat may not be used.
pied by an adult or a
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
person of a stature cor-
responding to that of an Mercedes-Benz Center.
adult.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
lamp does not light up child seat.
and/or does not stay X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests
on.
on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of
The front-passenger the forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far as pos-
seat is: sible, be resting on the backrest of front-passenger seat. If nec-
Runoccupied essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
Roccupied by the X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
weight of a child up X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
to 12 months old in a seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-
child restraint sys- passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and
tem the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check the installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the
child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint
accordingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
the seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/
or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not
install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is
recommended that you install the restraint system on a suitable
rear seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
56 Occupant safety
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
Devices and air bags hearing. The powder that is released gener-
ally does not constitute a health hazard, but it
Important safety notes may cause short-term breathing difficulties in
people with asthma or other respiratory prob-
G WARNING lems. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of
Safety
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it
been deployed. There is a risk of injury. is safe to do so.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-
cialist workshop as soon as possible. rial, which may require special handling and
regard for the environment. National guide-
G WARNING lines must be observed during disposal. In
A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
tection and cannot provide the intended pro- HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
tection in an accident. There is an increased index.cfm.
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- Method of operation
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced. During the first stage of a collision, the
restraint system control unit evaluates impor-
It is important for your safety and that of your tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced ation or acceleration, such as:
and to have any malfunctioning air bags Rduration
repaired. This will help to make sure the air Rdirection
bags continue to perform their protective
Rintensity
function for the vehicle occupants in the
event of a crash. Based on the evaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unit deploys the
G WARNING Emergency Tensioning Devices during a fron-
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices tal or rear collision.
that have been deployed are no longer opera- An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
tional and are unable to perform their inten- deployed, if:
ded protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Rthe components of the restraint system are
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-
operational; see "Restraint system warning
sioning Devices which have been triggered
lamp" (Y page 43)
immediately replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop. Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
the respective front-passenger seat
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE to The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the
trigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz- rear compartment are deployed independ-
ardous situations. This procedure is reversi- ently of the lock status of the seat belts.
ble.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices or air bags
are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small
amount of powder may also be released. The
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.
Occupant safety 57
If the restraint system control unit detects a nor do they provide an indication of air bag
more severe accident, further components of deployment.
the restraint system are activated independ- The vehicle can be deformed considerably,
ently of each other in certain frontal collision without an air bag being deployed. This is the
situations: case if only parts which are relatively easily
deformed are affected and the rate of decel-
Safety
RFront air bags and driver's knee bag
RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter- eration is not high. Conversely, air bags may
mines that deployment can offer additional be deployed even though the vehicle suffers
protection to that provided by the seat belt only minor deformation. This is the case if, for
example, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-
The front-passenger front air bag is activated
gitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient
or deactivated depending on the person on
deceleration occurs as a result.
the front-passenger seat. The front-
passenger front air bag can only deploy in an If the restraint system control unit detects a
accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi- side impact or that the vehicle is rolling over,
cator lamp is lit. Observe the information on the relevant restraint system components are
the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator activated independently of one another
lamps(Y page 43). depending on the apparent type of accident.
If the system determines a need for additional
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.
protection for the vehicle occupants, the
During the first deployment stage, the front
Emergency Tensioning Devices are deployed.
air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce
the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully RSide impact air bags on the side of impact,
deployed with the maximum amount of pro- independently of the Emergency Tension-
pellant gas if a second deployment threshold ing Device and the use of the seat belt on
is reached within a few milliseconds. the driver's seat and outer seats in the sec-
The deployment threshold of the Emergency ond row
Tensioning Devices and the air bag are deter- The side impact air bag on the front-
mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel- passenger side (front) deploys in the fol-
eration or acceleration which occurs at vari- lowing situations:
ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre- - the OCS system detects that the front-
emptive in nature. Deployment should take passenger seat is occupied or
place in good time at the start of the collision. - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- buckle of the front-passenger seat
tion and the direction of the force are essen- RWindow curtain air bag on the side of
tially determined by: impact, independently of the use of the
Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- seat belt and independently of whether the
sion front-passenger is occupied
Rthe collision angle RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- front-passenger side in certain situations

cle when the vehicle rolls over, if the system
determines that deployment can offer addi-
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
tional protection to that provided by the
the vehicle has collided
seat belt
Factors that can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag, dent. The different air bag systems work
independently of each other.
Z
58 Occupant safety
How the air bag system works is deter- tem detects an imminent danger of colli-
mined by the severity of the accident detec- sion in certain situations.
ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or PRE-SAFE takes the following measures
acceleration and the apparent type of acci- depending on the hazardous situation detec-
dent: ted:
Safety
Rfrontal collision Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.

Rside impact Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and
Rrollover the side windows are closed so that only a
small gap remains. The panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel is completely
PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant closed.
protection system) Rvehicles with the memory function for the
front-passenger seat: the front-passenger
Introduction
seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable
PRE-SAFE takes preemptive measures to position.
protect occupants in certain hazardous sit- If the hazardous situation passes without
uations. resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE slackens
the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by
Important safety notes PRE-SAFE can then be reversed.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
footwell under or behind the seats when X Move the seat backrest or seat back
moving the seats back. There is a risk that slightly when the vehicle is stationary.
the seats and/or the objects could be dam- The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and
aged. the locking mechanism is released.
Despite your vehicle being equipped with the The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
PRE-SAFE system, the possibility of per- the PRE-SAFE convenience function. You
sonal injuries occurring as a result of an acci- will find information on the convenience func-
dent cannot be eliminated. Always adapt your tion under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47).
driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain a safe dis-
tance from the vehicle in front. Drive care- PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu-
fully. pant protection system PLUS)
Function Introduction
PRE-SAFE intervenes: PRE-SAFE PLUS is only available in vehicles
Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when
with the Driving Assistance package.
BAS is activated. Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-
ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle end collision is imminent. In certain hazard-
understeers or oversteers severely. ous situations, PRE-SAFE PLUS takes pre-
Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance pack-
emptive measures to protect the vehicle
occupants.
age: when a driver assistance system inter-
venes powerfully or the radar sensor sys-
Children in the vehicle 59
Important safety notes Automatic measures after an acci-

dent
The intervention of PRE-SAFE PLUS cannot
prevent an imminent collision. Immediately after an accident, the following
The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE measures are implemented, depending on
PLUS intervenes. the type and severity of the impact:
Safety
PRE-SAFE PLUS does not intervene if the Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
vehicle is backing up. Rthe emergency lighting is activated
PRE-SAFE PLUS does not perform braking Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
actions while the vehicle is in motion or when Rthe front side windows are lowered
Parking Guidance is active. Rvehicles with a memory function: the elec-
trically adjustable steering wheel is raised
Function Rthe engine is switched off
PRE-SAFE PLUS intervenes in certain situa- Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-
tions if the radar sensor system detects an gency call
imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
PRE-SAFE PLUS takes the following meas-
ures depending on the hazardous situation Children in the vehicle
detected: Important safety notes
Rif the radar sensor system detects that a
Accident statistics show that children
head-on collision is imminent, the seat
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil-
belts are pre-tensioned.
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For
Rif the radar sensor system detects that a
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises
rear-end collision is imminent: that you install a child restraint system on a
- the brake pressure is increased if the rear seat. Children are generally better pro-
driver applies the brakes when the vehi- tected there.
cle is stationary. If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft
- the seat belts are pre-tensioned. (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:
The PRE-SAFE PLUS braking application is Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
canceled: system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when cles. The child restraint system must be
a gear is engaged appropriate to the age, weight and size of
Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no lon- the child
ger detected Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention safety notes in this section in addition to
to pull away the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions
If the hazardous situation passes without
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and
resulting in an accident, the original settings
are restored. safety notes on the "Occupant classifica-
tion system (OCS)" (Y page 51)
Z
60 Children in the vehicle
G WARNING 41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a height

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- where a lap/shoulder belt can be fastened
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: properly without a booster seat.
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the Special seat belt retractor
Safety
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
G WARNING
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
child restraint system will no longer be
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
an accident and injury.
tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
When leaving the vehicle, always take the portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never be immediately refastened. There is an
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
G WARNING
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
If persons, particularly children are subjected the special seat belt retractor and secure the
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or child restraint system properly.
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-
vehicle. er's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat
belt retractor. When activated, the special
G WARNING seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt
If the child restraint system is subjected to cannot slacken once the child seat is secured.
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- Installing a child restraint system:
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
restraint system. There is a risk of injury. system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- outlet.
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
restraint system has been exposed to direct Activating the special seat belt retractor:
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
the vehicle. reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit- belt retractor is enabled.
ting properly. Particular attention must be X Push the child restraint system down so
paid to children. that the seat belt is tight and does not
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt loosen.
(Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 45).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
Removing a child restraint system/deactivat- sudden change in direction. The child

ing the special seat belt retractor: restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
X Make sure you observe the child restraint ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
system manufacturer's installation instruc- risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
tions. Always install child restraint systems prop-
Safety
X Press the belt buckle release button, hold erly, even if they are not being used. Make
the belt tongue and guide it back towards sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
the belt outlet. tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-
ted. You will find further information on stowing
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading
guidelines" (Y page 298).
Child restraint system G WARNING
The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
tems is required by law in: tems which have been damaged or subjected
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
Rall 50 states as intended. The child cannot then be
Rthe U.S. territories restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
Rthe District of Columbia braking or sudden changes of direction. There
Rall Canadian provinces is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
You can obtain further information about the fatal.
correct child restraint system from any Replace child restraint systems which have
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
G WARNING ing systems on the child restraint system
If the child restraint system is installed incor- checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as before you install a child restraint system
intended. The child cannot then be restrained again.
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
sudden changes of direction. There is an Securing systems for the child restraint sys-
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. tem are:
Make sure that you observe the child restraint Rthe seat belt system
system manufacturer's installation instruc- Rthe ISOFIX (LATCH-type) securing rings
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, Rthe Top Tether anchorages
that the base of the child restraint system is
always resting completely on the seat cush- If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe
or behind the child restraint system. Only use the information on the "Occupant Classifica-
child restraint systems with the original cover tion System (OCS)" (Y page 51). There you
designed for them. Only replace damaged will also find information on deactivating the
covers with genuine covers. front-passenger front air bag.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
Z
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-

lowing standards:
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-
ards 213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
Safety
213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system
corresponds to the standards can be found
on an instruction label on the child restraint
system. This confirmation can also be found
in the installation instructions that are inclu- : LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
ded with the child restraint system. Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust the
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- rear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISO-
rior and on the child restraint system. FIX) securing rings : for the LATCH-type
(ISOFIX) child restraint system are accessi-
ble.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
ing system
restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-
G WARNING FIX) securing rings :.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system is a stand-
do not offer sufficient protective effect for ardized securing system for specially
children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs designed child restraint systems on the rear
(22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings :
integrated in the child restraint system. In the for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
event of an accident, a child might not be systems are installed on the left and right rear
restrained correctly. This poses an increased seats.
risk of injury or even fatal injury. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), also be used and can be installed using the
only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint vehicle's seat belt system. Install child seats
systems with which the child is also secured according to the manufacturer's instructions.
with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
child restraint system with the Top Tether
belt, if available. Top Tether
Always comply with the manufacturer's Introduction
installation and operating instructions for the Top Tether provides an additional connection
child restraint system used. between the child restraint system secured
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH- with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of
engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO- injury even further. If the child restraint sys-
FIX) securing rings tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this
! When installing the child restraint system, should always be used.
make sure that the seat belt for the middle
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt
could otherwise be damaged.

G WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
Safety
direction. As a result, child restraint systems
cannot perform their intended protective
function. Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
in the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. X Move head restraint : upwards.
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal- X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri- =.
fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr- X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
ests so that they are in an upright position. restraint system with Top Tether. Always
comply with the child restraint system
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
manufacturer's installation instructions
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
when doing so.
display in the instrument cluster. A warning
X Route Top Tether belt A under head
tone also sounds.
restraint : between the two head restraint
Top Tether anchorages bars.
X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt
A into Top Tether anchorage =.
Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not
twisted.
X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchor-
age =.
X Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 111).
Top Tether anchorage points = are installed Make sure that you do not interfere with the
in the rear compartment behind the head correct routing of Top Tether belt A.
restraints on the parcel shelf.
Child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil-
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises
Z
that you install a child restraint system on a accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul-
rear seat. der belt strap is correctly routed from the
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt
restraint system to the front-passenger seat, guide on the child restraint system. The shoul-
be sure to observe the instructions and safety der belt strap must be routed forwards and
notes on the "Occupant classification system downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide.
Safety
(OCS)" (Y page 51). If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash

You can thus avoid the risks that could arise guide and the front-passenger seat accord-
as a result of: ingly.
Always observe the child restraint system
Ran incorrectly categorized person in the
manufacturer's installation and operating
front-passenger seat
instructions.
Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
passenger front air bag
Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child Child-proof locks
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
board Important safety notes
G WARNING
Rearward-facing child restraint system
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
If it is absolutely necessary to install a rear- could:
ward-facing child restraint system on the Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
front-passenger seat, always make sure that or road users
the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
traffic
indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 43)
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-
ted. trapped
Always observe the child restraint system There is a risk of an accident and injury.
manufacturer's installation and operating Always activate the child-proof locks and
instructions. override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
Forward-facing child restraint system the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a
forward-facing child restraint system to the Override feature for:
front-passenger seat, always move the front- Rthe rear doors (Y page 65)
passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully
Rthe rear side windows (Y page 65)
retract the seat cushion length. The entire
base of the child restraint system must G WARNING
always rest on the seat cushion of the front- If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
passenger seat. The backrest of the child cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
restraint system must, as far as possible, lie
flat against the backrest of the front- Rrelease the parking brake.
passenger seat. The child restraint system Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
must not touch the roof or be put under strain parking position P.
by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the Rstart the engine.
seat backrest and the head restraint position
Pets in the vehicle 65
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of from the outside.
an accident and injury. X To activate: press the child-proof lock
When leaving the vehicle, always take the lever up in the direction of arrow :.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
Safety
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. working properly.
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
G WARNING lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
Override feature for the rear side win-
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
dows
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
X To activate/deactivate: press button ;.
restraint system has been exposed to direct If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
child in it. Never leave children unattended in only possible using the switches in the driv-
the vehicle. er's door. If indicator lamp : is off, oper-
ation is possible using the switches in the
rear compartment.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
You secure each door individually with the Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door endangering other road users
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be Unsecured animals could also be flung around
opened from inside the vehicle. When the the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
Z
66 Driving safety systems
den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi- safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident carefully.
and injury. The driving safety systems described only
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- work as effectively as possible when there is
cle. Always secure animals properly during adequate contact between the tires and the
road surface. Please pay special attention to
Safety
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-

port box. the notes on tires, recommended minimum
tire tread depths, etc. (Y page 358).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
Driving safety systems tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow
chains. Only in this way will the driving safety
Overview of driving safety systems systems described in this section work as
In this section, you will find information about effectively as possible.
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 66)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67) General information
RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
Assist System PLUS with Cross-Traffic that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
Assist) (Y page 67) This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS cle when braking.
(distance warning function and adaptive The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
Brake Assist) (Y page 69) cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
RESP (Electronic Stability Program) on. It goes out when the engine is running.
(Y page 71)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 73) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 74) tion (Y page 66).
RPRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 74)
G WARNING
RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 76) If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
Important safety notes ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
If you fail to adapt your driving style or tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
become distracted, the driving safety sys- ding and accidents.
tems can neither reduce the risk of accident Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
nor override the laws of physics. Driving diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
safety systems are merely aids designed to
assist driving. You are responsible for the dis- When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed including driving safety systems, will also
and for braking in good time. Always adapt become inoperative. Observe the information
your driving style to suit the prevailing road, on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 286) and
weather and traffic conditions and maintain a display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 251).
Driving safety systems 67
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph The brakes will function as usual once you
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi- release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
when you only brake gently.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
Braking PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist
Safety
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the General information
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
uation is over.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 66).
X To make a full brake application:
depress the brake pedal with full force. BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with
the Driving Assistance package.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the
pulsing in the brake pedal.
radar sensor system and the camera system
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- must be operational.
tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-
With the help of a sensor system and a cam-
tions as a reminder to take extra care while
era system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:
driving.
Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time
BAS (Brake Assist System) Rthat cross the path of your vehicle
General information In addition, pedestrians in the path of your

vehicle can be detected.
BAS operates in emergency braking situa- BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typi-
tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, cal characteristics such as the body contours
BAS automatically boosts the braking force, and posture of a person standing upright.
thus shortening the stopping distance.
If the radar sensor system or the camera sys-
tem is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions
Important safety notes are restricted or no longer available. The
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- brake system is still available with complete
tion (Y page 66). brake boosting effect and BAS.
G WARNING i Observe the restrictions described in the

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance "Important safety notes" sec-
in an emergency braking situation is tion (Y page 67).
increased. There is a risk of an accident. BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of
In an emergency braking situation, depress a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS
the wheels from locking. PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are
assisted when braking.
Braking
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over. G WARNING
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
objects and complex traffic situations.
Z
In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Rdarkness

Rif:
Rintervene unnecessarily
Rnot intervene
- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the
path of the vehicle
There is a risk of an accident.
- the camera system no longer recognizes
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
Safety
a pedestrian as a person due to special

uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
clothing or other objects
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
- a pedestrian is concealed by other
G WARNING objects
- the typical outline of a person is not dis-
BAS PLUS does not react:
tinguishable from the background
Rto small people, e.g. children
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
Rto animals cle, have the configuration and operation of
Rto oncoming vehicles the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
Rwhen cornering cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all sions at low speeds where there is no visible
critical situations. There is a risk of an acci- damage to the front of the vehicle.
dent. Following damage to the windshield, have the
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- configuration and operation of the camera
uation and be ready to brake. system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
ognition can be impaired. Function
Recognition by the radar sensor system is To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the
also impaired in the event of: brake force necessary if:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
Ryou approach an obstacle, and
covering the sensors
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
When driving at a speed under 20 mph
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,
example in parking garages BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a pressure will be carried out at the last possi-
motorbike ble moment.
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line When driving at a speed above 20 mph
Rvehicles quickly moving into the radar sen- (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
sor system detection range sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the
Recognition by the camera system is also brake pressure to a value adapted to the traf-
impaired in the event of: fic situation.
Rdirton the camera or if the camera is cov- BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-
ered ardous situations with vehicles in front within
Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.
a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and
155 mph (250 km/h).
from the sun being low in the sky
At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake

(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to: Assist assists you.
Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi-
cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Important safety notes
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle In particular, the detection of obstacles can
Safety
Robjects crossing your path and that are be impaired if:
recognized in the detection range of the Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
sensors covering the sensors
i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high Rthere is snow or heavy rain
braking force, preventative passenger pro- Rthere is interference by other radar sources
tection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activa- Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
ted simultaneously. example in parking garages
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
emergency braking situation is over. motorbike
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func- Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-
tion as usual again, if: LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system
Ryou release the brake pedal. Observe the notes in the section on break-
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. ing-in (Y page 156).
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
vehicle. cle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
Ryou activate kickdown.
sions at low speeds where there is no visible
damage to the front of the vehicle.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Distance warning function
PLUS
General information
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS con- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 66).
sists of a distance warning function with an
autonomous emergency braking function and G WARNING
adaptive Brake Assist. The distance warning function does not react:
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can Rto people or animals
help you to minimize the risk of a front-end Rto oncoming vehicles
collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the
Rto crossing traffic
effects of such a collision.
Rwhen cornering
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you Thus, the distance warning function cannot
will be warned visually and acoustically. If you provide a warning in all critical situations.
do not react to the visual and audible collision There is a risk of an accident.
warning, autonomous braking can be initiated Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
in critical situations. If you apply the brake uation and be ready to brake.
yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION
Z
G WARNING cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an

The distance warning function cannot always extended period of time.
clearly identify objects and complex traffic Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h),
situations. the distance warning function can also react
In such cases, the distance warning function to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or
parked vehicles.
Safety
may:
If you approach an obstacle and the distance
Rgive an unnecessary warning
warning function detects a risk of a collision,
Rnot give a warning the system will initially alert you both visually
There is a risk of an accident. and acoustically.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and do not rely solely on the distance Autonomous braking function
warning function.
If the driver does not react to the distance
Function warning signal in a critical situation, COLLI-
SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
with the autonomous braking function.
tivate the distance warning function in the
on-board computer (Y page 245). The autonomous braking function:
Rgives the driver more time to react to criti-
If the distance warning function is not activa-
ted, the symbol appears in the assis- cal driving situations
tance graphics display. Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or
The distance warning function can help you to Rreduces the effects of an accident
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the
a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such autonomous braking function is available in
a collision. If the distance warning function the following speed ranges:
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you R5 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving
will be warned visually and acoustically. objects
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), R5 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
the distance warning function warns you if objects
you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound, Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the auton-
and the distance warning lamp will light omous braking function is available in the fol-
up in the instrument cluster. lowing speed ranges:
X Brake immediately in order to increase the R5 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving
distance from the vehicle in front. objects
or R5 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do

objects
so. If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE)
complicated but non-critical driving condi-
are activated simultaneously.
tions may also cause the system to display a
warning.
Adaptive Brake Assist
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obsta- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 66).
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis- tive Brake Assist will automatically increase
tance in hazardous situations at speeds the braking force to a level suitable for the
above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor traffic conditions.
technology to assess the traffic situation. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
G WARNING emergency braking situation is over.
Safety
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa- The brakes will work normally again if:
tions. Ryou release the brake pedal.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
Rintervene unnecessarily Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
Rnot intervene vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the high braking force, preventative passenger
intervention in a non-critical driving situation. protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activa-
ted simultaneously.
G WARNING Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable
Rto people or animals of reacting to moving objects that have
already been detected as such at least once
Rto oncoming vehicles
over the period of observation.
Rto crossing traffic
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
Rwhen cornering
(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not stationary obstacles.
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
uation and be ready to brake.
General notes
Due to the nature of the system, particularly i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
complicated but non-critical driving condition (Y page 66).
tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-
vene. ESP monitors driving stability and traction,
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to i.e. power transmission between the tires and
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the the road surface.
brake system remains available with full If ESP detects that the vehicle is deviating
brake boosting effect and BAS. from the direction desired by the driver, one
With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
distance warning signal can detect obstacles vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
that are in the path of your vehicle for an keep the vehicle on the desired course within
extended period of time. physical limits. ESP assists the driver when
If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col- pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP
lision with the vehicle in front, it calculates can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
the braking force necessary to avoid a colli-
sion. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-
Z
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Only use wheels with the recommended tire
sizes. Only then will ESP function properly.
tion (Y page 66).
Characteristics of ESP
ETS traction control is part of ESP. On vehi-
cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP. General information
Safety
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- If the ESP warning lamp goes out before
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull beginning the journey, ESP is automatically
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for active.
example if the road surface is slippery on one If ESP intervenes, the ESP warning
side. In addition, more drive torque is trans- lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
If ESP intervenes:
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP. X Do not deactivate ESP under any circum-
stances.
Important safety notes X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
tion (Y page 66).
ing road and weather conditions.
G WARNING
If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- The ECO start/stop function switches the
ing safety systems are deactivated. This engine off automatically when the vehicle
increases the risk of skidding and an accident. stops moving. The engine starts automati-
cally when the driver wants to pull away again.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP checked at a
qualified specialist workshop. ESP remains in its previously selected sta-
tus. Example: if ESP was deactivated before
! If you test the parking brake using a brake the engine was switched off, ESP remains
dynamometer, switch the ignition off. deactivated when the engine is switched on
Application of the brakes by ESP may oth- again.
erwise destroy the brake system.
When towing the vehicle with the rear axle Deactivating/activating ESP
raised, observe the notes on ESP Important safety notes
(Y page 353).
ESP is deactivated if the warning lamp tion (Y page 66).
in the instrument cluster lights up and:
You can select between the following states
Rthe vehicle is moving of ESP:
Rthe ECO start/stop function is activated
RESP is activated.
If the warning lamp lights up continu-
RESP is deactivated.
ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunc-
tion. G WARNING
Observe the information on warning lamps If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta-
(Y page 288) and display messages which bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
may be shown in the instrument cluster of skidding and an accident.
(Y page 251).
Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- RPRE-SAFE Brake is no longer available, it
bed in the following. is also not activated if you brake firmly and
ESP intervenes.
It may be best to deactivate ESP in the fol- RESP still provides support when you brake
lowing situations: firmly.
Safety
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow Crosswind Assist
Ron sand or gravel
General information
Activate ESP as soon as the situations Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle to
described above no longer apply. ESP will deviate from a straight course. The crosswind
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle driving assistance function integrated into
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to ESP significantly reduces these effects.
spin.
ESP intervenes automatically according to
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an the direction and intensity of the crosswinds
extended period with ESP deactivated. affecting your vehicle.
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to
assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.
Deactivating/activating ESP
Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds
You can deactivate or activate ESP via the above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving
on-board computer. straight ahead or cornering gently.
X To deactivate: (Y page 72).
The ESP OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up. Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP is
deactivated or disabled because of a mal-
X To activate: (Y page 72). function.
The ESP OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
Characteristics when ESP is deactivated tion)
If ESP is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in General information
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-
situations, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle. sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
If you deactivate ESP: stability while braking.
RESP no longer improves driving stability. Important safety notes
Rthe driven wheels can spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
ting action for better traction on loose sur- tion (Y page 66).
faces. G WARNING
Rtraction control is still activated. If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
RPRE-SAFE is no longer available, nor is it lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
activated if you brake firmly and ESP risk of skidding and an accident.
intervenes. You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
Z
the brake system checked at a qualified spe- risk of collision, you will be warned visually
cialist workshop. and acoustically as well as by automatic brak-
ing.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (Y page 286) as well as dis- Important safety notes
play messages (Y page 254).
Safety
G WARNING
PRE-SAFE Brake will initially brake your vehi-
ADAPTIVE BRAKE cle by a partial application of the brakes if a
danger of collision is detected. There may be
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
a collision unless you brake yourself. Even
and offers increased braking comfort. In addi-
after subsequent full application of the brakes
tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE
a collision cannot always be avoided, partic-
also has the HOLD function (Y page 196) and
ularly when approaching at too high a speed.
hill start assist (Y page 160).
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
PRE-SAFE Brake take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
General information
G WARNING
i Pay attention to the important safety
notes in the "Driving safety systems" sec- PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden-
tion (Y page 66). tify objects and complex traffic conditions.
In these cases, PRE-SAFE Brake may:
PRESAFE Brake is only available for vehi-
cles with the Driving Assistance package. Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
For PRE-SAFE Brake to assist you when driv- brake the vehicle
ing, the radar sensor system and the camera Rnot give a warning or intervene
system must be switched on and be opera- There is a risk of an accident.
tional. Always pay particular attention to the traffic
With the help of the radar sensor system and situation and be ready to brake, especially if
the camera system, PRE-SAFE Brake can PRE-SAFE Brake warns you. Terminate the
detect obstacles that are in front of your vehi- intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
cle for an extended period of time.
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your In order to maintain the appropriate distance
vehicle can be detected. to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-
lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
PRE-SAFE Brake detects pedestrians using
typical characteristics such as the body con- PRE-SAFE Brake can also brake the vehicle
tours and posture of a person standing automatically under the following conditions:
upright. Rthe driver and front-passenger have their
Observe the restrictions described in the seat belts fastened
"Important safety notes" sec- and
tion (Y page 74). Rthe vehicle speed is between approx-
PRE-SAFE Brake can help you to minimize imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph
the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a (200 km/h)
pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a
collision. If PRE-SAFE Brake has detected a
At a speed of up to approximately 44 mph Rdarkness

(70 km/h), PRE-SAFE Brake can also detect: Rif:
Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi- -pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the
cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles path of the vehicle
Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes
Safety
a pedestrian as a person due to special
G WARNING clothing or other objects
PRE-SAFE Brake does not react: - a pedestrian is concealed by other
Rto small people, e.g. children objects
Rto animals - the typical outline of a person is not dis-
Rto oncoming vehicles tinguishable from the background

Rto crossing traffic Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
Rwhen cornering
cle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
As a result, PRE-SAFE Brake may neither cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit- sions at low speeds where there is no visible
uations. There is a risk of an accident. damage to the front of the vehicle.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Following damage to the windshield, have the
uation and be ready to brake. configuration and operation of the camera
system checked at a qualified specialist work-
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
shop.
ognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is Function
also impaired in the event of:
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
covering the sensors tivate PRE-SAFE Brake in the on-board
computer (Y page 245).
If the PRE-SAFE Brake is not activated, the
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for symbol appears in the multifunction
example in parking garages display.
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
this function warns you if you rapidly
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent
relative to the center of your vehicle warning tone will then sound and the
Recognition by the camera system is also distance warning lamp will light up in the
impaired in the event of: instrument cluster.
Rdirton the camera or if the camera is cov- X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
ered or
Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
from the sun being low in the sky so.
If there is an increased risk of collision, pre-
ventive passenger protection measures (PRE-
SAFE) are activated.
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
remains and you do not brake, take evasive
Z
76 Protection against theft
action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle Protection against theft

may perform automatic emergency braking,
up to the point of full brake application. Auto- Immobilizer
matic emergency braking is not performed The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
until immediately prior to an imminent acci- being started without the correct SmartKey.
dent.
Safety
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove

You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
SAFE Brake at any time by:
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further. function or KEYLESS-GO: switch the igni-
Ractivating kickdown. tion off and open the driver's door.
Rreleasing the brake pedal. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
The braking action of PRE-SAFE Brake is When leaving the vehicle, always take the
ended automatically if: SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any-
Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. one can start the engine if a valid SmartKey
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. has been left inside the vehicle.
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in i The immobilizer is always deactivated
front of your vehicle. when you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be star-
ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged),
STEER CONTROL the system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
General information
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
noticeable steering force to the steering
wheel in the direction required for vehicle
stabilization. ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
This steering assistance is provided in partic-
ular if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you
brake.
Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

tion (Y page 66).
No steering support is provided from STEER
CONTROL, if:
RESP is malfunctioning.
Rthe lighting is faulty.
If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electrical power steering.
Protection against theft 77
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey i If the alarm stays on for more than
or KEYLESS-GO. 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys- system automatically sends a message to
tem is armed after approximately the Customer Assistance Center. This is
15 seconds. done either by text message or data con-
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the nection. The emergency call system sends
Safety
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. the message or data provided that:
or Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. vice.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
properly.
alarm system is armed and you open:
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
Ra door available.
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe hood
X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey:
press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-
tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/
Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 157).
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-
Key must be outside the vehicle.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the
vehicle.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
Z
78
79
Useful information .............................. 80

SmartKey ............................................. 80
Doors .................................................... 87
Trunk .................................................... 90
Side windows ...................................... 97
Sliding sunroof .................................. 101
Opening and closing

80 SmartKey
Useful information Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the

SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
i This Operator's Manual describes all inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
models and all standard and optional equip-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
publication of the Operator's Manual. magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
Country-specific differences are possible. control function could be affected.
Please note that your vehicle may not be Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
Opening and closing
equipped with all features described. This vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
also applies to safety-related systems and Do not keep the SmartKey:
functions.
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
i Read the information on qualified special- phone or another SmartKey
ist workshops (Y page 26). Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
SmartKey
This can affect the functionality of the
Important safety notes SmartKey.
G WARNING Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function:
do not keep the SmartKey on the parcel shelf
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
or in the trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may
they could:
not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other using the Start/Stop button.
people or road users. A check which periodically establishes a radio
Rget out and disrupt traffic. connection between the vehicle and the
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:
motion if, for example, they: Rwhen starting the engine
Rrelease the parking brake. Rwhilstdriving
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of Rwhen the external door handles are
park position P touched
RStart the engine. Rduring convenience closing
There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
SmartKey 81
SmartKey functions is in close proximity to the vehicle: press

the F button on the SmartKey.
You can release the button as soon as the
trunk lid starts to close.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Opening and closing

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a
SmartKey in the vehicle.
: & Locks the vehicle
; F Opens/closes the trunk lid Locking/unlocking centrally
= % Unlocks the vehicle You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
X To unlock centrally: press button =. KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
If you do not open the vehicle within the SmartKey with you. You can combine the
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a con-
ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by
Rthe vehicle is locked again. using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it
Rprotection against theft is reactivated. using the & button on the SmartKey.
X To lock centrally: press button :. The driver's door and the door at which the
handle is used, must both be closed. The
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When
Rthe doors locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the
Rthe trunk lid distance between the SmartKey and the cor-
Rthe fuel filler flap responding door handle must not be greater
than 3 ft (1 m).
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking. A check which periodically establishes a radio
You can also set an audible signal to confirm connection between the vehicle and the
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
signal can be activated and deactivated via Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:
COMAND or Audio 20 (see the separate oper- Rwhen starting the engine
ating instructions). Rwhilstdriving
When the locator lighting is activated via Rwhen the external door handles are
COMAND or Audio 20, it lights up when it is touched
dark after the vehicle is unlocked with the Rduring convenience closing
remote control (see the separate operating
instructions).
X To open the trunk lid automatically
from outside the vehicle: press and hold
button ; until the trunk lid opens.
X To open the trunk lid automatically
from outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey
Z
82 SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO start function

Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a
SmartKey in the vehicle.
Changing the settings of the locking

system
Opening and closing
You can change the settings of the locking

system. This means that only the driver's door
X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the
surface of the door handle. vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur- quently travel on your own.
face : or ;. X To change the setting: press and hold
Make sure that you do not touch the inner down the % and & buttons simulta-
surface of the door handle. neously for approximately six seconds until
X Convenience closing feature: touch the battery check lamp flashes twice
recessed sensor surface ; for an exten- (Y page 84).
ded period. If the setting of the locking system is changed
Further information on the convenience within the signal range of the vehicle, press-
closing feature (Y page 99). ing the & or % button:
X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on Rlocks or
the trunk lid. Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
Deactivating X To unlock the driver's door: press the
If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a % button once.
longer period of time, you can deactivate KEY- X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
LESS-GO. The SmartKey will then use very lit- ton twice.
tle power, thereby conserving battery power. X To lock centrally: press the & button.
For the purposes of activation/deactivation,
the vehicle must not be nearby. The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
X To deactivate: press the & button on
lows:
the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. X To unlock the driver's door: touch the
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey inner surface of the door handle on the
lights up twice briefly and KEYLESS-GO is driver's door.
deactivated. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-
X To activate: press any button on the face of the door handle on the front-
SmartKey or insert the SmartKey into the passenger door or the rear door.
ignition lock. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea- surface on one of the door handles.
tures are available again.
X To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six sec-
SmartKey 83
onds until the battery check lamp flashes SmartKey battery

twice (Y page 84).
G WARNING
Mechanical key
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
General notes ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or injury.
Opening and closing

unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
use the mechanical key.
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and immediately.
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm H Environmental note
(Y page 76).
Batteries contain dangerous
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical substances. It is against the
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked law to dispose of them with
automatically. the household rubbish. They
X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the must be collected separately
SmartKey into the ignition lock. and recycled to protect the
environment.
Removing the mechanical key Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate

material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National
guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
X Push release catch : in the direction of
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
the arrow and at the same time remove
index.cfm.
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
For further information about: the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 88) workshop.
Runlocking the trunk (Y page 96)
Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 89)
Inserting the mechanical key

X Push mechanical key ; completely into
the SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
Z
84 SmartKey
Checking the battery opens. Do not hold battery compartment

cover : closed while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
Opening and closing
X Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly. X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
The battery is discharged if battery check palm until battery = falls out.
lamp : does not light up briefly. X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
X Change the battery (Y page 84). minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
If the key battery is checked within the signal to do so.
reception range of the vehicle, pressing the X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
& or % button: free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
Rlocks or X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-
Runlocks the vehicle ment cover : into the housing first and
then press to close it.
i You can obtain a battery from any quali-
fied specialist workshop. X Insert mechanical key ; into the Smart-
Key.
Replacing the battery X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 83).
X Press mechanical key ; into the opening

in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery compartment cover :
SmartKey 85
Problems with the SmartKey

You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
or unlock the vehicle X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if nec-
using the SmartKey. essary (Y page 84).
If this does not work:
Opening and closing

X Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.

mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.

or unlock the vehicle X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 81).
using KEYLESS-GO.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if nec-
essary (Y page 84).
mechanical key.

mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote
control function:
mechanical key.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Z
86 SmartKey

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
Opening and closing
(Y page 347).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 349).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.

started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
Stop button. The
SmartKey is in the vehi- The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
cle. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if nec-
essary (Y page 84).
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-
Key. shop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors 87
Doors
G WARNING
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
Opening and closing

people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
X To unlock and open a front door: pull
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
door handle ;.
motion if, for example, they:
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
Rrelease the parking brake. up. The door is unlocked and opens.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of X To unlock a rear door: pull door han-
park position P
dle ;.
RStart the engine. Locking knob : pops up and the door
There is a risk of an accident and injury. unlocks.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never again.
leave children or animals unattended in the The door opens.
reach of children.
You should preferably place luggage or loads Centrally locking and unlocking the
in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines vehicle from the inside
(Y page 298). You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle
from the inside. The switches are on the
drivers door.
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open
the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they
are not secured by the child-proof locks
(Y page 65). If the vehicle has been locked
with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO,
opening a door from the inside will trigger the
anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 76).
X To unlock: press button :.
X To lock: press button ;.
If the front-passenger door is closed, the
vehicle locks.
Z
88 Doors
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be If you press one of the two buttons and do not
locked or unlocked. hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from been selected.
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with The vehicle is locked automatically when the
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. ignition is switched on and the wheels are
The doors can be opened from the inside. You turning.
can only open the rear doors from inside the You could therefore be locked out if:
vehicle if they are not secured by the child- Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
Opening and closing
proof locks (Y page 65).

Rthe vehicle is being towed.
If the vehicle has been locked with the Smart-
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
Key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from
the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys- i You can also activate and deactivate the
tem. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76). automatic locking function via COMAND or
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the Audio 20 (see the separate operating
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be instructions).
taken into consideration if:
Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking
Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-
button for the central locking, or
ical key)
Rif the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre- If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
door had been previously unlocked, only the use the mechanical key.
door which has been opened from the inside X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
is unlocked. Key (Y page 83).
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Insert the tip of the mechanical key into the
Automatic locking feature
slit on the cover of the driver's door lock
and turn it until the cover is released.
X To deactivate: press and hold button :

for approximately five seconds until a tone
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
sounds.
the driver's door as far as it will go.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
approximately five seconds until a tone
as far as it will go to position 1.
sounds.
The locking knob pops up and the door
unlocks.
Doors 89
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it. it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart- X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
Key. Key (Y page 83).
X Hold the cover over the lock of the driver's X Carefully press the protective cap onto the
door with the thicker end towards the front lock cylinder until it engages and is seated
of the vehicle and press to secure. Then firmly. Do not pull the door handle when
make sure that the slit of the cover is hor- doing so.
Opening and closing

izontal. All vehicles:
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 76).
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani-
cal key.
X Open the driver's door.
X Insert the mechanical key into opening : X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
in the protective cap. doors and the trunk lid.

X Pull and hold the door handle. X Press the locking button (Y page 87).
X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical X Check whether the locking knobs on the
key as straight as possible away from the front-passenger door and the rear doors
vehicle until it releases. are still visible. Press down the locking
X Release the door handle.
knobs by hand, if necessary.
X Close the driver's door.
Key (Y page 83).
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Insert the tip of the mechanical key into the
slit on the cover of the driver's door lock
and turn it until the cover is released.

X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
as far as it will go to position 1.
The locking knob pops up and the door
unlocks.
Z
90 Trunk
X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical

key as straight as possible away from the
vehicle until it releases.
X Release the door handle.
Opening and closing

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as
it will go to position 1.
The locking knob drops down and the driv-
er's door is locked.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as
it. it will go to position 1.
X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart- The locking knob drops down and the driv-
Key. er's door is locked.
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
are locked. it.
X Hold the cover over the lock of the driver's
X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
door with the thicker end towards the front Key (Y page 83).
of the vehicle and press to secure. Then
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid
make sure that the slit of the cover is hor-
are locked.
izontal.
X Carefully press the protective cap onto the
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: lock cylinder until it engages and is seated
firmly. Do not pull the door handle when
doing so.
All vehicles:
If you lock the vehicle as described above, the
fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft
alarm system is not armed.
Trunk
X Insert the mechanical key into opening :
in the protective cap. G WARNING
X Pull and hold the door handle. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
Trunk 91
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not a
risk of poisoning. substitute for your attentiveness when open-
Always switch off the engine before opening ing and closing the trunk lid.
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid G WARNING
open. The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
G WARNING
gers
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
Opening and closing

Rover the last 1/3 in(8 mm) of the closing
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle movement
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- This means that the reversing feature cannot
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
den change in direction. uations. There is a risk of injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be Make sure that no body parts are in close
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or proximity during the closing procedure.
loads against slipping or tipping before the If somebody becomes trapped:
journey. Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
! The trunk lid swings upwards when Rpress the remote operating switch on the
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is driver's door, or
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. Rpress the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid, or
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can
be found in the "Vehicle data" section Rpull on the trunk lid handle
(Y page 403).
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is
i You can limit the opening angle of the also possible to stop the closing process by
trunk lid in COMAND or Audio 20 (see the performing a kicking movement under the
separate operating instructions). rear bumper.
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
Opening and closing manually
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines Opening
(Y page 298).
Obstacle recognition with trunk lid

reversing feature
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing
feature: the trunk lid is equipped with auto-
matic obstacle detection with reversing fea-
ture. If a solid object blocks or restricts the
trunk lid when automatically opening, this
procedure is stopped. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the trunk lid when automatically
closing, the trunk lid opens again automati-
cally. The automatic obstacle recognition
Z
92 Trunk
X Press the F button on the SmartKey. RPress the closing or locking button on the
or trunk lid.
X Pull handle :. RPull the trunk lid handle.
The trunk lid opens.
Closing also possible to stop the closing process by
performing a kicking movement under the
rear bumper.
Opening and closing
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
X Pull the trunk lid down using recess : and open.
push it closed.
X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & ! The trunk lid swings upwards when
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS- opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
GO (Y page 81). sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
be found in the "Vehicle data" section
Opening/closing automatically from (Y page 403).
outside
Opening
You can open the trunk lid automatically
G WARNING using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk
Parts of the body could become trapped dur- lid.
ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More- X Press and hold the F button on the
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.
the closing area or may enter the closing area
or
during the closing process. There is a risk of
X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid
injury.
handle and let it go again immediately.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
RPress the F button on the key.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
driver's door.
Trunk 93
Closing ! The trunk lid swings upwards when

opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
be found in the printed Operator's Manual.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Opening and closing

G WARNING
The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot.
X Press closing button : on the trunk lid. You could burn yourself by touching the
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE
feature and KEYLESS-GO: when the driver's ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always
door is closed you can simultaneously close ensure that you only make the kicking move-
the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The KEY- ment within the detection range of sensors.
LESS-GO key must be in the rear detection
range of the vehicle. ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec-
tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the following
X Press locking button ; in the trunk lid. situations, for example, could lead to the
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey outside unintentional opening of the trunk:
the vehicle, the trunk lid closes and the
vehicle is locked. Rusing a car wash
Rusing a power washer
If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the
trunk, the trunk lid opens again after it is Make sure that the SmartKey is at least
closed. 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.
If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey
outside the vehicle, the trunk lid remains General notes
closed. With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE
ACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lid
or stop the procedure without using your
Opening automatically from outside hands. This is useful if you have your hands
Important safety notes full. To do this, make a kicking movement
under the bumper with your foot.
G WARNING Observe the following points:
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the the rear detection range of the vehicle.
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, RWhen making the kicking movement, make
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
sure that you are standing firmly on the
risk of poisoning.
ground and that there is sufficient clear-
Always switch off the engine before opening ance to the rear of the vehicle. You could
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid otherwise lose your balance e.g. on ice.
open.
Z
94 Trunk
Operation
Opening and closing
RAlways ensure that you only make the kick-

ing movement within the detection range of
X To open/close: kick into sensor detection
sensors :.
range : under the bumper with your foot.
RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
You will hear a warning tone while the trunk
rear area while doing so. lid is opening or closing.
RDo not come into contact with the bumper
X If the trunk lid does not open after sev-
while making the kicking movement. Oth-
eral attempts: wait at least ten seconds
erwise, the sensors may not function cor-
rectly. then move your leg under the bumper once
again.
RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function
when the engine is started. If you hold your foot under the bumper for too
RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear
long, the trunk lid does not open or close.
Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this
detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-
occurs.
FREE ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk
lid could thus be opened or closed unin- To stop the opening or closing procedure:
tentionally, for example, if you: Rmove your foot in sensor detection
- set something down or lift something up range : under the bumper, or
behind the vehicle. Rpull the handle on the outside of the trunk
- polish the rear of the vehicle. lid or
Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about Rpress the closing button in the trunk lid or
your person in these situations or in situa- Rpress the F button on the SmartKey
tions similar to these. This will prevent the If the trunk lid closing procedure has been
unintentional opening/closing of the trunk. stopped:
RDirt caused by road salt around sensors :
Rmove your foot under the bumper again and
may restrict functionality.
the trunk lid will open.
RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a
If the trunk lid opening procedure has been
prosthetic leg may restrict functionality.
stopped:
Rmove your foot under the bumper again and
the trunk lid will close.
Trunk 95
Opening/closing automatically from Opening and closing

inside
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
Opening and closing

the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process. You can open and close the trunk lid from the
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary
Use one of the following options to stop the
and unlocked.
closing process:
X To open: pull remote operating switch for
RPress the F button on the key.
trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the X To close: press remote operating switch
driver's door.
for trunk lid : until the trunk lid is com-
RPress the closing or locking button on the
pletely closed.
trunk lid.
RPull the trunk lid handle.
Opening automatically from inside

also possible to stop the closing process by Important safety notes
performing a kicking movement under the
rear bumper. G WARNING
G WARNING gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, risk of poisoning.
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a Always switch off the engine before opening
risk of poisoning. the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
Always switch off the engine before opening open.
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when
! The trunk lid swings upwards when sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
be found in the printed Operator's Manual.
be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 403).
Z
96 Trunk
Opening Deactivating the function to lock the trunk

separately:
X Open the glove box.
X Push the switch to position ;.
If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the
trunk will also be unlocked.
Opening and closing
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)

! The trunk lid swings upwards when
You can open the trunk lid from the driver's sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
seat when the vehicle is stationary and If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the
unlocked. SmartKey, KEYLESS-GO or HANDS-FREE
X Pull remote operating switch for trunk ACCESS, use the mechanical key.
lid : until the trunk lid opens. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system
will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
Locking the trunk separately (Y page 76).
You can lock the trunk separately. If you then
unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk Key (Y page 83).
remains locked and cannot be opened. X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
lock as far as it will go.
Activating the function to lock the trunk sep-

arately: X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
X Close the trunk lid. as far as it will go from position 1 to posi-
tion 2.
X Open the glove box.
The trunk is unlocked.
X Push the switch to position :.
X Turn the mechanical key back to position
If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the 1 and remove it.
trunk remains locked.
X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
i You can also lock the glove box Key (Y page 83).
(Y page 299).
When you lock the vehicle (Y page 89), the
trunk is also locked.
Side windows 97
Trunk emergency release G WARNING

You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside While closing the side windows, body parts in
with the emergency release button. the closing area could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
Opening and closing

G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
X Press emergency release button : briefly. windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
The trunk lid unlocks and opens. take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk
vehicle.
lid emergency release when the vehicle is
stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not
Side window reversing feature
unlock the trunk lid if the battery is discon-
nected or discharged. The side windows are equipped with an auto-
Trunk lid emergency release light: matic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts a side window from trav-
Remergency release button : flashes for eling upwards during automatic operation,
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened the side window opens again automatically.
Remergency release button : flashes for During the manual closing process, the side
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed window only opens again automatically after
the corresponding switch is released. The
automatic reversing feature is only an aid and
Side windows is no substitute for your attention when clos-
Important safety notes ing a side window.
G WARNING
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side win- Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
dow and the door frame as the side window gers
moves. There is a risk of injury. Rwhile resetting
Make sure that nobody touches the side win- This means that the reversing feature cannot
dow during the opening procedure. If some- prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
body becomes trapped, release the switch or uations. There is a risk of injury.
pull the switch to close the side window again. Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
Z
98 Side windows
Opening and closing the side win- SmartKey. This function remains active for
dows five minutes or until you open a front door.
When the override feature for the side win-
The switches for all side windows are located
dows is activated (Y page 65), the side win-
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
dows cannot be operated from the rear.
each door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take prec- i Information on opening and closing the
edence. roller sunblinds on the rear side windows
(Y page 308).
Opening and closing
Convenience opening
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
GO start function: you can ventilate the vehi-
cle before you start driving.
If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the
vehicle, the convenience opening function is
: Front left available.
; Front right To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out
= Rear right the following functions simultaneously:
? Rear left Runlock the vehicle
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the Ropen the side windows
ignition lock (Y page 157). Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama
X To open manually: press and hold the cor- roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the
responding switch. roller sunblind
X To open fully: press the switch beyond the Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-
point of resistance and release it. er's seat
Automatic operation is started.
X To close manually: pull the corresponding Convenience opening
switch and hold it. X Press and hold the % button until the
X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
point of resistance and release it. panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
Automatic operation is started. panel are in the desired position.
X To interrupt automatic operation: If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
press/pull the corresponding switch again. with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the
If you press the switch beyond the point of roller sunblinds are opened first.
resistance and release, automatic operation X Press and hold the % button again until
is started in the corresponding direction. You the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
can stop automatic operation by pressing/ panel is in the desired position.
pulling the switch again. X To interrupt convenience opening:
You can continue to operate the side windows release the % button.
after you switch off the engine or remove the
Side windows 99
Convenience closing feature X To interrupt convenience closing:

release the & button.
G WARNING Using KEYLESS-GO
When the convenience closing feature is oper- The driver's door and the door at which the
ating, parts of the body could become trapped handle is used, must both be closed. The
in the closing area of the side window and the SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. gap between the SmartKey and the corre-
Opening and closing

Observe the complete closing procedure sponding door handle should not be greater
when the convenience closing feature is oper- than 3 ft (1 m).
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximity during the closing procedure.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-

GO start function: if the SmartKey is in close
proximity to the vehicle, the convenience
closing function is available.
When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-
neously:
Rclose the side windows
Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the
power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
roller sunblinds.
Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:
surface :.
Rthe side window (Y page 97) X Make sure that all the side windows and the
Rthe sliding sunroof or the panorama roof sliding sunroof or panorama roof with
with power tilt/sliding panel power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
(Y page 102) X Vehicles with panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel: touch recessed
Using the SmartKey sensor surface : on the door handle again
X Press and hold the & button until the until the roller sunblinds of the panorama
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding X To interrupt convenience closing:
panel are fully closed. release recessed sensor surface : on the
X Make sure that all the side windows and the door handle.
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
Resetting the side windows
X Vehicles with panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel: press and hold If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
the & button until the roller sunblinds of you must reset it.
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel close.
Z
100 Side windows
X Close all the doors.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 157).
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (Y page 98).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
Opening and closing
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed (Y page 98).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the respective side window remains
closed after the button is released, then it
has been set correctly. If this is not the
case, repeat the steps above again.
Sliding sunroof 101
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
Opening and closing

the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you can- slightly:
not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped:

Important safety notes Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
switch briefly in any direction
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sun- ped.
roof.
G WARNING
G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, could become trapped, particularly if they are
body parts in close proximity could become left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
trapped. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Make sure that no body parts are in close SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
proximity during the opening and closing pro- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
cedures.
Z
102 Sliding sunroof
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of feature is only an aid and is no substitute for
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may your attention when closing the sliding roof.
occur.
G WARNING
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
The reversing feature does not react:
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
be damaged. Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the
Opening and closing
movement
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
Rduring resetting
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
damaged if water enters the vehicle inte- Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-
rior. ually immediately after automatic reversing
Resonance noises can occur in addition to the This means that the reversing feature cannot
usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
is open. They are caused by minor pressure uations. There is a risk of injury.
fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change Make sure that no body parts are in close
the position of the sliding sunroof or open a proximity during the closing procedure.
side window slightly to reduce or eliminate If somebody becomes trapped:
these noises. Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Only for vehicles with panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel:
G WARNING The closing process is stopped.
At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-
matically lowers slightly at the rear. This could
trap you or other persons. There is a risk of Operating the sliding sunroof
injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into
the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the Opening and closing
vehicle is in motion.
If somebody becomes trapped, immediately
pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-
ing sunroof lifts during opening.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature

Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding
sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sun- Overhead control panel
roof. : To raise
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto- ; To open
matic reversing feature. If a solid object = To close/lower
blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during
the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens
again automatically. The automatic reversing
Sliding sunroof 103
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the Operating the panorama roof with
ignition lock (Y page 157). power tilt/sliding panel
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.
Opening and closing
If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond
the point of resistance, automatic operation
is started in the corresponding direction. You
can stop automatic operation by pressing or
Opening and closing

pulling again.
When opening and raising the roof, automatic
operation is only available if the sliding sun-
roof is in the closed position.
The sun protection cover automatically opens
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open
or close the sun protection cover manually Overhead control panel
when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. : To raise
You can continue to operate the sliding sun- ; To open
roof after switching off the engine or remov- = To close/lower
ing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This
function is available for up to five minutes or The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
until the driver's or front-passenger door is panel can only be operated when the roller
opened. sunblind is open.
Resetting ignition lock (Y page 157).
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
sponding direction.
opened or closed fully after resetting, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop. If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond
the point of resistance, automatic operation
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
is started in the corresponding direction. You
smoothly.
can stop automatic operation by pressing or
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the pulling again.
ignition lock. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear panel is raised at the rear, it automatically
(Y page 102). lowers slightly at higher speeds. The noise
X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a
second. result. At low speeds it raises again automat-
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be ically.
fully opened and closed again You can continue to operate the panorama
(Y page 102). roof with power tilt/sliding panel after you
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps switch off the engine or remove the Smart-
above again. Key. This function remains active for five
minutes or until you open a front door.
When a roof carrier is mounted the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be
opened. The panorama roof with power tilt/
Z
104 Sliding sunroof
sliding panel can still be raised to allow ven- The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
tilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama ped.
roof with power tilt/sliding panel makes con-
tact with a roof carrier approved by The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly from sunlight. The front roller sunblind can
but remain raised at the rear. only be opened and closed when the sliding
sunroof is closed.
Rain-closing feature
Opening and closing
Roller sunblind reversing feature

The raised sliding sunroof automatically low-
ers at the rear when driving if it starts to rain. The roller sunblinds are equipped with an
The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on: automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
Rthe road speed and blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the
closing process, the roller sunblind opens
Rthe intensity of the rain.
again automatically. However, the automatic
You can manually cancel the automatic clos- reversing feature is only an aid and does not
ing procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch relieve you of the responsibility of paying
in any direction. attention when closing the roller sunblinds.
To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the
3 switch in direction :. G WARNING
The reversing feature especially does not
The "Rain-closing feature when driving" func-
react to soft, light and thin objects such as
tion is deactivated, until you:
small fingers. This means that the reversing
Rpress or pull the 3 switch in any direc- feature cannot prevent someone being trap-
tion or ped in these situations. There is a risk of
Rturn the SmartKey to another position in injury.
the ignition lock (Y page 157). When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Operating the roller sunblinds for the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding Rrelease the switch immediately, or
panel Rduring automatic operation, push the
The closing process is stopped.
G WARNING
When opening or closing the roller sunblind,
parts of the body could be trapped between
the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding
sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that no
parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller
sunblind.
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Sliding sunroof 105
Opening and closing the roller sun- Resetting the panorama roof with
blinds power tilt/sliding panel or the front
roller sunblind
Opening and closing

Overhead control panel
: To open Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
; To open ing panel or the front roller sunblind if the
= To close panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
You can only close the roller sunblinds when or the roller sunblinds does not move
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding smoothly.
panel is closed. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157).

ignition lock (Y page 157). X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
X Press the 3 switch in direction :.

of resistance in the direction of arrow :
until the panorama roof with power tilt/
Both roller sunblinds open, then the pano-
sliding panel is fully closed.
rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
raised.
tional second.
X Pull the 3 switch in direction ;.
X Pull the 3 switch in the direction of
The sunblinds open
arrow : repeatedly until the front roller
X Pull the 3 switch in direction =. sunblind is closed.
The roller sunblinds close when the pano- X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is tional second.
closed. X Make sure that the panorama roof with
If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 103) and
the point of resistance, automatic operation the front roller sunblind (Y page 105) can
is started in the corresponding direction. You be fully opened again.
can stop automatic operation by pressing or X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
pulling again. above again.
Z
106 Sliding sunroof
Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Opening and closing

Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact
a qualified specialist workshop.
The sliding sunroof or If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panorama roof with panel is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
power tilt/sliding panel X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to
cannot be closed and the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof
you cannot see the with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
cause. The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed with more force.
If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to
the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
107
Useful information ............................ 108

Correct driver's seat position .......... 108
Seats .................................................. 109
Steering wheel .................................. 115
Mirrors ............................................... 117
Memory function .............................. 120
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

108 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information X Observe the safety guidelines on seat

adjustment (Y page 109).
i This Operator's Manual describes all X Make sure that seat = is adjusted prop-
models and all standard and optional equip- erly.
ment of your vehicle available at the time of Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 110)
publication of the Operator's Manual. When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
Country-specific differences are possible.
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag
Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This as possible
also applies to safety-related systems and Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position
functions. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly
Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost

i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops (Y page 26). vertical position
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported
Correct driver's seat position Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
Ryour legs are not fully extended
G WARNING X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do ted properly.
the following while driving: When doing so, make sure that you have
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, adjusted the head restraint so that the back
steering wheel or mirrors of your head is supported at eye level by the
Rfasten the seat belt center of the head restraint.
There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 115).
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-
before starting the engine. ted properly.

Adjust the steering wheel manually
(Y page 115)
Adjust the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 116)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
Ryou can move your legs freely
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 44).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 46).
Seats 109
The seat belt should: Always make sure that the driver's seat is
Rfit snugly across your body engaged before starting the engine.
Rbe routed across the middle of your shoul-
der G WARNING
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
joints the following while driving:
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir- Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
ror and the exterior mirrors in such a way steering wheel or mirrors
that you have a good view of road and traf- Rfasten the seat belt
fic conditions (Y page 118). There is a risk of an accident.

X Vehicles with memory function: you can Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
store the seat, steering wheel, exterior mir- ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
ror and head-up display settings with the before starting the engine.
memory function (Y page 121).
G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
Seats other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
G WARNING ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
Children could become trapped if they adjust risk of injury.
the seats, particularly when unattended. While moving the seats, make sure that your
There is a risk of injury. hands or other body parts do not get under the
When leaving the vehicle, always take the lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never tem.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING
The seats can still be adjusted when there is If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
no SmartKey in the ignition lock. ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
as intended. There is an increased risk of
G WARNING injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle event of an accident or when braking.
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one vehicle occupant that the center of the head
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(Y page 48) and "Children in the Vehicle"
G WARNING
(Y page 59).
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
G WARNING of protection if you have not moved the back-
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in ing or in the event of an accident, you could
motion. This could cause you to lose control of slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
Z
110 Seats
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal Adjusting the seats manually and
injury. electrically
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the Adjusting the seats electrically
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat

heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If

liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats. Electrically adjustable seats with
Rclean the seat covers as recommended; memory function
see "Interior care". : Head restraint height
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the ; Backrest angle
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the = Seat height
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. ? Seat cushion length
The seats should only be occupied by A Seat cushion angle
passengers, if possible.
B Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating mate- i Further related subjects:
rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov- RYou can store the seat settings using the
ers, child seats or booster seats. memory function (Y page 121).
! Make sure that there are no objects in the RIf PRE-SAFE is triggered, the front-
footwell under or behind the seats when passenger seat will be moved to a better
moving the seats back. There is a risk that position if it was previously in an unfav-
the seats and/or the objects could be dam- orable position (Y page 58).
aged.
i The rear-compartment head restraints
can be removed (Y page 112).
Vehicles without the through-loading fea-
ture: the head restraints cannot be
removed from the rear compartment seats.
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
i Further related subjects:
RRear bench seat through-loading feature Electrically adjustable seats without
(Y page 301) memory function
: Backrest angle
Seats 111
; Seat height Adjusting the head restraint height

= Seat cushion length manually
? Seat cushion angle
A Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Adjusting the head restraints

G WARNING

You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
steering wheel or mirrors desired position.
Rfasten the seat belt X To lower: press release catch : in the
There is a risk of an accident. direction of the arrow and push the head
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- restraint down to the desired position.
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine. Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-
aft position manually
G WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
as intended. There is an increased risk of
injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
With this function you can adjust the distance
General notes between the head restraint and the back of
the seat occupant's head.
Pay attention to the important safety notes
X To move forwards: pull the head restraint
(Y page 109).
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front forwards in the direction of the arrow until
and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust it engages in the desired position.
the height and angle of the head restraints to X To move backwards: press and hold
the correct position. release button :.

X Push the head restraint back.
X Release the release button once the head
restraint is in the desired position.
X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged
properly.
Z
112 Seats
Adjusting the height of the head X Release the rear seat backrest and fold it
restraints electrically slightly forwards (Y page 302).
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment the stop.
(Y page 110) up or down in the direction of X Press release catch : and pull the head
the arrow. restraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint that the notches on the bar are on the left
height when viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it
engages.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
X Once the head restraint is fully lowered,

press release catch :.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position. : To raise the backrest contour
; To soften the backrest contour
Installing and removing rear head = To lower the backrest contour
restraints
? To harden the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
support for your back.
Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
Seats 113
tures may be affected or they may even suffer

burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
i If drive program E (Y page 168) is selec-
ted, the power of the seat heating is
reduced.
Z
114 Seats
Problems with the seat heating

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
switched off prema- sumers are switched on.
turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can be
switched back on manually.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Activating/deactivating
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons

indicate the ventilation level you have selec-
ted.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the
sliding sunroof using the "Convenience
opening" feature (Y page 98). The seat ven-
tilation of the driver's seat automatically
switches to the highest level.
i When the vehicle is stationary, the fan
speed can be reduced automatically. This
reduces the noises of the seat ventilation.
Steering wheel 115
Problems with the seat ventilation

The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
switched off prema- sumers are switched on.
turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation can
be switched back on.

Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel man-
ually
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine. : Release lever
; To adjust the steering wheel height
G WARNING = To adjust the steering wheel position
Children could injure themselves if they (fore-and-aft adjustment)
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of X Push release lever : down completely.
injury. The steering column is unlocked.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never position.
X Push release lever : up completely.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can The steering column is locked.
still be adjusted when there is no key in the X Check if the steering column is locked.
ignition lock. When doing so, try to push the steering
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
fore-and-aft direction.
Z
116 Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel electri- G WARNING

cally If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
ture, they can become trapped, particularly
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
G WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
: To adjust the steering wheel position
Always wait until the adjustment process is
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
complete before driving off.
; To adjust the steering wheel height
i Further related subjects: The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
in and out of your vehicle easier.
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
(Y page 116)
ENTRY/EXIT feature using Audio 20/
RStoring settings (Y page 121)
COMAND; see the separate Audio 20/
ROperating the on-board computer COMAND operating instructions.
(Y page 231).
Position of the steering wheel and the
driver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature EXIT feature is active
Important safety notes The steering wheel tilts upwards and the driv-
er's seat moves backwards if you:
G WARNING
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;
occupants particularly children could KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1

become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- door; the SmartKey must be in position 0 or
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 157)
any body parts in the sweep of the steering Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is
wheel. switched off
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if
i The steering wheel only tilts upwards if
there is a risk of entrapment by the steering
the driving position is stored after the seat
wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
or steering wheel has been adjusted
Press one of the memory function position (Y page 121).
buttons. The adjustment process is stopped.
This function is only available on vehicles with
memory function.
Mirrors 117
The most recent driving position of the steer- Mirrors

ing wheel is stored if:
Rear-view mirror
Rthe ignition is switched off.
Rthe setting is stored with the memory func-
tion (Y page 121).
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper steer-
ing limiter.
Position of the steering wheel for driv-

ing
The steering wheel is moved to the last selec-
ted position when:
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever :
Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert forwards or back.
the SmartKey into the ignition lock
Ryou close the driver's door when the igni-
tion is switched on Exterior mirrors
Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO Important safety notes
i The steering wheel only returns to the last G WARNING
set position if the driving position is stored You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
after the seat or steering wheel has been the following while driving:
adjusted (Y page 121).
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
The most recent driving position of the steer- steering wheel or mirrors
ing wheel is stored if: Rfasten the seat belt
Rthe ignition is switched off. There is a risk of an accident.
Rthe setting is stored with the memory func- Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
tion (Y page 121). ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
G WARNING
triggered in an accident, the steering column The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
will move upwards when the driver's door is side reduces the size of the image. Visible
opened or the SmartKey is removed from the objects are actually closer than they appear.
ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the This means that you could misjudge the dis-
vehicle and rescue the occupants. tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
dent.
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-
ture is activated in Audio 20/COMAND; see For this reason, always make sure of the
the separate Audio 20/COMAND operating actual distance from the road users traveling
instructions. behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Z
118 Mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

electrically

ignition lock (Y page 157). X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
X Press button ; for the right-hand exterior ignition lock (Y page 157).
mirror or button = for the left-hand exte- X Briefly press button :.
rior mirror. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
The indicator lamp lights up in the button i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
that has been pressed. always folded out fully while driving. They
The indicator lamp goes out again after could otherwise vibrate.
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button : as long
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the
as the indicator lamp is lit.
exterior mirrors.
X Press adjustment button : up, down, or to
the left or right until you have adjusted the Setting the exterior mirrors
exterior mirror to the correct position. You
should have a good overview of traffic con- If the battery has been disconnected or com-
ditions. pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise
field of vision. not fold in when you select the Automatic
Mirror Folding function in the on-board
After the engine has been started, the exte-
computer.
rior mirrors are automatically heated if the
rear window defroster is switched on and the
outside temperature is low. ignition lock (Y page 157).
X Briefly press button :.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out

automatically
If the Automatic Mirror Folding function
is activated in COMAND or Audio 20 (see the
separate COMAND or Audio 20 operating
instructions):
Mirrors 119
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as RImmediately change out of clothing which
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out- has come into contact with electrolyte.
side. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automatically attention immediately.
again as soon as you unlock the vehicle.
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
manually, they do not fold out.
glare mode if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of

Rincident light from headlamps strikes the
position, proceed as follows:
sensor in the rear-view mirror
X Vehicles without electrically folding The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror reverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-
into the correct position manually. ing is switched on.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: press and hold button :
until you hear a click and then the mirror Parking position for the exterior mir-
engage in position (Y page 118). ror on the front-passenger side
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual Using reverse gear
(Y page 118).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
There is a risk of injury. : Memory button M
If you come into contact with the electrolyte, ; Adjustment button
observe the following: = Button for the front-passenger side exte-
RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin rior mirror
immediately with water. ? Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of You can position the front-passenger side
your eyes thoroughly with clean water. exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not engage reverse gear. You can store this posi-
induce vomiting. tion.
RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
Z
120 Memory function
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Calling up a stored parking position set-
tion lock (Y page 157). ting
X Press button = for the exterior mirror on X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
the front-passenger side. tion lock (Y page 157).
X Engage reverse gear.
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger passenger side using button =.
side moves to the preset parking position.
X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
exterior mirror to a position that allows you side moves to the stored parking position.
to see the rear wheel and the curb.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
The parking position is stored.

side moves back to its original position:
i If you shift the transmission to another
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving posi- (15 km/h)
tion. Rabout ten seconds after you have disen-
gaged reverse gear
Using the memory button Rif you press button ? for the exterior mir-
ror on the driver's side
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you Memory function
engage reverse gear. This setting can be
stored using memory button M :. Important safety notes
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- G WARNING
tion lock (Y page 157).
If you use the memory function on the driver's
X Press button = for the exterior mirror on
side while driving, you could lose control of
the front-passenger side. the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the being made. There is a risk of an accident.
exterior mirror to a position that allows you Only use the memory function on the driver's
to see the rear wheel and the curb. side when the vehicle is stationary.
X Press memory button M : and one of the
arrows on adjustment button ; within G WARNING
three seconds. When the memory function adjusts the seat or
The parking position is stored if the exterior steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
mirror does not move. pants particularly children could become
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat trapped. There is a risk of injury.
the steps. While the memory function is making adjust-
ments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
diately release the memory function position
button. The adjustment process is stopped.
Memory function 121
G WARNING Calling up a stored setting

Children could become trapped if they acti- XPress and hold the corresponding storage
vate the memory function, particularly when position button 1, 2 or 3 until:
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
RSeat
RSteering wheel
RExterior mirrors
RHead-up display
are in the stored position.
Storing settings i The steering wheel and seat adjustment

With the memory function, you can store up procedure is interrupted as soon as you
to three different settings, e.g. for three dif- release the storage position button. The
ferent people. adjustment of the mirror is still carried out.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Rseat heating: cushion surfaces
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-
rors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides
Rposition of the head-up display
X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 110).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 116) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 118).
X Press memory button M and one of the
storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected pre-
set position. A tone sounds when the set-
tings have been completed.
Z
122
123

Exterior lighting ................................ 124
Interior lighting ................................. 129
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED
headlamps) ........................................ 130
Changing bulbs (vehicles with hal-
ogen headlamps) .............................. 130
Windshield wipers ............................ 133
Lights and windshield wipers

124 Exterior lighting
Useful information Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options
models and all standard and optional equip- Exterior lighting can be set using:
ment of your vehicle available at the time of Rthe light switch
Rthe combination switch (Y page 126)
Please note that your vehicle may not be Rthe on-board computer (Y page 247)
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-related systems and Light switch
functions.
Operation
ist workshops (Y page 26).
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched
on even during the daytime. In some coun-
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due
to legal requirements and self-imposed obli- 1 W Left-hand standing lamps
gations. 2 X Right-hand standing lamps
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
Driving abroad instrument cluster lighting
4 Automatic headlamp mode, control-
Symmetrical low-beam headlamps led by the light sensor
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
beam in countries in which traffic drives on B R Rear fog lamp
the opposite side of the road from the country If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
glare to oncoming traffic. When using sym-
X Turn the light switch to .
metrical lights, the edge of the road is not lit
as widely and as far ahead as normal. The exterior lighting (except the parking/
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified standing lamps) switches off automatically if
specialist workshop as close to the border as you:
possible before driving in these countries. Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
Asymmetrical low beam position 0
Have the headlamps converted back to asym- Automatic headlamp mode
metrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as possible after G WARNING
crossing the border again. When the light switch is set to , the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
Exterior lighting 125
automatically if there is fog, snow or other automatically depending on the brightness

causes of poor visibility due to the weather of the ambient light.
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an RWith the engine running: if you have acti-
accident. vated the "daytime running lamps" function
In such situations, turn the light switch to via the on-board computer, the daytime
L. running lamps or the parking lamps and the
low-beam headlamps are switched on or off
The automatic headlamp feature is only an automatically depending on the brightness
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's of the ambient light.
lighting at all times. X To switch on automatic headlamp
Only for Canada: mode: turn the light switch to .
The daytime running lamps improve the visi-
bility of your vehicle during the day. The day- Low-beam headlamps

time running lamps function is required by law Even if the light sensor does not detect that it
in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam
When the engine is running and the vehicle is headlamps switch on when the ignition is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from switched on and the light switch is set to the
a drive position to P, the daytime running L position. This is a particularly useful
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after function in the event of rain and fog.
three minutes. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
When the engine is running, the vehicle is turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
stationary and in bright ambient light: if you position 2 or start the engine.
turn the light switch to T, the daytime X Turn the light switch to L.
running lamps and parking lamps switch on. The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
If the engine is running and you turn the light ment cluster lights up.
switch to L, the manual settings take
Rear fog lamp
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only: The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
The daytime running lamps improve the visi- thick fog. Please take note of the country-
bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, specific regulations for the use of rear fog
the daytime running lamps function must be lamps.
switched on using the on-board computer
X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the
(Y page 247).
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L, the manual settings or start the engine.
take precedence over the daytime running X Turn the light switch to L or .
lamps. X Press the R button.
is the favored light switch setting. The The yellow R indicator lamp in the
light setting is automatically selected accord- instrument cluster lights up.
ing to the brightness of the ambient light X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
(exception: poor visibility due to weather con- R button.
ditions such as fog, snow or spray): The yellow R indicator lamp in the
RSmartKey
instrument cluster goes out.
in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off
Z
Parking lamps X To indicate briefly: press the combination

! If the battery has been excessively dis- switch briefly to the pressure point in the
charged, the parking lamps or standing direction of arrow ; or ?.
lamps are automatically switched off to The corresponding turn signal flashes three
enable the next engine start. Always park times.
your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit X To indicate: press the combination switch
according to legal standards. Avoid the beyond the pressure point in the direction
continuous use of the T parking lamps of arrow ; or ?.
for several hours. If possible, switch on the
X right or the W left standing lamp. High-beam headlamps
X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
The green T indicator lamp in the instru- turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
ment cluster lights up.
position 2 or start the engine.

Standing lamps X Turn the light switch to L or .
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the X Press the combination switch beyond the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina- pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
ted. In the position, the high-beam head-
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
lamps are only switched on when it is dark
and the engine is running.
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
position 0. The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
headlamps are switched on.
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
X To switch off the high-beam head-
the vehicle).
lamps: move the combination switch back
to its normal position.
Combination switch The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Turn signal If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it con-
trols activation and deactivation of the high-
beam headlamps (Y page 127).
High-beam flasher
X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the
engine.
X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= High-beam flasher
? Turn signal, left
Exterior lighting 127
Hazard warning lamps The cornering light function improves the illu-
mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better vis-
ibility in tight bends, for example. It can only
be activated when the low-beam headlamps
are switched on.
Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
Rif you are driving at speeds between
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: and turn the steering wheel

press button :. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a time, but is automatically switched off after
turn signal using the combination switch, no more than three minutes.
only the turn signal lamp on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: Adaptive Highbeam Assist
press button :.
General notes
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
Ran air bag is deployed or
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of
above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full
brake application.
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off.
Cornering light function
You can use this function to set the head-

lamps to change between low beam and high
beam automatically. The system recognizes
vehicles with their lights on, either approach-
ing from the opposite direction or traveling in
front of your vehicle, and consequently
switches the headlamps from high beam to
low beam.
Z
The system automatically adapts the low- Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
beam headlamp range depending on the dis- on/off
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system
X To switch on: turn the light switch to .
no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-
tivates the high-beam headlamps. X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-
the windshield near the overhead control
panel. tion display lights up if it is dark and the
light sensor activates the low-beam head-
lamps.
If you are driving at speeds above 25 km/h:
G WARNING If you are driving at speeds above approx-
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
road users: The headlamp range is set automatically

Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians depending on the distance between the
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists vehicle and other road users.
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
road users have been detected:
may fail to recognize other road users that
have lights, or may recognize them too late. In The high-beam headlamps are switched on
this or similar situations, the automatic high- automatically. The K indicator lamp in
beam headlamps will not be deactivated or the instrument cluster also lights up.
activated regardless. There is a risk of an acci- If you are driving at speeds below approx-
dent. imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions users have been detected or the roads are
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in adequately lit:
good time. The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into the instrument cluster goes out. The _
account road, weather or traffic conditions. indicator lamp in the multifunction display
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You remains lit.
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's X To switch off: move the combination
lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and switch back to its normal position or move
traffic conditions. the light switch to another position.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
be restricted if there is: cluster goes out.
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Rdirton the sensors or the sensors are Headlamps fogged up on the inside
obscured Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of
the headlamp.
Interior lighting 129
Interior lighting Interior lighting control

Overview of interior lighting General notes
Front overhead control panel In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The color, brightness and display lamp for the
ambient lighting may be set using COMAND
or Audio 20 (see the separate operating
instructions).

Automatic interior lighting control
X To activate/deactivate: press the |
: p To switch the left-hand front reading
button.
lamp on/off
When the automatic interior lighting con-
; | To switch the automatic interior trol is activated, the button is flush with the
lighting control on/off overhead control panel.
= c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off The interior lighting automatically switches
on if you:
? u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off Runlock the vehicle
A p To switch the right-hand front read- Ropen a door
ing lamp on/off Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior light is activated for a short while
Control panel in the grab handle (rear when the SmartKey is removed from the igni-
compartment) tion lock. This delayed switch-off can be
adjusted using COMAND or Audio 20 (see the
separate Operator's Manual).
Manual interior lighting control

X To switch the front interior lighting on/
off: press the c button.
X To switch the interior lighting on/off:
press the u button.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
press the p button.
: Reading lamp
; p Switches the reading lamp on/off
Z
130 Changing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
Crash-responsive emergency lighting Ryou drop it

Ryou scratch it
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident. Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
designed for that purpose. Only install spare
X To switch off the crash-responsive bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
emergency lighting: press the hazard age.
warning lamp button.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service
or life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the
SmartKey. glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and
rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-
Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact
headlamps) with liquids.

Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 130).
The front and rear light clusters of your vehi- Have the bulbs that you cannot replace your-
cle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not self changed at a qualified specialist work-
replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified shop.
specialist workshop which has the necessary
If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
the work required.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle
a qualified specialist workshop.
safety. You must therefore make sure that
these function correctly at all times. Have the Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
headlamp setting checked regularly. vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Changing bulbs (vehicles with halo-
gen headlamps)
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
G WARNING type can be found in the legend.
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if

its glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Ryou touch it
Rit is hot
Changing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) 131
You must remove the cover of the front wheel

housing before you can change the front turn
signal lamp.
X To remove: switch off the lights.
X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Turn rotary knob : 180 outwards until it
stops using a suitable object.
Cover ; is released.
X Fold cover ; upwards.
X To install: insert cover ; into the left,
Vehicles with halogen headlamps
right and two lower catches.
: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
X Turn rotary knob : 180 inwards until it

; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
stops using a suitable object.
= Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W Cover ; is locked.
Low-beam headlamps
Tail lamp (halogen headlamps)

: Turn signal: P 21 W
; Backup lamp: W 16 W
X Switch off the lights.
X Open the hood.
Changing the front bulbs X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
Removing and installing the cover in the
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
front wheel housing
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
Z
132 Changing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
High-beam headlamps X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.

it clockwise.
wise until it engages.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel hous-
ing (Y page 131).
Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim pan-
X Switch off the lights. els
X Open the hood.

X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
it clockwise.
wise until it engages. Example: right-hand side trim panel
You must open the side trim panel in the trunk
Turn signal before you can change the bulbs in the tail
lamps.
X To open: release right or left side trim
panel : at the top and fold it down in the
direction of the arrow.
X To close: insert side panel :.
Tail lamps
X Switch off the lights.
X Open the trunk.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 132).
X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous-
ing (Y page 131).
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise,
unlock it and pull it out.
Windshield wipers 133
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust

that has collected on the windshield can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
use washer fluid when operating the wind-
shield wipers.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
X Pull out the plug. washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
other residues may be the reason for this.
X Turn fender nut : 90 counter-clockwise
Clean the windshield using washer fluid

and remove the bulb holder.
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due
to optical influences and the windshield
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers may be activated
inadvertently. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
X Turn signal lamp ;: lightly press the bulb
into the bulb holder, turn it counter-clock-
wise and remove it from the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and
turn it clockwise.
X Backup lamp =: remove the bulb from
the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
X Re-install bulb holder.
X Turn fender nut : 90 clockwise.
X Insert the connector.
1 $ Windshield wiper off
2 Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 132).
set to low sensitivity)
3 Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
Windshield wipers
4 Continuous wipe, slow
Switching the windshield wipers 5 Continuous wipe, fast
on/off B Single wipe/ To wipe the wind-
! Do not operate the windshield wipers shield using washer fluid
when the windshield is dry, as this could
Z
134 Windshield wipers
X Switch on the ignition. Changing the windshield wiper blades

X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
Adjusting the wiper blades so that they
sponding position.
are vertical
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the or On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:
position, the appropriate wiping fre-
quency is automatically set according to the X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
intensity of the rain. In the position, the ignition lock (Y page 157).
rain sensor is more sensitive than in the X Set the windshield wipers to position .
position, causing the windshield wipers to X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-
wipe more frequently. tical position, turn the SmartKey to position
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield 0 and remove it from the ignition lock.
will no longer be wiped properly. This could X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
shield.
tions.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Switch off the engine.
Replacing the wiper blades X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Important safety notes X Set the windshield wipers to position .
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly
G WARNING until the windshield wiper starts.
If the windshield wipers begin to move while X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-
you are changing the wiper blades, you could tical position, press the Start/Stop button.
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
injury.
shield.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades. Removing the wiper blades
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper

arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
windshield may be damaged by the force of
the impact. X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have With the other hand, turn wiper blade in
the wiper blades changed at a qualified direction of arrow : away from the wiper
specialist workshop. arm as far as it will go.
X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
make sure that you touch only the wiper until it engages in the removal position with
arm of the wiper. a noticeable click.
Windshield wipers 135
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-

shield.
X Remove the protective film of the service
indicator on the tip of the wiper blade.
i If the color of the service indicator
changes from black to yellow, the wiper
blades should be replaced. The duration of
the color change varies depending on the
terms of use.
X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of

arrow ? away from the wiper arm.

Installing the wiper blades
X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper

arm in the direction of arrow :.
X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =

until it engages in the locking position with
a noticeable click.
X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated
correctly.
Z
136 Windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.

fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-
nozzles no longer hits shop.
the center of the wind-
shield.
137

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 138
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 142
Setting the air vents ......................... 152
Climate control
138 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information desired interior temperature will be

reached more quickly.
i This Operator's Manual describes all i The integrated filter filters out most par-
models and all standard and optional equip- ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-
publication of the Operator's Manual. lutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces
Country-specific differences are possible. the amount of air supplied to the vehicle
Please note that your vehicle may not be interior. For this reason, you should always
equipped with all features described. This observe the interval for replacing the filter,
also applies to safety-related systems and which is specified in the Maintenance
functions. Booklet. As it depends on environmental
i Read the information on qualified special- conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the
ist workshops (Y page 26). interval may be shorter than stated in the
Maintenance Booklet.
i It is possible that the blower may be acti-
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems vated automatically 60 minutes after the

Important safety notes SmartKey has been removed depending on
various factors, e.g. the outside tempera-
Observe the settings recommended on the ture. The vehicle is then ventilated for
following pages. The windows could other- 30 minutes to dry the climate control sys-
wise fog up. tem.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and air humidity in the vehicle interior. The
interior filter cleans the air, thus improving
the interior climate.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is only available when the engine is run-
ning. Optimum climate control is only ach-
ieved with the side windows and roof closed.
The residual heat function can only be acti-
vated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 149).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
venience opening feature (Y page 98). This
will speed up the cooling process and the
Overview of climate control systems 139
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 145)
; To set the air distribution (Y page 146)
= To set the airflow (Y page 146)
To switch off climate control (Y page 142)
? To set climate control to automatic (Y page 144)
A To defrost the windshield (Y page 147)
B To call up the Audio 20/COMAND climate control menu; see the separate operating
instructions
C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 148)
D To activate/deactivate synchronization (Y page 147)
E To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 149)
F To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 143)
G To set the temperature, right (Y page 145)
Optimum use of dual-zone climate mode. If necessary, activate this function

control (Y page 143).
RSet the temperature to 72 (22 ).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
The following contains notes and recommen- tion briefly until the windshield is clear
dations on optimum use of dual-zone climate again.
control. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
RActivate climate control using the if there are unpleasant outside odors or
rocker switch. The indicator lamp above when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
the rocker switch lights up. The "Cool- erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
ing with air dehumidification" function is into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
not activated automatically in automatic
140 Overview of climate control systems
AGILITY SELECT switch

You can choose between various drive pro-
grams with the AGILITY SELECT switch
(Y page 167).
If you have selected the drive program E, the
climate control switches to Eco mode.
In Eco mode:
Rthe cooling output is reduced when cooling
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster
is deactivated and heat output is reduced
as a result
Rthe rear window defroster running time is
reduced
If you have selected the drive program C, S or
Climate control
S+ the climate control switches to Comfort

mode. The current climate control settings
are maintained in Comfort mode.

During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-
mate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full cli-
mate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 162).
Overview of climate control systems 141
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 145)
; To set the air distribution, left (Y page 146)
= To set the airflow (Y page 146)
To switch off climate control (Y page 142)
? To set climate control to automatic (Y page 144)
A To defrost the windshield (Y page 147)
B To call up the Audio 20/COMAND climate control menu; see the separate operating
instructions
To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 149)
C To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 148)
D To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 143)
E To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 149)
F To set the air distribution, right (Y page 146)
G To set the temperature, right (Y page 145)
Rear control panel
H To set the temperature (Y page 145)
I Display
J To set the airflow (Y page 146)
142 Operating the climate control systems
Optimum use of 3-zone automatic cli- If you have selected the drive program C, S or
mate control S+ the climate control switches to Comfort
mode. The current climate control settings
3-zone automatic climate control are maintained in Comfort mode.
The following contains instructions and rec-
ommendations to enable you to get the most ECO start/stop function
out of your 3-zone automatic climate control. During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-
RActivate climate control using the mate control system only operates at a
rocker switch. The indicator lamp above reduced capacity. If you require the full cli-
the rocker switch lights up. The "Cool- mate control output, you can switch off the
ing with air dehumidification" function is ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
not activated automatically in automatic button (Y page 162).
mode. If necessary, activate this function
(Y page 143).
RSet the temperature to 72 (22 ). Operating the climate control sys-
Climate control
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func- tems

tion briefly until the windshield is clear Switching climate control on/off
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. General notes
if there are unpleasant outside odors or When the climate control is switched off, the
when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- air supply and air circulation are also
erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn switched off. The windows could fog up.
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. Therefore, switch off climate control only
RUse the residual heat function if you want to briefly
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when Switch on climate control primarily using the
the ignition is switched off. The residual rocker switch (Y page 144).
heat function can only be activated or deac-
tivated with the ignition switched off. The
Switching on/off
residual heat function is switched off when
the ignition is switched on. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
AGILITY SELECT switch X To switch on: press the t/!
You can choose between various drive pro- rocker switch up or down.
grams with the AGILITY SELECT switch The Audio 20/COMAND climate control
(Y page 167). menu opens.
X Activate the climate control using the air-
If you have selected the drive program E, the
climate control switches to Eco mode. conditioning function bar; see the separate
Audio 20/COMAND operating instruc-
In Eco mode:
tions.
Rthe cooling output is reduced when cooling
or
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster X Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the
is deactivated and heat output is reduced H button.
as a result
Rthe rear window defroster running time is
reduced
Operating the climate control systems 143
X To switch off: press the t/! X To deactivate: press the rocker

rocker switch up or down. switch up or down.
The Audio 20/COMAND climate control The indicator lamp above the rocker switch
menu opens. goes out.
X Deactivate the climate control using the or
air-conditioning function bar; see the sep- X Deactivate the cooling with air dehumidifi-
arate Audio 20/COMAND operating cation function via Audio 20/COMAND
instructions. (see the separate operating instructions).
or
X Set the airflow to level 0 using the H
rocker switch.
Activating/deactivating cooling with

air dehumidification
Climate control
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
midification" function, the air inside the vehi-
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-
tion function only briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is only available when the engine is run-
ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-
tion.
X To activate: press the rocker switch
up or down.
The indicator lamp above the rocker switch
lights up.
or
X Activate the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function via Audio 20/COMAND (see
the separate operating instructions).
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
the button malfunction.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The cool-
ing with air dehumidifi-
cation function can
also no longer be acti-
vated using Audio 20/
COMAND (see the sep-
arate operating instruc-
tions).
Climate control
Setting climate control to automatic Automatic control

General notes X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
In automatic mode, the set temperature is X Set the desired temperature using the
maintained automatically at a constant level. w rocker switch on the front control
The system automatically regulates the tem- unit.
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and
the air distribution. or
X Set the desired temperature using
The automatic mode functions optimally
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate
function is activated. The "Cooling with air operating instructions.
dehumidification" function must be activated X To activate: press rocker switch up
manually in automatic mode. If necessary, or down.
"Cooling with air dehumidification" can also The indicator lamp above the rocker
be deactivated. switch lights up.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- X To switch to manual operation: press the
midification" function, the air inside the vehi- H rocker switch up or down.
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- or
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win- X Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND;
dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, see the separate operating instructions.
deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-
or
tion function only briefly.
X Press the top or bottom section of the _
rocker switch.
or
X Set the air distribution using Audio 20/
COMAND; see the separate operating
instructions.
The indicator lamp above the rocker
switch goes out.
In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or 3-zone automatic climate control
air distribution manually, the indicator lamp
above the rocker switch goes out. The General notes
function which has not been changed man-
ually, however, continues to be controlled
automatically. When the manually set func-
tion switches back to automatic mode, the
indicator lamp above the rocker switch
lights up again.
Adjusting the climate mode settings

This function is only available with 3-zone
automatic climate control on vehicles for
3-zone automatic climate control zones
Canada.
You can select different temperature settings
Climate control
In automatic mode you can select the follow-
ing airflow settings for the driver's and front- for the driver's and front-passenger sides as
passenger areas: well as for the rear compartment.
FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly Setting the temperature in the front com-
cooler partment using the front control panel
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly tion lock (Y page 157).
warmer and with less of a draft X To increase/reduce: press the upper or
lower section of the w rocker switch.
X To set: set the climate mode using Audio
20/COMAND (see separate operating or
instructions). X Set the temperature using Audio 20/
instructions.
Setting the temperature Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 (22 ).
Setting the temperature in the rear com-
Different temperatures can be set for the
partment using the front control panel
driver's and front-passenger sides.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Set the temperature with the w rocker
X To increase/reduce: press the upper or
switch on the front control panel.
lower section of the w rocker switch.
or
or
X Set the temperature using Audio 20/
X Set the temperature using Audio 20/
COMAND; see the separate operating instructions.
instructions.
Only change the temperature setting in
Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 (22 ).
X Press the top or bottom section of the ! Adjusting

rocker switch.
3-zone automatic climate control: you can set
The climate control menu in Audio 20/
the air distribution separately for the driver's
COMAND opens.
and front-passenger side.
X Select the "Synchronization" function; see
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2
separate Audio 20/COMAND operating
instructions. (Y page 157).
The temperature setting for the driver's X Press the _ button up or down.
side is adopted for the front-passenger side The various air distribution settings appear
and the rear compartment. in Audio 20/COMAND.
X Press and hold the _ button upwards
Setting the temperature in the rear com- until the desired position is reached.
partment using the rear control panel or
X Set the air distribution using Audio 20/
tion lock (Y page 157). COMAND; see the separate operating
Climate control
instructions.
lower section of the w rocker switch on
the rear control panel (Y page 141).
Only change the temperature setting in Setting the airflow
The set temperature appears on the rear- Dual-zone automatic climate control
compartment display. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
Setting the air distribution lower section of the H rocker switch.
Air distribution settings or
X Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND;
Directs air through the defroster vents
see the separate operating instructions.
P Directs air through the center and side
air vents
3-zone automatic climate control
O Directs air through the footwell air
vents Adjusting the front-compartment airflow
S Directs air through the center, side and You can set the airflow separately for the
footwell vents front and rear compartment.
a Directs air through the defroster and X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
footwell vents tion lock (Y page 157).
_ Directs air through the defroster, cen- X To increase/reduce: press the upper or
ter, side and footwell vents
lower section of the H rocker switch.
b Directs air through the defroster, cen-
or
ter and side air vents
X Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND;
W Sets the air distribution to automatic
Setting the rear compartment airflow Activating/deactivating

X Press the top or bottom section of the !
X Press the upper or lower section of the
0 rocker switch.
rocker switch.
The indicator lamp in the 0 rocker
The Audio 20/COMAND climate control
menu opens. switch lights up or goes out.
X Select the "Synchronization" function in
or
the climate control menu; see separate X Activate/deactivate the synchronization
Audio 20/COMAND operating instruc- function using Audio 20/COMAND; see the
tions. separate operating instructions).
The airflow setting for the front area is The synchronization function deactivates if
adopted for the rear compartment. the settings for the front-passenger side are
changed.
Setting the rear compartment airflow
using the rear control panel 3-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Activate/deactivate the synchronization
tion lock (Y page 157). function using Audio 20/COMAND; see the
X To increase/reduce: press the upper or separate operating instructions).
lower section of the K/I rocker The synchronization function is deactivated:
switch on the rear control panel. Rif the settings for the front-passenger side
The selected airflow level set is shown in are changed
the rear-compartment display.
Rif the settings for the rear compartment are
changed
Switching the synchronization func-
tion on/off Defrosting the windshield
General notes General notes
Climate control can be set centrally using the You can use this function to defrost the wind-
synchronization function. The temperature shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-
setting is adopted for the front-passenger shield and the front side windows.
side. For 3-zone automatic climate control,
the temperature setting is adopted for the Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func-
front-passenger side and rear compartment. tion as soon as the windshield is clear again.
Activating/deactivating the defrosting

function for the windshield
X To activate: press the rocker switch
on the front control unit up or down.
switch lights up. The current climate con-
trol settings are deactivated.
The climate control system switches to the i If you clean the windows regularly, they
following functions: do not fog up so quickly.
Rhighairflow
Rhightemperature
Rear window defroster
Rair distribution to the windshield and
front side windows General notes
Rair-recirculation mode off
The rear window defroster has a high current
i If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehu- draw. You should therefore switch it off as
midification" function is activated. In this soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
case, the indicator lamp above the the rear window defroster switches off auto-
button remains switched off. matically after several minutes.
X To deactivate: press the rocker If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
switch up or down. dow defroster may switch off.
switch goes out. The previously selected Activating/deactivating
Climate control
settings are restored. Air-recirculation

mode remains deactivated.
or
X Press the rocker switch up or down.
X Press the top or bottom section of the
rocker switch. switch lights up or goes out.
Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside
X Activate the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function with the rocker switch.
or
X Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation" function via Audio 20/COMAND;
X Switch on automatic mode using the
rocker switch.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "Windshield defrosting" function using
the rocker switch.
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside

X Activate the windshield wipers.
X Switch on automatic mode using the
rocker switch.
Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
ted prematurely or can- lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating air-recircula- X To deactivate: press the g rocker

tion mode switch up or down.
The indicator lamp above the g rocker
General notes switch goes out.
You can also temporarily deactivate the flow Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati-
Climate control
of fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are cally:
entering the vehicle from outside. The air Rafter approximately five minutes at outside
already inside the vehicle will then be recir-
temperatures below approximately 41
culated.
(5 )
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling
windows can fog up more quickly, in particu-
with air dehumidification is deactivated
lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside
lation mode briefly to prevent the windows
from fogging up. temperatures above approximately 41
(5 ) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion" function is activated
tion lock (Y page 157). Activating/deactivating the residual
X To activate: press the g rocker switch heat function
up or down. General notes
The indicator lamp above the g rocker
switch lights up. The residual heat function is only available
with 3-zone automatic climate control on
Air-recirculation mode switches on automat-
vehicles for Canada.
ically:
Once the engine is switched off, it is possible
Rat high outside temperatures to make use of the residual heat of the engine
Rat high levels of pollution (3-zone automatic to continue heating or ventilating the front
climate control only) compartment of the vehicle for approximately
Rin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation sys- 30 minutes. The heating or ventilation time
tem only) depends on the interior temperature that has
The indicator lamp above the g rocker been set.
switch is not lit when automatic air-recircula-
tion mode is activated. Outside air is added
after about 30 minutes.
Switching on/off Dispose of full perfume vials

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- in an environmentally
tion lock or remove it (Y page 157). responsible manner and
take them to a special waste
X To activate: press the ! rocker switch
collection point.
up or down.
The indicator lamp above the ! rocker
switch lights up.
The blower will run at a low speed regardless
of the airflow setting.
If you activate the residual heat function at
high temperatures, only the ventilation will be
activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
X To deactivate: press the ! rocker
switch up or down.
Climate control
The indicator lamp above the ! rocker

switch goes out. : Perfume lid
Residual heat is deactivated automatically: ; Perfume vial
Rafter approximately 30 minutes The perfume atomizer helps to improve driv-
Rwhen the ignition is switched on ing comfort.
Rif the battery voltage drops Using Audio 20/COMAND, you can:
Rswitch the perfume atomizer on and off
(see separate Audio 20/COMAND operat-
Perfume atomizer ing instructions)
Operating the perfume atomizer Rregulate the perfume atomizer (see the
separate Audio 20/COMAND operating
G WARNING instructions)
If children open the perfume vial, they could The following conditions can affect your per-
drink the perfume or it could come into con- ception of the perfume intensity:
tact with their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do
Roperating mode of the climate control sys-
not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
tem
If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult
Rinterior temperature
a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with
your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean Rtime of year/day
water. If you continue to experience difficul- Rair humidity

ties, consult a doctor. Rphysiological condition of occupants, e.g.
fatigue or hunger
H Environmental note The perfume atomizer can only be operated
Full perfume vials must not when the climate control system is switched
be disposed of with house- on and is only active when the glove box is
hold rubbish. They must be closed.
collected separately and The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-
recycled to protect the envi- filled perfume vial. You can also choose from
ronment. a variety of filled perfume vials and an empty
vial which you can fill yourself.
If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the

separate information sheet attached to the
vial.
! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz
interior perfumes, observe the manufactur-
ers' safety notices on the perfume packag-
ing.
Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it
is empty. Dispose of the used vial after use.
X To insert the perfume vial: open the glove
box (Y page 299).
X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far
as it will go.
X To remove the perfume vial: pull out the
Climate control
perfume vial.
X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid
of the empty perfume vial to refill it your-
self.
X Refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of
the desired liquid perfume.
X Screw the lid back on to the vial.
! Only refill the vial when you are outside

the vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume
could drip into the interior and contaminate
it.
Always refill the empty refillable vial with the
same perfume. Otherwise, you might not ach-
ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-
izer.
Z
152 Setting the air vents
Problems with the perfume atomizer

The vehicle interior is The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it
not perfumed although will go.
the perfume atomizer is X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.
activated.
The perfume vial has not been adequately filled.
X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.
X Use a new pre-filled vial.
X Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the
same perfume.
The perfume atomizer is faulty.

X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist
Climate control
workshop.
Ionization lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to

another area of the vehicle interior.
Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehi-
cle interior and attain an improved interior In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
climate. through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
The ionization of the interior air is odorless please observe the following notes:
and cannot be perceived directly in the vehi-
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield
cle interior.
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
You can switch ionization on/off using Audio snow or leaves.
20/COMAND (see the separate operating
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles
instructions).
in the vehicle interior.
Ionization can only be operated when the
automatic climate control is switched on. The
side air vent on the driver's side must be Setting the center air vents
open.
Setting the air vents

G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
Setting the air vents 153
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel ?, A

or B to the left or right as far as it will go.
X To adjust the air direction: hold center air
vent :, ; or = by thumbwheel ?, A or
B and move it up or down or to the left or
right.
Setting the side air vents
Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control

: Rear-compartment air vent, left
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
? Rear control panel
Climate control
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the
left or right as far as it will go.
X To adjust the air direction: hold rear air
vent : or ; by the middle fin and move up
: Side window defroster vent or down or to the left or right.
; Side air vent, left
= Thumbwheel for left side air vent
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the
left or right as far as it will go.
X To adjust the air direction: hold side air
vent ; by thumbwheel = and move it up
or down or to the left or right.
Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
Rear air vents are not available in all vehicles.
Vehicles with dual-zone automatic climate control
Z
154
155

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
............................................................. 156
Driving ............................................... 156
Driving and parking

Automatic transmission ................... 164
Refueling ............................................ 171
Parking ............................................... 174
Driving tips ........................................ 178
Driving systems ................................ 183
156 Driving
Useful information RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to

brake the vehicle.
i This Operator's Manual describes all RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator
models and all standard and optional equip- pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-
ment of your vehicle available at the time of down).
Driving and parking
publication of the Operator's Manual. After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
Country-specific differences are possible. the engine speed gradually and accelerate
Please note that your vehicle may not be the vehicle to full speed.
equipped with all features described. This You should also observe these notes on
also applies to safety-related systems and breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive
functions. train on your vehicle have been replaced.
i Read the information on qualified special- Always observe the respective speed limits.
Driving
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
G WARNING
The sensor system of some driving and driv- Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
ing safety systems adjusts automatically pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
while a certain distance is being driven after The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
the vehicle has been delivered or after jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
repairs. Full system effectiveness is not
reached until the end of this teach-in proce-
dure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only securely and as specified in order to ensure
reach their optimum braking effect after sev- sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen- loose floormats and do not place floormats on
sate for this by applying greater force to the top of one another.
brake pedal.
G WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
of the pedals, e.g.:
The more you look after the engine when it is Rshoes with thick soles
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
Rshoes with high heels
performance in the future.
Rslippers
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi-
cle and engine speeds for the first There is a risk of an accident.
1000 miles (1500 km). Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt- usage of the pedals.
tle, during this period.
RWhen changing gears manually, change up
G WARNING
in good time, before the tachometer needle If you switch off the ignition while driving,
reaches of the way to the red area of the safety-relevant functions are only available
tachometer. with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
Driving 157
boosting effect. You will require considerably i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-
of an accident. Key for the vehicle. The ignition is not
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. switched on. The engine cannot be started.
Vehicles with AIRPANEL: you can open the
Driving and parking

G WARNING shutters in the radiator trim, by turning the
If the parking brake has not been fully key to position 2 in the ignition lock. After
released when driving, the parking brake can: approximately 120 seconds the shutters
Roverheat and cause a fire open automatically. Further information on
opening and cleaning the shutters
Rlose its hold function.
(Y page 334).
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off. Start/Stop button
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use General notes
the engine's full performance until it has A check which periodically establishes a radio
reached operating temperature. connection between the vehicle and the
Only shift the automatic transmission to SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
the desired drive position when the vehicle Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,
is stationary. when starting the engine.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive To start the vehicle without actively using the
wheels when pulling away on slippery SmartKey:
roads. You could otherwise damage the
Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in
drive train.
the ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
SmartKey positions Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 81).
SmartKey
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different
SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This is
only the case if you are not depressing the
brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey
g To remove the SmartKey Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
1 Power supply for some consumers, such foil
as the windshield wipers Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) This can affect the functionality of the Smart-
and drive position Key.
3 To start the engine
Z
158 Driving
The Start/Stop button can be removed from imately two seconds recognition time. You
the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the can then use Start/Stop button :.
SmartKey into the ignition lock. As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after
Driving and parking
short time: starting the engine or lights up while driving,

Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition see (Y page 285).
with the Start/Stop button. If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
Ryou will not be able to start the engine with pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey
the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is being removed from the ignition.
unlocked again. X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but- lock ;.

ton on the front door (Y page 87), you can X To switch on the power supply: press
continue to start the engine with the Start/ Start/Stop button : once.
Stop button. The power supply is switched on. You can
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop now activate the windshield wipers, for
button from the ignition lock when you leave example.
the vehicle. You should, however, always take The power supply is switched off again if:
the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehi-
Rthe driver's door is opened and
cle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when
Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ in this position
Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/
Stop button : twice.
operated
The ignition is switched on.
The engine can be turned off while the vehicle
The power supply is switched off again if:
is in motion by pressing and holding the
Start/Stop button for approximately three Rthe driver's door is opened and
seconds. This function operates independ- Ryou press Start/Stop button : once when
ently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine in this position
switch-off function.
SmartKey positions with the Start/Stop
button
= Start/Stop button USA

? Start/Stop button Canada
When you insert Start/Stop button : into

ignition lock ;, the system needs approx-
Driving 159
Starting the engine General notes

Important safety notes The catalytic converter is preheated for up to
30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of
G WARNING the engine may change during this time.
Driving and parking

they could: Automatic transmission
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other X Shift the transmission to position P
people or road users. (Y page 164).
Rget out and disrupt traffic. The transmission position display in the
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. multifunction display shows
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
P (Y page 166).
motion if, for example, they: You can also start the engine when the trans-
Rrelease the parking brake. mission is in position N.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
park position P
RStart the engine. To start the engine using the SmartKey
There is a risk of an accident and injury. instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the
Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-
leave children or animals unattended in the tion (Y page 157) lock and release it as
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of soon as the engine is running.
reach of children. If the engine will not start:
G WARNING X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.
X Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There after a short waiting period.
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- tion lock (Y page 157).
out sufficient ventilation. The indicator lamps in the instrument clus-
ter light up (Y page 284).
G WARNING X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-
Flammable materials introduced through tion lock (Y page 157) and release it as
environmental influence or by animals can soon as the engine is running.
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk Starting procedure with the Start/Stop
of fire. button
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
The Start/Stop button is only available on
there are no flammable foreign materials in
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
GO start function.
system.
The Start/Stop button can be used to start
! Do not depress the accelerator when the vehicle manually without inserting the
starting the engine. SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/
Stop button must be inserted in the ignition
Z
160 Driving
lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. It is only possible to shift the transmission
This mode for starting the engine operates from position P to the desired position if you
independently of the ECO start/stop auto- depress the brake pedal. Only then is the
matic engine start function. parking lock released. If the brake pedal is not
You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is depressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still
Driving and parking
in the vehicle. Switch off the engine and be moved but the parking lock remains
always take the SmartKey with you when engaged.
leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for The vehicle locks centrally once you have
a short time. Pay attention to the important pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
safety notes. drop down.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it You can open the doors from the inside at any
depressed. time.
X Press the Start/Stop button once You can also deactivate the automatic locking
(Y page 157). feature, see the Digital Operator's Manual.
The engine starts.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
catalytic converter to reach its operating
Pulling away temperature more quickly.
Automatic transmission
Hill start assist
G WARNING
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
If the engine speed is above the idling speed forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
and you engage transmission position D or R, holds the vehicle for a short time after you
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
a risk of an accident. This gives you enough time to move your foot
When engaging transmission position D or R, from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
not simultaneously accelerate. roll.
! If a warning tone sounds and the G WARNING

Release Park. Brake message appears After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
in the multifunction display, the parking ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
brake is still applied. Release the parking There is a risk of an accident and injury.
brake. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
depressed. leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
assist.
X Release the brake pedal. X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The vehicle is then held for about a second.
The electric parking brake (Y page 176) is X Pull away.
automatically released.
Hill start assist is not active if:
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter goes out. downhill gradient.
Rthe transmission is in position N.
Driving 161
Rthe electric parking brake is applied. Automatic engine switch-off

RESP is malfunctioning. If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
the ECO start/stop function switches off the
engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
Driving and parking

Introduction when:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop- green.
ped under certain conditions. Rthe outside temperature is within the range
The engine starts automatically when the that is suitable for the system.
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-
start/stop function thereby helps you to ature.
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
of your vehicle. has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Important safety notes Rthe system detects that the windshield is
G WARNING not fogged up when the air-conditioning

system is switched on.
If the engine is switched off automatically and
Rthe hood is closed.
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
There is a risk of accident and injury. seat belt is fastened.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off All of the vehicle's systems remain active
the ignition and secure the vehicle against when the engine is stopped automatically.
rolling away. The HOLD function can also be activated if the
engine has been switched off automatically. It
General notes is then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase.
When you depress the accelerator pedal, the
engine starts automatically and the braking
effect of the HOLD function is deactivated.
The engine can be switched off automatically
a maximum of four times (first stop and three
subsequent stops) in succession.
: ECO start/stop display
Automatic engine start
If the engine has been switched off automat-
ically by the ECO start/stop function, the The engine starts automatically if:
symbol is shown in the multifunction Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
display. by pressing the ECO button.
Every time you switch on the engine using the Ryou switch to drive program S+.
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO Rin transmission position D or N the brake
start/stop function is activated. pedal is released and the HOLD function is
not active.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
Z
162 Driving
Ryou engage reverse gear R.

Ryou move the transmission out of position
P.
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the
driver's door.
Driving and parking
Rthe vehicle starts to roll.

Rthe brake system requires this.
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range.
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on.
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low.
Shifting the transmission to position P does
not start the engine.
Deactivating/activating the ECO start/

stop function
X To switch off: press ECO button :.

Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To switch on: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will
then not be switched off automatically when
the vehicle stops.
Selecting drive program S+ deactivates the
ECO start/stop function. If you press ECO
button :, the ECO start/stop function is
activated.
Driving 163
Problems with the engine

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
Driving and parking

can be heard. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey
in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 159). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 349).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 159).
If the engine still does not start:
The engine is not run- There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
ning smoothly and is component of the engine management system.
misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
verter and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
ture gauge shows a is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
value above 248 X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
(120 ). cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 327). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Z
164 Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever

Important safety notes Overview of transmission positions
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
Driving and parking
and you engage transmission position D or R,

the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu- j Park position with parking lock
tral position N when you switch off the engine. k Reverse gear
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an i Neutral
accident. h Drive
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to
its original position. The current transmission
Bear in mind that the power transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmis-
between the engine and the transmission is sion position display in the multifunction dis-
interrupted when the engine is switched off. play (Y page 166).
For this reason, shift the automatic transmis-
sion to P when the engine is switched off and Engaging park position P
the vehicle is at a standstill. Apply the electric
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll-
! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-
cle is moving, do not shift the automatic
ing away.
transmission directly from D to R, from R to
D or directly to P. The automatic transmis-
sion could otherwise be damaged.
j Park position with parking lock

k Reverse gear
Automatic transmission 165
i Neutral Additionally, children could set the vehicle in

h Drive motion if, for example, they:
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc- Rrelease the parking brake.
tion of arrow P. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
Driving and parking

Engaging park position P automatically RStart the engine.
Park position P is automatically engaged if: There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Ryou switch off the engine using the Smart-
Key and remove the SmartKey. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/
Stop button and open the driver's door. reach of children.
Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle
is stationary or driving at very low speed X If the transmission is in position D or R:
and the transmission is in position D or R. push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
Engaging reverse gear R X If the transmission is in position P: depress
! Only shift the automatic transmission to R the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
when the vehicle is stationary. SELECT lever up or down to the first point of
resistance.
X If the transmission is in position D or N:
If you switch the engine off with the trans-
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
mission in position R or D, the automatic
first point of resistance.
transmission shifts to N automatically.
X If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT With the SmartKey: if you then open one of
SELECT lever up past the first point of the front doors or remove the SmartKey from
resistance. the ignition, the automatic transmission
shifts to P.
The ECO start/stop function is not available
With the Start/Stop button: if you then
when reverse gear is engaged. Further infor-
open one of the front doors, the automatic
mation on the ECO start/stop function
transmission shifts to P.
(Y page 161).
If you want the automatic transmission to
Shifting to neutral N remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
G WARNING a towing system:
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, Using the SmartKey:
they could:
X Switch on the ignition.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
people or road users. depressed.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
X Shift to neutral N.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock.
Z
With the Start/Stop button: The current transmission position and drive
X Switch on the ignition. program appear in the multifunction display.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it The arrows in the transmission position dis-
depressed. play show how and into which transmission
positions you can change using the DIRECT
X Pull the Start/Stop button out of the igni-
Driving and parking
SELECT lever.
tion.
X Shift to neutral N. Transmission positions
B Park position
This prevents the vehicle from roll-
ing away when stopped.
Key in the ignition lock.
Do not shift the transmission into
position P (Y page 164) unless the
Engaging drive position D
vehicle is stationary. The parking
X If the transmission is in position R or N: lock should not be used as a brake
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past when parking. Always apply the
the first point of resistance. electronic parking brake in addi-
X If the transmission is in position P: depress tion to the parking lock in order to
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT secure the vehicle.
SELECT lever down past the first point of The automatic transmission shifts
resistance. to P automatically if you:
Rremove the SmartKey
Rswitch off the engine when in R
Transmission position and drive pro- or D and open one of the front
gram display doors
! If the transmission position display in the If the vehicle electronics are mal-
multifunction display is not working, you functioning, the transmission may
should pull away carefully to check whether be locked in position P. Have the
the desired transmission position is vehicle electronics checked imme-
engaged. Ideally, you should select trans- diately at a qualified specialist
mission position D and drive program E or workshop.
S.
C Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
: Status symbol drive program

; Transmission position
= Gear
A Neutral Double-clutch function

Do not shift the transmission to N When shifting down, the double-clutch func-
while driving. Otherwise, the auto- tion is active regardless of the currently selec-
matic transmission could be dam- ted drive program. The double-clutch function
aged. reduces load change reactions and is condu-
Driving and parking

No power is transmitted from the cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen-
engine to the drive wheels. erated by the double-clutch function depends
on the drive program selected.
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it. Kickdown
If ESP is deactivated or faulty: Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
shift the transmission to position N X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
if the vehicle is in danger of skid- pressure point.
ding, e.g. on icy roads. The automatic transmission shifts to a
If you switch off the engine using lower gear depending on the engine speed.
the SmartKey or the Start/Stop X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
button, the automatic transmission desired speed is reached.
shifts to neutral N automatically. The automatic transmission shifts back up.
! Rolling in neutral N can damage
the drive train. Rocking the vehicle free
7 Drive Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and
The automatic transmission forth between transmission positions D and R
changes gear automatically. All can help to free a vehicle that has become
forward gears are available. stuck in mud or snow.
The vehicle's engine management restricts
switching between transmission positions D
Driving tips and R to speeds up to a maximum of 5 mph
(9 km/h).
Changing gear To shift back and forth between transmission
The automatic transmission shifts to the indi- positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT
vidual gears automatically when it is in trans- lever up and down past the point of resist-
mission position D. This automatic gear shift- ance.
ing behavior is determined by:
Rthe selected drive program (Y page 167) AGILITY SELECT switch
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Use the AGILITY SELECT switch to change the
drive program. Depending on the drive pro-
gram selected the following vehicle charac-
Accelerator pedal position
teristics will change:
Your style of driving influences how the auto- Rthe drive (engine and transmission man-
matic transmission shifts gear: agement)
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rthe suspension
Rmore throttle: late upshifts Rthe steering
Z
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop func- C Comfort Comfortable and econom-
tion (Y page 161) ical driving characteristics
Rthe climate control settings
- Dual-zone automatic climate control E Eco Particularly economical
(Y page 140) driving characteristics
Driving and parking
- vehicles for Canada: three-zone auto-

matic climate control (Y page 142) Additional information for drive programs
(Y page 168).
Rthe rear window defroster operation period
(Y page 148) Using the steering wheel paddle shifters, you
can temporarily change gears yourself. For
Rthe performance of the seat heating
further information on the manual drive pro-
(Y page 112)
gram (Y page 169).
Each time you start the engine using the
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive pro-
gram C is activated. For further information Drive programs
about starting the engine, see (Y page 159).
Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of
the drive program can be selected:
Rthe drive (engine and transmission man-
agement)
Rthe suspension
Rthe steering
To permanently select the gears in the drive
program I using the steering wheel paddle
shifters, select the permanent manual gear-
X Push AGILITY SELECT switch : up or shift program.
down, until the desired drive program is Information about the selection of drive pro-
selected. gram I with COMAND or Audio 20 can be
The selected drive program appears in the found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
multifunction display. After five seconds
the display goes out and the status icon of Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
the selected drive program appears.
In addition, the current drive program set- Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-
tings are displayed in the Audio 20/ lowing:
COMAND display. Rthe vehicle delivers extremely sporty han-
Available drive programs: dling characteristics
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear
I Individual Individual settings Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
S+ Sport Plus Extremely sporty driving later

characteristics Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
S Sport Sporty driving character- sion shift points
istics
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff Drive program E (Eco)

springing and damping settings (vehicles
Drive program E is characterized by the fol-
with AIRMATIC)
lowing:
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available
Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economi-
cal handling characteristics
Driving and parking

Drive program S (Sport)
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
Drive program S is characterized by the fol- forward and reverse gears, unless the
lowing: accelerator pedal is depressed fully.
Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving charac- Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
teristics stability on slippery road surfaces, for
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear example.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
later the automatic transmission shifting up
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low
as a result of the later automatic transmis- engine speed range and the wheels are less
sion shift points likely to spin.
Rthe suspension exhibits hard springing and Rduring deceleration, the engine is discon-
damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC) nected from the drive train. The vehicle
uses kinetic energy and consumes less fuel
Drive program C (Comfort) (overrun mode).
Rthe performance of air-conditioning system
Drive program C is characterized by the fol- and heating are reduced
lowing:
Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economi-
cal handling characteristics. Manual gear shifting
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
General notes
forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully.
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
stability on slippery road surfaces, for
example.
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low
engine speed range and the wheels are less
likely to spin.
: Left steering wheel paddle shifter: shifts

down
; Right steering wheel paddle shifter: shifts
up
Using the steering wheel paddle shifters, you
can temporarily change gears yourself. The
transmission must be in position D.
Z
Activating The gearshift recommendations assist you in

adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
X Shift the transmission to position D.
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle display.
shifter (Y page 169).
X Shift to recommended gear ; according
Manual gear shifting is activated tempora-
Driving and parking
to gearshift recommendation : when

rily. The selected gear appears in the mul-
shown in the multifunction display of the
tifunction display.
instrument cluster.
Shifting gears
Deactivating
Pulling on the left or right steering wheel pad-
If you have activated manual gear shifting, it
dle shifter, allows you to shift gears yourself
will remain active for a certain amount of
for a limited time. Depending on which paddle
time. Under certain conditions the minimum
shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase
up, if permitted.
or when driving on steep terrain.
X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering
If manual gear shifting is deactivated, the
wheel paddle shifter (Y page 169). gears will be selected automatically.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear. You can also deactivate manual gear selec-
tion:
If the maximum engine speed on the cur-
rently engaged gear is reached and you X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad-
continue to accelerate, the automatic dle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 169).
transmission automatically shifts up in or
order to prevent engine damage. X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer- transmission position.
ing wheel paddle shifter (Y page 169). or
The automatic transmission shifts down to X Use the AGILITY SELECT switch to change
the next gear. the drive program (Y page 167).
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine Manual gear selection is deactivated.
speed when shifting down, the automatic
transmission protects against engine dam-
age by not shifting down.
Automatic down shifting occurs when
coasting.
Shift recommendation
Refueling 171
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
Driving and parking

shop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
Transfer case Refueling

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- Important safety notes
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-
mitted to both axles. G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
! Performance tests may only be carried
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake
sion.
system or transfer case could otherwise be
damaged. Contact a qualified specialist You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
workshop for a performance test. sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
! To prevent ESP from intervening, the refueling.
ignition must be switched off (SmartKey or
the Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) if: G WARNING
Rthe electric parking brake is being tested Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
on a brake dynamometer. There is a risk of injury.
Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one You must make sure that fuel does not come
axle raised (not permitted for vehicles into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
with 4MATIC). and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
The brake system could otherwise be dam- vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
aged.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
Z
172 Refueling
If you or others come into contact with fuel, If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
observe the following: out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
RWash away fuel from skin immediately For further information on fuel and fuel quality
using soap and water. (Y page 397).
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
Driving and parking
immediately rinse them thoroughly with

Refueling
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay. General information
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
Pay attention to the important safety notes
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
(Y page 171).
ing.
If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the out-
RImmediately change out of clothing which
side, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.
has come into contact with fuel.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
G WARNING 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
next to the filling pump indicates the side of
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
the vehicle.
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Opening the fuel filler flap
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the

refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter : To open the fuel filler flap
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the ; To insert the fuel filler cap
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-
= Tire pressure table
fied specialist workshop and have the fuel ? Fuel type to be used
tank and fuel lines drained completely. X Switch off the engine.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
fuel system. lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted tion or KEYLESSGO
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
The on-board electronics now have status
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection been removed.
system could be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
Refueling 173
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of

arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
Driving and parking

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on
the inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel
may leak out.
Closing the fuel filler flap

X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the

vehicle.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open,
the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A
message appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 270).
Z
174 Parking
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G WARNING
vehicle.
Driving and parking
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESSGO
The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as
the SmartKey having been removed.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
not be opened. or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 81).
or
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 83).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
Parking G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
G WARNING with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or for example, the power steering and the brake
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with boosting effect. You will require considerably
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
gas flow. There is a risk of fire. of an accident.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
Parking 175
G WARNING cle from rolling away by applying the parking

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- brake.
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission
Driving and parking

Rshift the automatic transmission out of the X Apply the electric parking brake.
parking position P. X Shift the transmission to position P.
Rstart the engine. X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of The immobilizer is activated.
an accident and injury. X With the Start/Stop button: press the
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Start/Stop button (Y page 157).
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never The engine stops and all the indicator
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
When the driver's door is closed, this cor-
! Always secure the vehicle correctly
responds to SmartKey position 1. When the
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle
or its drivetrain could be damaged. driver's door is open, this corresponds to
SmartKey position 0: "SmartKey removed".
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally: If you switch the engine off with the trans-
mission in position R or D, the automatic
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.
transmission shifts to N automatically.
Rthe transmission must be in position P and With the SmartKey: if you then open one of
the SmartKey must be removed from the the front doors or remove the SmartKey from
ignition lock. the ignition, the automatic transmission
Rthe front wheels must be turned towards shifts to P.
the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi- With the Start/Stop button: if you then
ents.
open one of the front doors, the automatic
Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the
transmission shifts to P.
front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for
If you want the automatic transmission to
example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the
Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for a towing system:
example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
Using the SmartKey:
Switching off the engine X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
Important safety notes depressed.
G WARNING X Release the brake pedal.
The automatic transmission switches to neu- X Release the electric parking brake.
tral position N when you switch off the engine. X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an Key in the ignition lock.
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
Z
176 Parking
With the Start/Stop button: The function of the electric parking brake is
X Switch on the ignition. dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
board voltage is low or there is a malfunction
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
in the system, it may not be possible to apply
depressed.
the released parking brake.
X Pull the Start/Stop button out of the igni-
Driving and parking
tion. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on

level ground and secure it to prevent it roll-
ing away.
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
X Release the brake pedal. tion P.
It may not be possible to release an applied
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
Key in the ignition lock. there is a malfunction in the system. Contact
In the event of an emergency, the engine can a qualified specialist workshop.
be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by The electric parking brake performs a func-
pressing and holding the Start/Stop button tion test at regular intervals while the engine
for three seconds. This function operates is switched off. The sounds that can be heard
independently of the ECO start/stop auto- while this is occurring are normal.
matic engine switch-off function.
Applying/releasing manually
Electric parking brake
General notes
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
X To apply: push handle :.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- When the electric parking brake is applied,
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
an accident and injury. only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
When leaving the vehicle, always take the ment cluster.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never The electric parking brake can also be
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. applied when the SmartKey is removed.
Parking 177
X To release: pull handle :. Rthe seat belt has been fastened.

The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- If the transmission is in position R, the trunk
ter goes out. lid must be closed.
The electric parking brake can only be If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
Driving and parking

released: conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in release the electric parking brake:
the ignition lock (Y page 157) or Rthe driver's door is closed.
Rif the ignition was switched on using the Ryou have shifted out of transmission posi-
Start/Stop button. tion P or you have previously driven faster
than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Applying automatically
Ensure that you do not depress the acceler-
The electric parking brake is applied auto- ator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the
matically: parking brake will be released and the vehicle
Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a will start to move.
standstill or
Emergency braking
Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle
stationary or The vehicle can also be braked during an
Rif Active Parking Assist is holding the vehi- emergency by using the electric parking
cle at a standstill brake.
In addition, at least one of the following con- X While driving, push handle : of the electric
ditions must be fulfilled: parking brake (Y page 176).
Rthe engine is switched off. The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt is handle : of the electric parking brake
not fastened. depressed. The longer the electric parking
Rthere
brake handle : is depressed, the greater the
is a system malfunction.
braking force.
Rthe power supply is insufficient.
During braking:
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
Ra warning tone sounds
period.
Rthe Please Release Parking Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster message appears
lights up. Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
The electric parking brake is not automati- only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
cally engaged if the engine is switched off by ter flashes
the ECO start/stop function. When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
still, the electric parking brake is engaged.
Releasing automatically
Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto- Parking the vehicle for a long period
matically released if all of the following con-
ditions are met: If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
Rthe engine is running. exhaustive discharging and further damaged
Rthe transmission is in position D or R. in the event of this occurring again.
Z
178 Driving tips
X Connect a trickle charger. a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per

i You can obtain information about trickle second.
chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop. Drive sensibly save fuel
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than Observe the following tips to save fuel:
Driving and parking
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a

X The tires should always be inflated to the
result of lack of use.
recommended tire pressure.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
X Remove unnecessary loads.
seek advice.
X Remove roof racks when they are not nee-
ded.
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
Driving tips
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
General driving tips X Have all maintenance work carried out as
Important safety notes indicated by the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
G WARNING interval display.
If you switch off the ignition while driving, Fuel consumption also increases when driv-
safety-relevant functions are only available ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, hilly terrain.
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably Drinking and driving
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident. G WARNING
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
G WARNING Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
If you operate mobile communication equip- affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from ment.
traffic conditions. You could also lose control The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. dent is greatly increased when you drink or
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle take drugs and drive.
is stationary. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
Observe the legal requirements for the coun- ing drugs.
try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-
tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile
Emission control
phone while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use G WARNING
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
when the traffic situation permits. If you are gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
before operating the telephone. is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers out sufficient ventilation.
Driving tips 179
Certain engine systems are designed to keep range ?. The 8 warning lamp in the
the level of poisonous components in exhaust instrument cluster also lights up
fumes within legal limits. (Y page 291).
These systems only work at peak efficiency if The ECO display consists of three sections,
they are serviced exactly in accordance with with an inner and outer area. The sections
Driving and parking

the manufacturer's specifications. For this correspond to the following three categories:
reason, all work on the engine must be carried
out by qualified and authorized Mercedes- : Acceleration (evaluation of all
Benz technicians. acceleration processes):
The engine settings must not be changed Rthe outer area fills up and the
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all inner area lights up green: mod-
specific service work must be carried out at erate acceleration, especially at
regular intervals and in accordance with the higher speeds
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details Rthe outer area empties and the
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. inner area is gray: sporty accel-
eration
ECO display ; Coasting (evaluation of all decel-

eration processes):
The ECO display shows you how economical
Rthe outer area fills up and the
your driving style is. The ECO display assists
you in achieving the most economical driving inner area lights up green: antic-
style for the selected settings and prevailing ipatory driving, keeping your dis-
conditions. Your driving style can significantly tance and early release of the
influence the vehicle's consumption. accelerator. The vehicle can
coast without use of the brakes.
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: frequent heavy
braking
= Constant (continuous evaluation
over the entire journey):
Rthe outer area fills up and the
inner area lights up green: con-
stant speed and avoidance of
unnecessary acceleration and
: Acceleration deceleration
; Coasting Rthe outer area empties and the
= Constant inner area is gray: fluctuations in

speed
? Additional range achieved
Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start
The three inner areas display the current driv-
and represents the additional range achieved
ing style and light up green as a result of a
since the beginning of the journey as a result
particularly economical driving style.
of an adapted driving style.
Depending on the driving situation, up to two
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve areas may light up simultaneously.
range, the Reserve Fuel message is shown
in the multifunction display instead of
Z
180 Driving tips
At the beginning of the journey, the three Braking

outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of
economical driving. A higher level indicates a Important safety notes
more economical driving style. If the three
outer areas are completely filled at the same
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
Driving and parking
time, the driver has adopted the most eco-

nomical driving style for the selected settings an attempt to increase the engine's braking
and prevailing conditions. The ECO display effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
border lights up. There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption. The additionally achieved Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
range displayed under Bonus fr. Start ing on a slippery road surface.
does not indicate a fixed consumption reduc-
tion. Downhill gradients
In addition to driving style, the actual con- ! On long and steep gradients, you must
sumption is affected by other factors, such reduce the load on the brakes by shifting
as: early to a lower gear. This allows you to take
Rload advantage of the engine braking effect and
Rtire pressure helps avoid overheating and excessive
Rcold start wear of the brakes.
Rchoice of route When you take advantage of the engine
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn
Relectrical consumers switched on
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur-
These factors are not included in the ECO dis- face. This could cause damage to the drive
play. train. This type of damage is not covered by
An economical driving style specially requires the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
driving at moderate engine speeds.
Achieving a higher value in the categories Heavy and light loads
"Acceleration" and "Constant":
G WARNING
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E (vehi-
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
cles with the AGILITY SELECT switch) increases the stopping distance and can even
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on cause the braking system to fail. There is a
the highway, only the outer area for "con- risk of an accident.
stant" will change. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
The ECO display summarizes the driving style depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
from the start of the journey to its completion. pedal at the same time.
Therefore, there are more marked changes in
the outer areas at the start of a journey. On ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For results in excessive and premature wear to
more marked changes, perform a manual rest the brake pads.
(Y page 237). If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
For further information on the ECO display, load, do not stop the vehicle immediately.
see (Y page 236). Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Driving tips 181
Wet roads eter. If you wish to operate the vehicle on

such a dynamometer, please consult an
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center in
without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
advance. You could otherwise damage the
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
drive train or the brake system.
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
Driving and parking

been washed or driven through deep water. ! The ESP system operates automatically.
You have to depress the brake pedal more The engine and the ignition must therefore
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the be switched off (the SmartKey must be in
vehicle in front. position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or the
After driving on a wet road or having the vehi- Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or
cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten- 1) if the electric parking brake is tested on
tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm up a brake dynamometer.
the brake discs, thereby drying them more Braking triggered automatically by ESP
quickly and protecting them against corro- may cause severe damage to the brake
sion. system.
All checks and maintenance work on the
Limited braking performance on salt- brake system must be carried out at a quali-
treated roads fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualified
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt specialist workshop to arrange this.
residue may form on the brake discs and Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
brake pads. This can result in a significantly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
longer braking distance. If the brake system has only been subject to
RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply moderate loads, you should test the function-
the brakes occasionally while paying atten- ality of your brakes at regular intervals.
tion to the traffic conditions. Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 67)
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS)
beginning and end of a journey. (Y page 67).
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
ahead. mends only installing the following brake
disks and brake pads/linings:
Servicing the brakes Rbrake disks that have been approved by
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in Mercedes-Benz
the instrument cluster and you hear a warn- Rbrake pads/linings that have been
ing tone while the engine is running, the approved by Mercedes-Benz or that are of
brake fluid level may be too low. Observe an equivalent standard of quality
additional warning messages in the multi- Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can
function display. compromise the safety of your vehicle.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to Always replace all brake disks and brake
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. pads/linings on an axle at the same time.
Have the brake system checked immedi- Always install new brake pads/linings when
ately. This work should be carried out at a replacing brake disks.
qualified specialist workshop. The vehicle is equipped with lightweight
brake disks to which the wheel assembly with
! A function or performance test should
only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamom- rim and threaded connection is matched.
Z
182 Driving tips
The use of brake disks other than those If you have to drive on stretches of road on
approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the which water has collected, please bear in
track width and is subject to approval, if appli- mind that:
cable. Rthe water level, in the case of still water,
Shock-type loads when handling the brake may not exceed a maximum point of the
Driving and parking
disks, such as when changing wheels, can lower edge of the vehicle body
lead to a reduction in comfort when driving Ryou should drive no faster than at a walking
with lightweight brake disks. Avoid shock- pace
type loads on the lightweight brake disks,
particularly on the brake plate.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only Winter driving
use brake fluid that has been specially
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, G WARNING
or which corresponds to an equivalent quality If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
standard. Brake fluid which has not been an attempt to increase the engine's braking
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
which is not of an equivalent quality could There is an increased danger of skidding and
affect your vehicle's operating safety. accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning G DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
If water has accumulated to a certain depth ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
on the road surface, there is a danger of such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
hydroplaning occurring, even if: vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
Ryou drive at low speeds. becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. fatal injury.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
you must drive in the following manner: around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
Rlower your speed. window on the side of the vehicle that is not
Ravoid ruts. facing into the wind.
Ravoid sudden steering movements.
Rbrake carefully.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-
fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-
ter.
Driving on flooded roads
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
front or in the opposite direction create and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
waves. This may cause the maximum per- control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
missible water depth to be exceeded. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
Failure to observe these notes may result in stopped when moving at low speed:
damage to the engine, electrical systems
X Shift the transmission to position N.
and transmission.
Driving systems 183
The outside temperature indicator is not Cruise control

designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. General notes
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- Cruise control maintains a constant road
played after a short delay. speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
Driving and parking

Indicated temperatures just above the freez- to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- a lower gear in good time on long and steep
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, downhill gradients. This is especially impor-
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The tant if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you
vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your will make use of the braking effect of the
driving style. Always adapt your driving style engine. This relieves the load on the brake
and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing system and prevents the brakes from over-
weather conditions. heating and wearing too quickly.
You should pay special attention to road con- Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
ditions when temperatures are around freez- ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
ing point. steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
For more information on driving with snow store any road speed above 20 mph
chains, see (Y page 361). (30 km/h).
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 360). Important safety notes
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
section (Y page 360). control can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise
control cannot take into account the road,
Driving systems traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for for braking in good time and for staying in
innovative driver assistance and safety sys- your lane.
tems which enhance comfort and support the Do not use cruise control:
driver in critical situations. With these intelli-
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
gent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz
has set a milestone on the path towards allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
autonomous driving. in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
elements of active and passive safety in one erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
well thought out system for the safety of the traction and the vehicle could then skid
vehicle occupants and that of other road Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
users. heavy rain or snow
Further information on driving safety systems If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
(Y page 66). driver of the speed stored.
Z
184 Driving systems
Cruise control lever X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up :
or down ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
Driving and parking
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
: To activate or increase speed evens out. Cruise control maintains the
; To activate or reduce speed stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
= To deactivate cruise control
? To activate at the current speed/last Storing the current speed or call up the
stored speed last stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display G WARNING
for five seconds. In addition, the symbol If you call up the stored speed and it is lower
appears in the multifunction display. In the than the current speed, the vehicle deceler-
speedometer, the segments between the ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the
stored speed and the maximum speed light vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There
up. is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
Storing and maintaining the current tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
speed do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
You can store the current speed if you are

driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
Driving systems 185
speed of the vehicle to the previously Deactivating cruise control

stored speed.
Setting a speed
Driving and parking

There are several ways to deactivate cruise
control:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment wards :.
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to or
the speed set. X Brake.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
Ryou engage the electric parking brake
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph
press the cruise control lever up : or (30 km/h)
down ; to the pressure point. RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP
Every time the cruise control lever is Ryou shift the transmission to position N
pressed up : or down ; the last speed while driving
stored is increased or reduced.
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly trol Off message in the multifunction dis-
press the cruise control lever up : or play for approximately five seconds.
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is i When you switch off the engine, the last
pressed up : or down ; the last speed speed stored is cleared.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you DISTRONIC PLUS
depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-
erate to overtake, cruise control adjusts General notes
the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
after you have finished overtaking. DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
automatically helps you maintain the dis-
tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi-
cles are detected with the aid of the radar
sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes
automatically so that the set speed is not
exceeded.
Z
186 Driving systems
Change into a lower gear in good time on long Removal, tampering, or altering of the
and steep downhill gradients. This is espe- device will void any warranties, and is not
cially important if the vehicle is laden. By permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
doing so, you will make use of the braking in any non-approved way.
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on Any unauthorized modification to this
Driving and parking
the brake system and prevents the brakes device could void the user's authority to
from overheating and wearing too quickly. operate the equipment.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and Important safety notes
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre-
vent a collision without your intervention. An G WARNING
intermittent warning tone will then sound and DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
the distance warning lamp will light up in the Rpeople or animals
instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
order to increase the distance to the vehicle
ped or parked vehicles
in front or take evasive action provided it is
Roncoming and crossing traffic
safe to do so.
DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). warnings nor intervene in such situations.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
roads with steep gradients. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it
can resemble the radar detectors of the
responsible authorities. You can refer to the
G WARNING
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-
questions are asked about this. tify other road users and complex traffic sit-
uations.
i USA only: This device has been approved In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
The radar sensor is intended for use in an Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
automotive radar system only. Removal, brake the vehicle
tampering, or altering of the device will void Rneither give a warning nor intervene
any warranties, and is not permitted by the Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in There is a risk of an accident.
any non-approved way.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
Any unauthorized modification to this brake, in particular when warned to do so by
device could void the user's authority to DISTRONIC PLUS.
operate the equipment.
i Canada only: This device complies with G WARNING
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
subject to the following two conditions: to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.
1. This device may not cause harmful inter- If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC
ference, and PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is
2. this device must accept any interference a risk of an accident.
received, including interference that may In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
cause undesired operation of the device. try to take evasive action.
Driving systems 187
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function This speed may:

is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- or an exit lane
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC
Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-
vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive
Driving and parking

ing or other similar situations:
countries)
Rwhen towing the vehicle Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass
Rin the car wash vehicles driving on the right (right-hand
If you fail to adapt your driving style, drive countries)
DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
of accident nor override the laws of physics. driver of the speed stored.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control lever
DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
: To activate or increase speed
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
; To activate or reduce speed
heavy rain or snow
= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or ? To activate at the current speed/last
vehicles driving on a different line. stored speed
A To set the specified minimum distance
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
example, in parking garages
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-
cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-
edly accelerate the vehicle to the stored
speed.
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off.
Z
188 Driving systems
If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selec- press the cruise control lever up : to the
ted. pressure point for a higher speed, or down
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in = for a lower speed.
the direction of arrow ;. Every time the cruise control lever is
LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control pressed up or down, the last speed stored
Driving and parking
lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selec- is increased or reduced.

ted. or
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : past
Activation conditions the pressure point for a higher speed, or
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol- down = for a lower speed.
lowing conditions must be fulfilled: Every time the cruise control lever is
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up pressed up or down, the last speed stored
to two minutes after pulling away before is increased or reduced.
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. X Remove your foot from the accelerator
Rthe electric parking brake must be pedal.

released. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
RESP must be active, but not intervening.
stored speed.
RActive Parking Assist must not be activa-
ted. i If you do not fully release the accelerator
Rthe transmission must be in position D. pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
in front will then not be maintained. You will
fastened. be driving at the speed you determine by
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors the position of the accelerator pedal.
must be closed.
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when
Activating stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is
20 mph (30 km/h).
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ; or press it up : or down =.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
Activating at the current speed/last

stored speed
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
you ; or press it up : or down =. brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. dent.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
Driving systems 189
do not know the stored speed, store the vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle
desired speed again. accelerates to the set speed.
i The vehicle can also pull away when it is
facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving
on a different line from another vehicle. The
Driving and parking

vehicle then brakes automatically. There is
a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at all
times.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards In this way, the distance you have selected is
you :. maintained.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving
pedal. vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to
time it is activated, the current speed is the speed you have stored.
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
speed to the previously stored value. Selecting the drive program
DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS style when you have selected the S or S+
driving program (Y page 168). Acceleration
Pulling away and driving behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed
is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have
selected the C or E driving program, the vehi-
cle accelerates more gently. This setting is
recommended in stop-and-start traffic.
Changing lanes
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
PLUS supports you when:
Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph
(70 km/h)
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
X If you want to pull away with RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from of collision
the brake pedal. If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted
you :. if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-
or tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
X Accelerate briefly. front becomes too small.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no monitors the left lane on left-hand drive
Z
190 Driving systems
vehicles and the right lane on right-hand The electric parking brake automatically
drive vehicles. secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is
activated and:
Stopping
Rthe seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
G WARNING door is open.
Driving and parking
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: matically switched off by the ECO start/
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in stop function.
the voltage supply. Ra system malfunction occurs.
RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi- If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission
cle occupant or from outside the vehicle. may be shifted into position P automatically.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have Setting a speed
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
For further information on deactivating

DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 192).
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
is stationary. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains ments (1 km/h increments): briefly
stationary and you do not need to depress the press the cruise control lever up : or
brake. down ; to the pressure point.
After a time, the electric parking brake Every time the cruise control lever is
secures the vehicle and relieves the service pressed up : or down ; the last speed
brake. stored is increased or reduced.
Depending on the specified minimum dis- X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in press the cruise control lever up : or
front. The specified minimum distance is set down ; to the pressure point.
using the control on the cruise control lever. Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC
PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished over-
taking.
Driving systems 191
Setting the specified minimum distance DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-
ment cluster
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span Displays in the speedometer
between one and two seconds. With this func-
tion, you can set the minimum distance that
Driving and parking

DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 191).
i Make sure that you maintain the mini-
mum distance to the vehicle in front as
required by law. Adjust the distance to the
vehicle in front if necessary.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,

segments between the speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed ; light up. The
segments likewise light up if a vehicle in front
is detected in the fast lane.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-
X To increase: turn control ; in direction vated
=.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
X To decrease: turn control ; in direc-
tion :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
: Vehicle in front, if detected

; Distance indicator, current distance to
the vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable
? Own vehicle
In the Assistance menu (Y page 244) of the
on-board computer, you can select the assis-
tance graphics display.
Z
192 Driving systems
X Select the Assistance Info Display There are several ways to deactivate
function using the on-board computer DISTRONIC PLUS:
(Y page 243). X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa- wards :
ted or
Driving and parking
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.

When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in
the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-
: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only
ted if:
appears when the cruise control lever is
actuated) Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if
; Vehicle in front, if detected the vehicle is automatically secured with
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi- the electric parking brake
cle in front; adjustable RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP
? Own vehicle Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
In the Assistance menu (Y page 244) of the Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
on-board computer, you can select the assis- you in order to pull away and the front-
tance graphics display. passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open
X Select the Assistance Info Display
Rthe vehicle has skidded
function using the on-board computer
(Y page 243). Ryou activate Active Parking Assist
You will see the stored speed for about five If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. hear a warning tone. You will see the
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multi-
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS function display for approximately five sec-
onds.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
RVehicles traveling on a different line
ROther vehicles changing lanes
RNarrow vehicles
Driving systems 193
RObstructions and stationary vehicles Other vehicles changing lanes

RCrossing vehicles
In such situations, brake if necessary.
DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
Driving and parking

Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-

cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle
will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-

cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle
may brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the

vehicle in front on the edge of the road,
because of its narrow width. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles
traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-

cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
Z
194 Driving systems
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC Steering Assist focuses on clear lane mark-
PLUS will not brake for these. ings (left and right).
Crossing vehicles In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph
(0 - 60 km/h) Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the
Driving and parking
vehicle in front, taking into account lane

markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a
traffic jam.
If these conditions are not present, Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide
assistance.
DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for
the function to be available.
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat- Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of
ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with an accident nor override the laws of physics.
crossing traffic, for example, could cause It cannot take into account road, weather or
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist aid. You are responsible for the distance to
and Stop&Go Pilot the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for
braking in good time and for staying in your
General notes
lane.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traf-
fic conditions and does not detect all road
users. If you are following a vehicle which is
driving towards the edge of the road, your
vehicle could come into contact with the curb
or other road boundaries. In the case of devi-
ations in road markings, beware of other road
users, e.g. cyclists that are in the direct vicin-
ity of your vehicle.
Obstacles such as building site huts on the
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
lane or projecting out into the lane are not
Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle
detected.
in the center of the driving lane by means of
moderate steering interventions in a speed An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g.
range from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h). after intentionally driving over a lane marking,
can be corrected at any time if you steer
It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by
slightly in the opposite direction.
means of camera system : at the top of the
windshield. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your
vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering
intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehi-
Driving systems 195
cle back to the lane. In such cases, you must Pay attention also to the important safety
steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186).
does not leave the lane. The steering interventions are carried out
The system may be impaired or may not func- with a limited steering moment. The system
tion if: requires the driver to keep his hands on the
Driving and parking

Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- steering wheel and to steer himself.
cient illumination of the road, or due to If you do not steer yourself or if take your
snow, rain, fog or spray hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, period of time, the system will first alert you
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road with a visual warning. A steering wheel sym-
surface is wet) bol appears in the multifunction display. If you
have still not started to steer and have not
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
taken hold of the steering wheel after five
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
seconds at the latest, a warning tone also
vicinity of the camera
sounds to remind you to take control of the
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-
vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con- switch to passive mode. DISTRONIC PLUS
struction work remains active.
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Pilot
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
The system is switched to passive and no lon-
ger assists you by performing steering inter-
ventions if:
Ryou actively change lane X Press button ;.
Ryou switch on the turn signal Indicator lamp : lights up. The DTR+:
Steering Assist. On message appears
Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do
in the multifunction display. Steering Assist
not steer for a prolonged period of time
and Stop&Go Pilot are activated.
i After you have finished changing lanes,
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are auto-
matically active again.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot
provide assistance:
Ron very sharp corners
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
been detected and displayed.
Z
196 Driving systems
Information in the multifunction display Important safety notes

G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Driving and parking
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti- been tampered with.
vated but is not ready for a steering interven- Rthe battery is disconnected
tion, steering wheel symbol : appears in
gray. If the system provides you with support There is a risk of an accident.
by means of steering interventions, sym- If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
bol : is shown in green. the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Pilot ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
X Press button ;. is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
Indicator lamp : goes out. The DTR+: cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
Steering Assist. Off message age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC
appears in the multifunction display. Steer- PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-
ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactiva- ing or other similar situations:
ted. Rwhen towing the vehicle
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, Steer- Rin the car wash
ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated
automatically. Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if all of
HOLD function the following conditions are fulfilled:
Rthe vehicle is stationary.
General notes
Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the matically switched off by the ECO start/
following situations: stop function.
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt
slopes is fastened.
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rthe electric parking brake is released.
Rwhen waiting in traffic Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.
The vehicle is kept stationary without the RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Driving systems 197
Activating the HOLD function The electric parking brake automatically

secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is
activated and:
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened.
Driving and parking

Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission
X Make sure that the activation conditions may be shifted into position P automatically.
are met.
X Depress the brake pedal.
AIRMATIC
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until : appears in the multifunction dis- General notes
play. AIRMATIC is an air suspension with variable
The HOLD function is activated. You can damping for improved driving comfort. All-
release the brake pedal. round level control ensures the best possible
i If depressing the brake pedal the first suspension and constant ground clearance,
time does not activate the HOLD function, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive
wait briefly and then try again. fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to
improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con-
Deactivating the HOLD function sumption. There is also the option to manually
adjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC consists of
The HOLD function is deactivated automati- level setting, level control and the Adaptive
cally if: Damping System ADS.
Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in The vehicle level can be set using the AGILITY
position D or R. SELECT switch (Y page 167) or the level but-
Rthe transmission is in position P. ton (Y page 198). The setting always corre-
sponds to the last selected function.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
certain amount of pressure until : disap-
pears from the multifunction display.
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric G WARNING
parking brake. When the vehicle is being lowered, people
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
i After a time, the electric parking brake
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
injury.
brake. The HOLD function is then deacti-
vated. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
Z
198 Driving systems
i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle is Setting the normal vehicle level
not lowered.
X Start the engine.
Vehicle level If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X Press button :.
Setting the raised vehicle level
Driving and parking
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is

adjusted to the height of the currently
selected drive program (Y page 167).
Suspension tuning
General notes
The Adaptive Damping System automatically
controls the calibration of the dampers.
The damping is tuned individually to each
wheel and depends on:
It is possible to choose between the "Normal" Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
50 mph (80 km/h). Select the "Normal" set- Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-
ting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for fort
driving with snow chains or on particularly Your selection remains stored even if you
poor road surfaces. Your selection remains remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
stored even if you remove the SmartKey from
the ignition lock. Sports tuning
X Start the engine. In the "Sport" and "Sport Plus" drive pro-
grams, the firmer suspension setting ensures
If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
even better contact with the road. Select this
X Press button :. mode when employing a sporty driving style,
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is e.g. on winding country roads.
raised by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the X Select the S or S+ drive program with the
normal level.
AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 167).
The Vehicle Rising message appears in The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm)
the multifunction display. compared to the normal level.
i The message disappears after ten sec-
onds, irrespective of the level reached. If Comfort tuning
necessary, the vehicle is raised further. In the "Eco" and "Comfort" drive programs,
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: the driving characteristics of your vehicle are
more comfortable. Therefore, select this
Rdrive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h).
mode if you favor a more comfortable driving
Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a style. Select comfort mode also when driving
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h). fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight
The "Raised level" remains active when you stretches of highway.
are not driving within these speed ranges. X Select the E or C drive program with the
AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 167).
The vehicle is raised to the normal level.
Driving systems 199
When driving at speeds above 80 mph front bumper and six sensors in the rear
(125 km/h), the vehicle is automatically low- bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and
ered by 0.6 in (15 mm) in the E and C drive audibly the distance between your vehicle
programs. When driving at speeds below and an object.
50 mph (80 km/h) the vehicle is raised again. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-
Driving and parking

ment for your attention to your immediate
surroundings. You are always responsible for
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per- ing space. When maneuvering, parking or
manently driven. Together with ESP, it pulling out of a parking space, make sure that
improves the traction of your vehicle when- there are no persons, animals or objects in
ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient the area in which you are maneuvering.
grip. ! When parking, pay particular attention to
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC objects above or below the sensors, such
can neither reduce the risk of accident nor as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
take account of road, weather and traffic con- when they are in the immediate vicinity of
ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in or the objects.
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good The sensors may not detect snow and other
time and for staying in your lane. objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
necessary when pulling away. truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
RAccelerate
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
less when driving.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle uneven terrain.
raised. This may damage the transfer case.
Damage of this sort is not covered by the PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All you:
wheels must remain either on the ground or Rswitch on the ignition
be fully raised. Observe the instructions for Rshiftthe transmission to position D, R or N
towing the vehicle with all wheels in full PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
contact with the ground. 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum speeds.
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow Range of the sensors
chains if necessary.
General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-
PARKTRONIC sideration that are:
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
mals or objects.
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-
ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area ing loads, truck overhangs or loading
around your vehicle using six sensors in the ramps.
Z
200 Driving systems
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.
Driving and parking
80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm)
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.
side (example) 15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a warn-
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
the minimum, the distance may no longer be
shown.
Warning displays
: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or ; Segments on the right-hand side of the
slush. They can otherwise not function cor- vehicle
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking = Segments showing operational readiness
care not to scratch or damage them The warning displays show the distance
(Y page 334). between the sensors and the obstacle. The
Front sensors warning display for the front area is in the
instrument cluster. The warning display for
Center Approx. 40 in (approx. the rear area is located on the headliner in the
100 cm) rear compartment.
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. The warning display for each side of the vehi-
60 cm) cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
Driving systems 201
ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if opera- If indicator lamp : is on then PARKTRONIC is

tional readiness indicator = lights up. deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
The selected transmission position and the deactivated.
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter- i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
mine which warning display is active when the when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
Driving and parking

engine is running. the ignition lock.
Transmission Warning display
Vehicles without AIRMATIC
position
D Front area activated
R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas
is rolling back- activated
wards
P No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
: To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
From the: ; Indicator lamp
Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
intermittent warning tone for approx- deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
imately two seconds. deactivated.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two sec- i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
onds. This indicates that you have now when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
reached the minimum distance. the ignition lock.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
Vehicles with AIRMATIC
: Indicator lamp
; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
Z
202 Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking
warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.

You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the
indicator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 334).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist G WARNING

While parking or pulling out of a parking
General notes
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on result in a collision with another road user.
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol There is a risk of an accident.
indicates a suitable parking space. Active Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
steering intervention and brake application vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-
can assist you during parking and when exiting Assist parking procedure.
ing a parking space. You may also use
PARKTRONIC (Y page 199). ! If unavoidable, you should drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a
Important safety notes sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
the wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
immediate surroundings. You are always parking spaces which are not suitable for
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking parking, for example:
and exiting a parking space. Make sure that Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
no persons, animals or objects are in the Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
maneuvering range.
Ron unsuitable surfaces
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active
Parking Assist is also unavailable.
Driving systems 203
Parking tips: G WARNING

ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- If there are objects above the detection range:
ing space as possible. RActive Park Assist may steer too early
RParking spaces that are littered or over- Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these
grown might be identified or measured
Driving and parking

objects.
incorrectly.
You may cause a collision as a result. There is
RParking spaces that are partially occupied
by trailer drawbars might not be identified
If there are objects above the detection range,
as such or be measured incorrectly.
stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately. For further information on the detection
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC range (Y page 199).
(Y page 200) warning messages during the Active Parking Assist does not assist you
parking procedure. parking in spaces at right angles to the direc-
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure tion of travel if:
to correct it at any time. Active Parking Rtwo parking spaces are located directly
Assist will then be canceled. next to one another
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes
Rthe parking space is directly next to a low
from your vehicle, you should not use obstacle such as a low curb
Active Parking Assist.
Ryou park forwards
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow
Active Parking Assist does not assist you
chains are installed.
parking in spaces that are parallel or at right
RMake sure that the tire pressures are
angles to the direction of travel if:
always correct. This has a direct influence
Rthe parking space is on a curb
on the parking characteristics of the vehi-
cle. Rthe system reads the parking space as
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: being blocked, for example by foliage or
grass paving blocks
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of
Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to
travel
maneuver into
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
not on the pavement
Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the height range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
are not taken into account when the parking
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
vehicles.
Z
204 Driving systems
er's side are displayed as soon as the turn

signal on the driver's side is activated. When
parking on the driver's side, this must remain
switched on until you acknowledge the use of
Active Parking Assist by pressing the a
Driving and parking
button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The system automatically determines
whether the parking space is parallel or at
right angles to the direction of travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are
driving past it, and until you are approx-
: Detected parking space on the left
imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
; Parking symbol
= Detected parking space on the right Parking
Active Parking Assist is switched on automat-
ically when driving forwards. The system is G WARNING
operational at speeds of up to approximately If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll
system independently locates and measures away if:
parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking the voltage supply.
spaces: Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of partment, the battery or the fuses have
travel been tampered with.
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel Rthe battery is disconnected.
and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your There is a risk of an accident.
vehicle Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
Rthat are at right angles to the direction of against rolling away.
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider
than your vehicle i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,
Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot during the parking process. You are respon-
measure the length of a parking space if it sible for braking in good time.
is at right angles to the direction of travel.
You will need to judge whether your vehicle X Stop the vehicle when the parking space
will fit in the parking space. symbol shows the desired parking space in
the instrument cluster.
When driving at speeds below 19 mph X Shift the transmission to position R.
(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
a status indicator in the instrument cluster.
% message appears in the multifunction
When a parking space has been detected, an
display.
arrow towards the right or the left also
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist
only displays parking spaces on the front-
passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv-
Driving systems 205
X To cancel the procedure: press the % As soon as the parking procedure is com-
button on the multifunction steering wheel plete, the Park Assist Switched Off mes-
or pull away. sage appears and a warning tone sounds. The
or vehicle is now parked.
X To park using Active Parking Assist: The vehicle is kept stationary without the
Driving and parking

press the a button on the multifunction driver having to depress the brake pedal. The
steering wheel. braking effect is canceled when you depress
The Park Assist Active Accelerate the accelerator pedal.
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes- Active Parking Assist no longer supports you
sage appears in the multifunction display. with steering interventions and brake appli-
cations. When Active Parking Assist is fin-
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
ished, you must steer and brake again your-
X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at self. PARKTRONIC is still available.
all times. When backing up, drive at a speed
Parking tips:
below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can- RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the
celed. parking space after parking is dependent
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to on various factors. These include the posi-
a standstill when the vehicle approaches tion and shape of the vehicles parked in
the rear border of the parking space. front and behind it and the conditions of the
Maneuvering may be required in tight park- location. It may be the case that Active
ing spaces. Parking Assist guides you too far into a
parking space, or not far enough into it. In
The Park Assist Active Select D some cases, it may also lead you across or
Observe Surroundings message appears in onto the curb. If necessary, you should can-
the multifunction display. cel the parking procedure with Active Park-
X Shift the transmission to position D while ing Assist.
the vehicle is stationary. RYou can also select preselect transmission
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in position D. The vehicle redirects and does
the other direction. not drive as far into the parking space.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate Should the transmission change take place
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes- too early, the parking procedure will be
sage appears in the multifunction display. canceled. A sensible parking position can
i You will achieve the best results by wait- no longer be achieved from this position.
ing for the steering procedure to complete
before pulling away. Exiting a parking space
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all In order that Active Parking Assist can sup-
times. port you when you exit the parking space:
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to Rthe border of the parking space must be
a standstill when the vehicle approaches high enough at the front and the rear. A
the front border of the parking space. curb is too small, for example.
Maneuvering may be required in tight park- Rthe border of the parking space must not be
ing spaces. too wide, as the position of the vehicle must
The Park Assist Active Select R not exceed an angle of 45 to the starting
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
Z
206 Driving systems
position as it is maneuvering into the park- i You will achieve the best results by wait-
ing space. ing for the steering procedure to complete
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft before pulling away.
(1.0 m) must be available. If you back up after activation, the steering
Active Parking Assist can only assist you with wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
Driving and parking
exiting a parking space if you have parked the tion.

vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by
Active Parking Assist. the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several
i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active times if necessary.
Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst Once you have exited the parking space com-
the vehicle exits the parking space. You are pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
responsible for braking in good time. straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and
X Start the engine. the Park Assist switched off message
appears in the multifunction display. You will
then have to steer and merge into traffic on
X Switch on the turn signal in the direction
your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You
you are pulling away. can take over the steering, before the vehicle
X Shift the transmission to position D or R. has exited the parking space completely. This
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: is useful, for example when you recognize
% message appears in the multifunction that it is already possible to pull out of the
display. parking space.
X To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel Canceling Active Parking Assist
or pull away.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction
or steering wheel or steer yourself.
X To exit a parking space using Active Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
Parking Assist: press the a button on once. The Park Assist Canceled mes-
the multifunction steering wheel. sage appears in the multifunction display.
The Park Assist active Accelerate or
and brake Observe surroundings mes- X Press the PARKTRONIC button
sage appears in the multifunction display.
(Y page 201).
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
Do not exceed a maximum speed of The Park Assist Canceled message
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exit- appears in the multifunction display.
ing a parking space. Otherwise Active Park-
Active Parking Assist is canceled automati-
ing Assist will be canceled.
cally if:
X Depending on the message or as required,
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged
shift the transmission to position D or R.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in Rtransmission position P is selected
the other direction. The Park Assist Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
active Accelerate and brake longer possible
Observe surroundings message appears
in the multifunction display.
Driving systems 207
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
Ra wheel spins, ESP intervenes or fails. The ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When
warning lamp lights up in the instru- maneuvering or parking, make sure that there
ment cluster. are no persons, animals or objects in the area
in which you are maneuvering.
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
Driving and parking

disappears and the multifunction display Under the following circumstances, the rear
shows the Park Assist Canceled mes- view camera will not function, or will function
sage. in a limited manner:
When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you Rif the trunk lid is open
must steer and brake again yourself. Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is Rat night or in very dark places
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
accelerator again. Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
Rear view camera
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
General notes winter
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 334)
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the
rear view camera may be restricted due to
additional accessories on the rear of the vehi-
cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).
i The rear view camera is protected from
Rear view camera : is in the trunk lid handle.
raindrops and dust by means of a flap.
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and When the rear view camera is activated,
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind this flap opens.
your vehicle with guide lines in the Audio 20/
The flap closes again when:
COMAND display.
Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc-
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. ess
Ryou switch off the engine
i The text shown in the Audio 20/COMAND
Ryou open the trunk
display depends on the language setting.
The following are examples of rear view Observe the notes on cleaning
camera messages in the Audio 20/ (Y page 334).
COMAND display. For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the rear view camera has
Important safety notes been deactivated.
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your imme-
Z
208 Driving systems
Activating/deactivating the rear view

camera
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey
is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R
Driving and parking
gear function is selected in Audio 20/

COMAND; see the Digital Operator's Man-
ual.
The rear view camera flap opens. The area
behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
in the Audio 20/COMAND display. imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
The image from the rear view camera is vehicle
available throughout the maneuvering ; White guide line without turning the steer-
process. ing wheel, vehicle width including the
exterior mirrors (static)
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
vates if you shift the transmission to P or after
including the exterior mirrors, for current
driving forwards a short distance. steering wheel angle (dynamic)
? Yellow lane marking tires at current steer-
Messages in the Audio 20/COMAND
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
display
The rear view camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objects in the following positions:
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.: A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Rthe
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
bumper of a parked vehicle
vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
C Bumper
Rthe rear section of an HGV
D Red guide line at a distance of approx-
Ra slanted post imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
Use the guidelines only for orientation. vehicle
Approach objects no further than the bot- The guide lines are shown when the trans-
tom-most guideline. mission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Driving systems 209
= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

vehicle
? Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
Driving and parking

vehicle
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 208).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X With the help of white guide line :, check
: Front warning display whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement space.
operational readiness indicator X Using white guide line : as a guide, care-
= Rear warning display fully back up until you reach the end posi-
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when tion.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 200),
parking space. The vehicle is almost paral-
additional measurement operational readi-
lel in the parking space.
ness indicator ; appears in the Audio 20/
COMAND display. If the PARKTRONIC warn- Reverse perpendicular parking with the
ing displays are active or light up, warning steering wheel at an angle
displays : and = are also active or light up
correspondingly in the Audio 20/COMAND
display.
"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
: Parking space marking

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
: White guide line without turning the steer- switched on (Y page 208).
ing wheel, vehicle width including the The lane and the guide lines are shown.
exterior mirrors (static) X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width steering wheel in the direction of the park-
Z
210 Driving systems
ing space until yellow guide line ; reaches

parking space marking :.
X Keep the steering wheel in that position
and back up carefully.
Driving and parking
: Red guide line at a distance of approx-

vehicle
; White guide line without turning the steer-
ing wheel
: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
= End of parking space
steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Back up carefully until you have reached
the final position.
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
front of the parking space.
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in
The white lane should be as close to parallel
the parking space.
with the parking space marking as possi-
ble.
Wide-angle function
: White guide line at current steering wheel

angle : Symbol for the wide-angle view function
; Parking space marking ; Own vehicle
= PARKTRONIC warning displays
X Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-
tion while the vehicle is stationary. You can also use the rear view camera to
select a wide-angle view.
When PARKTRONIC is operational
(Y page 200), a symbol for your own vehicle
appears in the Audio 20/COMAND display. If
the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active,
warning displays = light up in the Audio 20/
Driving systems 211
COMAND display in yellow or red respec- Rtop view and picture from the rear view
tively. camera (130 viewing angle)
Rtop view and image from the front camera
Object detection (130 viewing angle without displaying the
The rear view camera helps detect moving maximum steering wheel angle)
Driving and parking

and stationary objects. If an object (person, Rtop view and enlarged rear view
vehicle or other obstacle) is detected, this Rtop view and enlarged front view
object is marked with a bar. Objects located Rtop view and pictures from the rearward
some distance from the vehicle away are facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
marked with a yellow bar. If the distance to Rtop view and pictures from the forward
the object is very small, the bar is displayed in facing mirror cameras (front wheel view)
red.
When the function is active and you shift the
Object detection only works in full screen transmission from D or R to N, the guide lines
mode. in the COMAND display are hidden.
To ensure that you can use the function, it When you change between transmission
must be switched on in Audio 20/COMAND; positions D and R, you see the previously
see the separate operating instructions. selected front or rear view.

360 camera (surround view)
The 360camera is only an aid and may show
General notes a distorted view of obstacles, show them
The 360 camera is a system consisting of incorrectly or not at all. The 360camera is
four cameras. not a substitute for attentive driving.
The system analyzes images from the follow- You are always responsible for safe maneu-
ing cameras: vering and parking. When maneuvering or
parking, make sure that there are no persons,
RRear view camera
animals or objects in the area in which you are
RFront camera
maneuvering.
RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mir-
You are always responsible for safety, and
rors must always pay attention to your surround-
The cameras capture the immediate sur- ings when parking and maneuvering. This
roundings of the vehicle. The system sup- applies to the areas behind, in front of and
ports you, for example when parking or if beside the vehicle. You could otherwise
vision is restricted at an exit. endanger yourself and others.
You can show pictures from the 360 camera The 360 camera will not function or will
in full-screen mode or in six different split- function in a limited manner:
screen views on the COMAND/Audio 20 dis- Rif the doors are open
play. A split-screen view also includes a top
Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in
view of the vehicle. This view is calculated
from the data supplied by the installed cam- Rif the trunk lid is open
eras (virtual camera). Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
The six split-screen views are: Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright
light
Z
212 Driving systems
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED Activating the 360 camera using the
lighting (the display may flicker) function button
Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driv-
ing into a heated garage in winter, causing
a rapid change in temperature
Driving and parking
Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered

Rif the vehicle components in which the
cameras are installed are damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not use the 360 camera in this case. You
can otherwise injure others or cause damage
to objects or the vehicle.
Guide lines are always shown at road level.
X Press button :.
Depending on whether position D or R is
The camera in the rear area is protected by
engaged, the following is shown:
means of a flap. This flap opens when the
Rfull screen display with the image from
360 camera is activated. Observe the notes
on cleaning (Y page 335). For technical rea- the front camera
sons, the flap may remain open briefly after Rfull screen display with the image from
the 360 camera has been deactivated. the rear view camera
i You can also switch to the split-screen
Activation conditions
view from the full-screen view.
The 360 camera image can be displayed if:
RCOMAND/Audio 20 is switched on, see the
Activating the 360 camera with
Digital Operator's Manual COMAND
Rthe 360 Camera function is switched on X To select 360 Camera in the carousel
menu: turn and press the controller.
i If the 360 camera is activated at speeds
Depending on whether position D or R is
above 19 mph (30 km/h) a warning mes-
engaged, the following is shown:
sage appears.
Ra split screen with top view and the
The warning message disappears if:
image from the front camera or
Rthe vehicle's speed falls below 19 mph Ra split screen with top view and the
(30 km/h). The 360 camera is then acti- image from the rear view camera
vated.
Rthe message is confirmed with the %
Activating the 360 camera using
button. reverse gear
The 360 camera images can be automati-
cally displayed by engaging reverse gear.
Driving systems 213
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position ! Objects not at ground level may appear to
2 in the ignition lock. be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
X Make sure that the Activation by R Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
gear function is selected in COMAND, see Rthe drawbar of a trailer
the Digital Operator's Manual.
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Driving and parking

X To show the 360 camera image: engage
Rthe rear section of an HGV
reverse gear.
Ra slanted post
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND display in split-screen mode. You Use the guidelines only for orientation.
see the top view of the vehicle and the Approach objects no further than the bot-
image from the rear view camera. tom-most guideline.
Top view with picture from the rear view
Selecting the split-screen and full camera
screen displays
Switching between split screen views:
X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
slide Z V the controller.
X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.
Switching to full screen mode:

X 180 View Turn and press the controller.
i The full screen option is only available in
the following views:
: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
RTop view with picture from the rear view imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
camera vehicle
RTop view with picture from the front cam-
; Symbol for the split screen setting with
era top view and rear view camera image
= Guide line for the maximum steering angle
Displays in the COMAND display
Important safety notes ing wheel angle (dynamic)
The camera system may show a distorted A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or including the exterior mirrors, for current
not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the steering wheel angle (dynamic)
system in the following locations:
Runder the front and rear bumpers
Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers
Rin close range above the handle on the
trunk lid
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
Rin the transitional areas between the vari-
ous cameras in the virtual top view
Z
214 Driving systems
A Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the
vehicle
B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the
Driving and parking
vehicle
Top view and enlarged rear view
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)

C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
vehicle
D Bumper
E Red guide line at a distance of approx-
vehicle
: Symbol for the split screen setting with
The guide lines are shown when the trans-
top view and rear view camera image
mission is in position R.
enlarged
The distance specifications only apply to ; Red guide line at a distance of approx-
objects that are at ground level. imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
Top view with picture from the front cam- vehicle
era This view assists you in estimating the dis-
tance to the vehicle behind you.
i This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.
: Symbol for the split screen setting with

top view and front camera image
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the
vehicle
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
Driving systems 215
Top view with picture from the mirror PARKTRONIC appears:

camera Rin split screen view as red or yellow brack-
ets around the vehicle icon in the top view,
or
Rin the full screen view, on the right-hand
Driving and parking

side at the bottom as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle icon
i The full screen display can also be selec-
ted as front view.
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restric-
ted, for example.
: Symbol for the top view and forward-
facing mirror camera setting i To select split-screen view, select the
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width % symbol in the display then confirm
including the exterior mirrors (right side of with the COMAND controller.
vehicle)
Object detection
including the exterior mirrors (left side of The 360 camera helps detect moving and
vehicle) stationary objects. If an object (person, vehi-
i You can also select the mirror camera cle, other obstacle) is detected, this object is
setting for the rear-facing view. marked with a bar. Objects located some dis-
tance from the vehicle away are marked with
a yellow bar. If the distance to the object is
Wide-angle function
very small, the bar is displayed in red.
Object detection only functions in both full
screen modes.
To ensure that you can use the function, it
must be switched on in COMAND (see the
separate operating instructions).
Exiting 360 camera display mode

As soon as the vehicle exceeds a speed of
19 mph (30 km/h), the function switches off.
The view which was active before the 360
: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear camera was displayed appears in the
view camera image COMAND display. You can also stop the 360
; Own vehicle camera display from split-screen view by
= PARKTRONIC warning displays selecting the % symbol in the display and
If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC then confirming with the COMAND controller.
and the function is active (Y page 201), warn- Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
ing displays = in the COMAND display are 360 camera display is also ended if you
also active or light up accordingly. select transmission position P.
Z
216 Driving systems
ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-

tinue your journey and starts assessing your
General notes tiredness again if:
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, Ryou switch off the engine.
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
Driving and parking
It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTEN- to take a break.
TION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fati-
gue or increasing lapses in concentration on Displaying the attention level
the part of the driver, it suggests taking a
break.

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system is not a
substitute for a well-rested and attentive
driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or You can have current status information dis-
not occur at all: played in the assistance menu (Y page 244)
Rif the length of the journey is less than of the on-board computer.
approximately 30 minutes X Select the Assistance display for Attention
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur- Assist using the on-board computer
face is uneven or if there are potholes (Y page 243).
Rif there is a strong side wind The following information is displayed:
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style Rlength of the journey since the last break.
with high cornering speeds or high rates of Rthe attention level determined by ATTEN-
acceleration TION ASSIST (Attention
Attention Level),
Level dis-
Rif you are predominantly driving slower played in a bar display in five levels from
than 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than high to low.
125 mph (200 km/h) RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
Rif you are driving with the active Steer the attention level and cannot output a
Assist of DISTRONIC PLUS warning, the System Suspended message
Rif the time has been set incorrectly appears. The bar display then changes the
Rin active driving situations, such as when display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed
you change lanes or change your speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
(200 km/h).
Driving systems 217
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST COMAND. You can select a service station

and navigation to this service station will then
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
begin. This function can be activated and
board computer (Y page 246).
deactivated in COMAND.
The system determines the attention level
of the driver depending on the setting
Driving and parking

selected: Lane Tracking package
Selection Standard
Standard: the sensitivity with
which the system determines the attention General notes
level is set to normal. The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Selection Sensitive
Sensitive: the sensitivity is set Spot Assist (Y page 217) and Lane Keeping
higher. The attention level detected by Atten- Assist (Y page 219).
tion Assist is adapted accordingly and the
driver is warned earlier. Blind Spot Assist
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
symbol appears in the multifunction General notes
display in the assistance graphic display. Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactiva- side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
ted, it is automatically reactivated after the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
engine has been stopped. The sensitivity sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors
selected corresponds to the last selection draws your attention to vehicles detected in
activated (standard/sensitive). the monitored area. If you then switch on the
corresponding turn signal to change lane, you
Warning in the multifunction display will also receive an optical and audible warn-
ing.
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra- Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed
tion are detected, a warning appears in the of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
multifunction display: ATTENTION ASSIST
Take a Break!.
Break! Important safety notes
In addition to the message shown in the mul- G WARNING
tifunction display, you will then hear a warn- Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
ing tone.
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
X If necessary, take a break.
placing them in the blind spot area
X Confirm the message by pressing the a
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
button on the steering wheel. differential and overtake your vehicle
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST an accident.
still detects increasing lapses in concentra- Always observe the traffic conditions care-
tion, you will be warned again after fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
15 minutes at the earliest. This will only hap-
pen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
concentration. attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
If a warning is output in the multifunction dis- sufficient distance to the side for other road
play, a service station search is performed in users and obstacles.
Z
218 Driving systems
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
Driving and parking
with, or altering the device will void any

warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the users authority to
Radar sensors
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are
integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure
that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft
slush. The sensors must not be covered, for (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to
example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
Following a severe impact or in the event of If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
damage to the bumpers, have the function of lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
cialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
longer work properly. the case if there are vehicles driving at the
inner edge of their lanes.
Monitoring area
Due to the nature of the system:
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
lane borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
extended period next to long vehicles, such
rain, snow or spray
as trucks.
Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
or bicycles
are integrated into the sides of the rear
Rthe road has very wide lanes bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of
Rthe road has narrow lanes dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane The sensors must not be covered, for exam-
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-
indicated. age to the bumpers, have the function of the
sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise
not work properly.
Driving systems 219
Warning display Switching on Blind Spot Assist

X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 246) is activated in the on-board
computer.
Driving and parking

tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red until the engine is started.
Display in the assistance graphic
: Warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre-
sponding side lights up red. This warning is
always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, radar waves propagating backwards appear
the warning only occurs if the difference in next to the vehicle in the assistance display in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). the multifunction display. Above a speed of
If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar
Assist is not operational. waves in the assistance display changes to
green ;. Blind Spot Assist is then ready for
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
use.
matically adapted to the brightness of the
surroundings.
Lane Keeping Assist
Collision warning
General notes
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the
corresponding turn signal, a double warning
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected
are indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in

front of your vehicle with camera :, which is
mounted at the top of the windshield. Active
Z
220 Driving systems
Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on The system may be impaired or may not func-
the road and can warn you before you leave tion if:
your lane unintentionally. Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
This function is available in the range between cient illumination of the road, or due to
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and snow, rain, fog or spray
Driving and parking
200 km/h). Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

A warning may be given if a front wheel the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by surface is wet)
means of intermittent vibration in the steer- Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
Important safety notes vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-
G WARNING
ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly struction work
recognize lane markings.
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rgive an unnecessary warning Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
Rnot give a warning small and the lane markings thus cannot be
There is a risk of an accident. detected
Always pay particular attention to the traffic Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
situation and stay in lane, in particular if lanes branch off, cross one another or
warned by Lane Keeping Assist. merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
G WARNING Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-
ing Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane

Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in X Press button ;.
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane
time and for staying in your lane. Keeping Assist On message appears in
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the the multifunction display. If all conditions
vehicle in the lane. have been satisfied, there may be a warn-
ing.
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
Driving systems 221
(Y page 243) are shown in green. Lane The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Keeping Assist is ready for use. Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
X To switch off: press button ;. bend.
Indicator lamp : goes out. Lane Keeping Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-
Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping way.
Driving and parking

Assist Off message appears in the mul- Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
tifunction display.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting Rthe road has narrow lanes.
X In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
computer, select the Lane Keeping
Assist function (Y page 246).
X Select Standard or Adaptive
Adaptive. Driving Assistance PLUS package
Standard General notes
When Standard is selected, no warning vibra- The Active Driving Assistance PLUS package
tion occurs if: consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185),
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 221) and
the warnings are suppressed for a certain Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 224).
period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as Active Blind Spot Assist
ABS, BAS or ESP.
General notes
Adaptive Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra- system, pointed toward the rear of the vehi-
tion occurs if: cle, to monitor the area to the sides of the
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A
the warnings are suppressed for a certain warning display in the exterior mirrors draws
period of time. your attention to vehicles detected in the
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-
responding turn signal to change lane, you
ABS, BAS or ESP.
will also receive an optical and audible warn-
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
ing. If a risk of lateral collision is detected,
Ryou brake hard. corrective braking may help you avoid a col-
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an lision. Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the
obstacle or change lanes quickly. free space in the direction of travel and to the
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. side before making a course-correcting brake
In order that you are warned only when nec- application. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist
essary and in good time if you cross the lane uses radar sensors which are pointed in the
marking, the system recognizes certain con- direction of travel.
ditions and warns you accordingly. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is
not a substitute for attentive driving.
Z
222 Driving systems
G WARNING rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following
a severe impact or in the event of damage to
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, the bumpers, have the function of the radar
placing them in the blind spot area sensors checked at a qualified specialist
Driving and parking
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may oth-
differential and overtake your vehicle erwise no longer work properly.
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
Monitoring area
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
uations. There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING
Always observe the traffic conditions care- Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. traffic situations and road users. There is a
i USA only: This device has been approved Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
The radar sensor is intended for use in an
automotive radar system only. Removal,
tampering, or altering of the device will void
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
i Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device. Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
Removal, tampering, or altering of the to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and
device will void any warranties, and is not directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use diagram.
in any non-approved way. The detection of obstacles can be impaired in
Any unauthorized modification to this the case of:
device could void the user's authority to Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
operate the equipment. covering the sensors
Radar sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are spray
integrated into the front and rear bumpers Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Make indicated.
sure that the bumpers and the cover in the
radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The
Driving systems 223
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar- The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy- matically adapted to the brightness of the
cles, or may only detect them too late. surroundings.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
Driving and parking

be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge
of your lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
lane borders.
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.
gray radar waves propagating backwards
trucks, for a prolonged time.
appear next to the vehicle in the assistance
Warning display display in the multifunction display. Above a
speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the
radar waves in the assistance display
changes to green ;. Active Blind Spot Assist
is then ready for use.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
If you switch on the turn signals to change
lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side
monitoring range, you receive a visual and
acoustic collision warning. You will then hear
a double warning tone and red warning
lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,
: Warning display
detected vehicles are indicated by the flash-
Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at ing of red warning lamp :. There are no fur-
speeds below approximately 20 mph ther warning tones.
(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range
are then not indicated. Course-correcting brake application
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre- course-correcting brake application is carried
sponding side lights up red. This warning is out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a
always emitted when a vehicle enters the collision.
blind spot monitoring range from behind or G WARNING
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
A course-correcting brake application cannot
the warning only occurs if the difference in
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
accident.
If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
Spot Assist is not operational.
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-
Z
224 Driving systems
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
sides. X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 246).
Driving and parking
tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds.
Gray radar waves propagating backwards
appear next to the vehicle in the assistance
display in the multifunction display.
Active Lane Keeping Assist

If a course-correcting brake application
General notes
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
exterior mirror and a dual warning tone
sounds. In addition, display ; underlining
the danger of a side collision appears in the
multifunction display.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. A course-
correcting brake application may be interrup-
ted at any time if you steer slightly in the
opposite direction or accelerate.
The course-correcting brake application is
available in the speed range between 20 mph
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
in front of your vehicle by means of camera
Either no braking application, or a course- system : at the top of the windshield. Vari-
correcting brake application adapted to the ous different areas to the front, rear and side
driving situation occurs if: of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid
Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keep-
barriers, located on both sides of your vehi- ing Assist detects lane markings on the road
cle. and can warn you before you leave your lane
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the unintentionally. If you do not react to the
side. warning, a lane-correcting application of the
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
brakes can bring the vehicle back into the
original lane.
high cornering speeds.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
If you select km in the Display Unit
Speed-/Odometer: function on the on-board
computer (Y page 248), Active Lane Keeping
ESP or PRE-SAFE Brake. Assist is activated starting at a speed of
RESP is switched off. 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected,
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is the assistance range begins at 40 mph.
detected.
Driving systems 225
Important safety notes Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the struction work
risk of accident nor override the laws of phys- Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
ics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Driving and parking

account of road and weather conditions. It Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
may not recognize traffic situations. Active small and the lane markings thus cannot be
Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are detected
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good lanes branch off, cross one another or
time and for staying in your lane. merge
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu- Rthe road is narrow and winding
ously keep your vehicle in its lane.
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road
G WARNING If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always and there are broken lane markings detected,
clearly detect lane markings. no lane-correcting brake application is made.
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
can:
A warning may be given if a front wheel
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by
make a course-correcting brake application means of intermittent vibration in the steer-
to the vehicle ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Rnot give a warning or intervene
Lane-correcting brake application
If you leave your lane, under certain circum-
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
stances the vehicle will brake briefly on one
situation and keep within the lane, especially
side. This is meant to assist you in bringing
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-
the vehicle back to the original lane.
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-
ing situation. G WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
The system may be impaired or may not func-
always bring the vehicle back into the original
tion if:
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
cient illumination of the road, or due to especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
snow, rain, fog or spray you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, cation.
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bump-
ers or the radiator grill are dirty, e.g.
obscured by snow
Z
226 Driving systems
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration.
RESP is switched off.
Rthe transmission is not in position D.
Driving and parking
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has

been detected and displayed.
Ran obstacle in the lane in which you are
driving has been detected.
Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, other road users or traffic situations. An inap-
display : appears in the multifunction dis- propriate brake application may be interrup-
play. The brake application also slightly ted at any time if you:
reduces vehicle speed. Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction
This function is available in the range between Rswitch on the turn signal
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
Rclearly brake or accelerate
200 km/h).
A lane-correcting brake application can be A lane-correcting brake application is inter-
made after driving over a lane marking rec- rupted automatically if:
ognize as being solid or broken. Before this, a Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
warning must be given by means of intermit- ESP, PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind
tent vibration in the steering wheel. In addi- Spot Assist.
tion, a lane with lane markings on both sides Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.
must be recognized.
In the case of a broken lane marking being Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been detec-
ted in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles,
overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent
lanes can be detected.
i A further lane-correcting brake applica-
tion can only occur after your vehicle has
returned to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs
if:
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or X Press button ;.
accelerate. Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Keeping Assist On message appears in
the multifunction display. If all conditions
Ryou have switched on the turn signal.
have been satisfied, a warning or steering
intervention may be made.
ESP, PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
Spot Assist. (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
Driving systems 227
(Y page 243) are shown in green. Active The warning vibration occurs later if:
Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. Rthe road has narrow lanes.
X To switch off: press button ;.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Indicator lamp : goes out. The Active
Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The
Driving and parking

Lane Keeping Assist Off message
appears in the multifunction display.
Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting

X In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board
computer, select the Active Lane Keep
ing Assist function (Y page 246).
X Select Standard or Adaptive
Adaptive.
When Standard is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such
as ABS, BAS or ESP.
When Adaptive is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
ABS, BAS or ESP.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when nec-

essary and in good time if you cross the lane
marking, the system recognizes certain con-
ditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-
way.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
Z
228
229
On-board computer and displays

Displays and operation .................... 230
Menus and submenus ...................... 235
Display messages ............................. 250
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 284
230 Displays and operation
Useful information times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-

ating safely may cause an accident.

i This Operator's Manual describes all If the operating safety of your vehicle is
models and all standard and optional equip- impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as
ment of your vehicle available at the time of possible. Contact a qualified specialist work-
publication of the Operator's Manual. shop.
Country-specific differences are possible. For an overview, see the instrument panel
Please note that your vehicle may not be illustration (Y page 33).
also applies to safety-related systems and
functions. Displays and operation
i Read the information on qualified special- Instrument cluster lighting
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
situation permits. If you are not sure that this displays and the controls in the vehicle inte-
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention rior can be adjusted using brightness control
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- knob :.
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
X Turn brightness control knob : up or
You must observe the legal requirements for down.

the country in which you are currently driving If the light switch (Y page 126) is set to
when operating the on-board computer. , T or L, the brightness is
dependent upon the brightness of the
G WARNING ambient light.
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
functioned, you may not recognize function i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The automatically controls the brightness of
operating safety of your vehicle may be the multifunction display.
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. In daylight, the displays in the instrument
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked cluster are illuminated. A dimming function
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- is not possible in daylight.
ately.
The on-board computer only shows messages

or warnings from certain systems in the mul-
tifunction display. You should therefore make
sure your vehicle is operating safely at all
Displays and operation 231
Speedometer with segments or other service products. There is a risk of

injury.
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available. Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
RCruise control activated (Y page 183): engine compartment, keep the hood closed
The segments light up from the stored and contact the fire department.
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 185): ! A display message is shown if the coolant
One or two segments in the set speed temperature is too high.
range light up. If the coolant temperature is over 248
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: (120 ), do not continue driving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
The segments between the speed of the
vehicle in front and the stored speed light The analog coolant temperature gauge is in
up. the instrument cluster on the right-hand side
(Y page 33).
In the on-board computer in the Service
Tachometer menu there is a digital coolant temperature
gauge (Y page 244).
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine. Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant tem-
The red band in the tachometer indicates the perature may rise to 248 (120 ).
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached. Operating the on-board computer
Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freez-
ing point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature
display indicates the temperature measured
and does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the mul-
tifunction display (Y page 233).
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay.
Coolant temperature display

: Multifunction display
G WARNING ; Right control panel
Opening the hood when the engine is over- = Left control panel
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
Z
X To activate the on-board computer: turn % Press briefly:

the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition

RBack
lock.
RIn the Radio
Radio/Media
Media menu: dese-
You can control the multifunction display and
lects the track or station list or
the settings in the on-board computer using
list of available radio sources/
the buttons on the multifunction steering
media
wheel.
RHides display messages
Left control panel
RExits the telephone book/redial
RCalls up the main menu memory
9 Press briefly: % Press and hold:
: RScrolls in lists RCalls up the standard display in
RSelects a menu or function the Trip menu
RIn the Radio
Radio/Media
Media menu:
opens the track or station list Right control panel
and selects an audio track or
video scene ~ RRejects or ends a call
RExits phone book/redial mem-
RIn the Telephone menu:
ory
switches to the phone book and
selects a name or a telephone 6 RMakes or accepts a call
number RSwitches to the redial memory
9 Press and hold: W RAdjusts the volume
: RRapid scrolling in all lists X
RIn the Radio
Radio/Media
Media menu: 8 RMute
selects a station, audio track or
video scene using rapid scrolling Switches on the Voice Control Sys-
RIn the Telephone menu: starts tem; see the separate operating
rapid scrolling if the phone book instructions
is open
a RIn all menus: confirms the selec-
ted entry in the list
RIn the Radio
Radio/Media
Media menu:
opens the list of available radio
sources/media
RIn the Telephone menu:
switches to the phone book and
starts dialing the selected num-
ber
Switches off the Voice Control Sys-
tem; see the separate operating
instructions
Displays and operation 233
Multifunction display ECO start/stop function

(Y page 161)
HOLD function (Y page 196)
a DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist
and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 194)
Head-up display
General notes
The head-up display projects information
from the navigation system and the driver
assistance system above the dashboard into
the driver's field of vision.
A requirement for the display of the contents
is that the following functions are available in
the vehicle and are switched on:
Multifunction display
RNavigation
: Drive program (Y page 166)
RDISTRONIC PLUS
; Transmission position (Y page 166)
RCruise control
= Display panel for display messages,
menus and menu lists The head-up display allows the driver to see
? Time all of the information without having to take
A Outside temperature (Y page 231)
his eyes off the road.
B Additional speedometer (Y page 248)
The unit displayed in additional speedometer
B in the multifunction display is inverse to The head-up display is only an aid and is not a
the speedometer unit in the instrument clus- substitute for attentive driving.
ter. The visibility of the head-up display is influ-
X To call up the menu list in display panel
enced by the following conditions:
=: press the button on the steering Rthe driver's seat position
wheel. Rthe positioning of the display image
Display panel = shows the selected menu Rthe general ambient light
or submenu and display messages. Rsunglasses with polarization filters
The following messages may appear in the Rwet roads
multifunction display: Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the dis-
Z Gearshift recommendation, when play cover
shifting manually (automatic trans- In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of
mission) (Y page 169) the display may fade. This can be reversed by
XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 202) switching the head-up display off and on
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 183) again.
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist i Vehicles with the head-up display are
(Y page 127) equipped with a special windshield. Should
Z
repairs be necessary, have the windshield

replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Displays and operation

Switching the head-up display on or off
X Press button :.
When the head-up display is switched on,
the display appears in the driver's field of
vision.
Menus and submenus 235
Head-up display

Content and information for the following systems are shown in the head-up display:
: Navigation messages
; Current speed
= Set DISTRONIC PLUS speed (Y page 185)
The selected cruise control speed (Y page 183)
In the Settings menu, in the submenu head-up display, you have the following settings options:
RSwitching other displays on/off (Y page 246)
RSetting the position (Y page 247)
RSetting the brightness (Y page 247)
Menus and submenus RAssistance Graphic menu

(Y page 243)
Menu overview RService menu (Y page 244)
Press the button on the steering wheel RSettings menu (Y page 244)
to call up the list of menus and select a menu.
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 231).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
RTrip menu (Y page 236)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 238)
RRadio menu (Y page 240)
RMedia menu (Y page 240)
RTelephone menu (Y page 242)
Z
236 Menus and submenus
Trip menu refueled C instead of approximate

range :.
Standard display Recuperation display = shows you if energy
is being recuperated from the kinetic energy
in overrun mode and saved in the battery.
Recuperation display = depends on the
engine installed and is therefore not available
in all vehicles.
ECO display
X Press and hold the % button on the

steering wheel until the Trip menu with
trip odometer : and odometer ; is
shown.
Displaying the range and current fuel

consumption
X Use on the steering wheel to call up
the list of menus.
X Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
X Use the : or 9 button to select ECO
DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
X Use on the steering wheel to call up matically reset.
the list of menus. For further information on the ECO display,
see (Y page 179).
wheel.
X Press the : or 9 button to select
approximate range : and current fuel con-
sumption ;.
Approximate range : that can be covered is
calculated according to your current driving
style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If
there is only a small amount of fuel left in the
fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being
Trip computer "From Start" or "From Digital speedometer

Reset"

: Distance the list of menus.
; Duration X Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
= Average speed ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
? Average fuel consumption X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
X Use on the steering wheel to call up wheel.
the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the : or 9 button on the steer- digital speedometer.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering Resetting values
wheel.
From Start or From Reset.
Reset
The values in the From Start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey whilst
the values in the From Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 237).
The From Start trip computer is automati-
cally reset if:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
the list of menus.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
The From Reset trip computer is automati- X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or wheel.
99,999 miles.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X Press the a button.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
Z
You can reset the values of the following func- Route guidance active
tions:
No change of direction announced
RTrip odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
When you reset the values in the "ECO dis-
play", the values in the trip computer "From
Start" are likewise reset. When you reset the
values in the trip computer "From Start", the
values in the "ECO display" are likewise reset.
Navigation system menu : Distance to the next destination

; Estimated arrival time
Displaying navigation instructions
= Distance to the next change of direction
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display ? Current road
shows navigation instructions.
Change of direction announced with a
Further information on navigation can be
lane recommendation
found in the separate Audio 20 or COMAND
operating instructions.
X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see the
separate operating instructions.
the list of menus.
ing wheel to select the Navi menu.
wheel.
: Road into which the change of direction

Route guidance not active
leads
; Distance to the change of direction
= Change-of-direction symbol
? Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction (white)
A Possible lane (light gray)
B Lane not recommended (dark gray)
On multilane roads, new lane recommenda-
tions can be displayed for the next change of
direction if the digital map supports this data.
During the change of direction, new lanes
: Direction of travel may be added.
; Current road
Lane not recommended B: you will not be Change of direction with lane recommen-

able to complete the next change of direction dation
if you stay in this lane.
Possible lane A: you will be able to complete
the next change of direction in this lane only.
Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will
be able to complete the next change of direc-
tion and the one after that.
Change of direction without lane recom-
mendation

leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
? Lane recommendation
Other status indicators of the naviga-

tion system
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
When a change of direction is to be made, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance indi-
cator shortens towards the top of the display
as you approach the point of the announced
change of direction. The change of direction
starts once the distance display reaches zero. : Additional information
Other possible additional information:
RNew Route... or Calculating Route...
A new route is calculated.
ROff Mapped Road
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
digital map but the road is not recognized,
e.g. non-paved roads (off-road).
RNo Route
No route could be calculated to the selec-
ted destination.
RO
Z
You have reached the destination or an X Use : or 9 to select the waveband

intermediate destination. or station memory.

X Press a to confirm the selection.
Radio menu i You can store your stations in Audio 20 or

COMAND, see the separate operating
instructions.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
Further information on navigation can be
found in the "Satellite radio" section in the
separate Audio 20 or COMAND operating
instructions.
Media menu
: Waveband
; Station frequency with memory position Changing the media source
= Name of artist
? Name of track
Station ; is displayed with the station fre-
quency or station name. The memory position
is only displayed along with station ; if this
has been stored.
the list of menus.
X Press the : or 9 button on the steer- You can change the media source and play-
ing wheel to select the Radio menu. back mode (audio, video or TV) at any time in
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering the Media menu.
wheel. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see the
Currently selected station ; appears in separate operating instructions.
the multifunction display. X Use on the steering wheel to call up
X To open the station list: press : or the list of menus.
9 briefly. X Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
X To select a station from the station list: ing wheel to select the Media menu.
press : or 9 briefly. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
X To select a station from the station list wheel.
using rapid scrolling: press and briefly X To open/close the media sources list:
hold the : or 9 button. press a briefly.
X To select a waveband or station mem- The list shows the following media sources,
ory: press a briefly. for example:
RDisc (CD/DVD)
RMemory card (SD/SDHC)
RMEDIA REGISTER X To open the track list: press : or 9

RUSB storage device briefly.
RBluetooth audio device X To select next/previous track from the
track list: briefly press : or 9.
Observe the additional information on media
X To select a track from the track list
support and on media mode in the separate
Audio 20 or COMAND operating instructions. using rapid scrolling: press and
hold : or 9 until the desired track is
Operating an audio player or audio reached.
media If you press and hold the : or 9
button, the rapid scrolling speed is
increased. Not all audio drives or data car-
riers support this function.
If the corresponding track information is
stored on the audio drive or audio media, the
multifunction display may display the follow-
ing:
Rtrack number
Rtrack name
Rartist
: Media source, e.g. name of USB memory Ralbum
stick The track information does not appear in

; Current title audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode:
= Name of artist external audio source connected).
? Name of album
Video DVD operation
A Folder name
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the equip-
ment installed in the vehicle.
the list of menus.
ing wheel to select the Media menu.
wheel. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see the
X To select audio player or data carrier:
press a briefly, to open the list of media X Use on the steering wheel to call up
sources. the list of menus.

X Use : or 9 to select the correspond- X Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
ing audio player or audio media. ing wheel to select the Media menu.
X Press a to confirm. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
wheel.
Z
X To select DVD single drive or data car- X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
rier: press a briefly, to open the list of to select the Telephone menu.
media sources. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
X Use : or 9 to select the correspond- wheel.
ing DVD player or DVD media. You will see one of the following display mes-
X Press a to confirm. sages in the multifunction display:
X To open the scene list: press : or RPhone READY or the name of the network
9 briefly. provider: the mobile phone has found a
X To select the next or previous scene network and is ready to receive.
from the scene list: briefly press : or RPhone No Service:
Service there is no network
9. available or the mobile phone is searching
X To select a scene from the scene list for a network.
using rapid scrolling: press and
hold : or 9 until desired scene : is Accepting a call
reached.
X Press a to confirm your selection.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control X Press the 6 button on the steering
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. wheel to accept an incoming call.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic If someone calls you when you are in the
situation permits. If you are not sure that this Telephone menu, a display message appears
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention in the multifunction display.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can
ment when the vehicle is stationary. still accept a call.
When telephoning, you must observe the Rejecting or ending a call
legal requirements for the country in which
you are currently driving. X Press the ~ button on the steering
X Switch on the mobile phone; see the sepa-
wheel.
rate operating instructions. If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can
X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see the still reject or end a call.
X Establish a Bluetooth connection to Audio
20 or COMAND, see the separate operating
instructions.
the list of menus.
Dialing a number from the phone book X Press the 6 button to switch to the

redial memory.
the list of menus.
desired name or number.
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
to select the Telephone menu.
ing.
wheel. or
X To exit the redial memory: press the
X Press the :, 9 or a button to
switch to the phone book. ~ or % button.
desired name.
Assistance graphic menu
or
X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
the : or 9 button for longer than
one second.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a X Use on the steering wheel to call up
button to display the numbers. the list of menus.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
number you want to dial. ing wheel to select the Assistance
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial- Graphic menu.
ing. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
or wheel.
X To exit the phone book: press the ~ or The multifunction display shows the
% button. DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the
assistance graphic.
X Press : to display the ATTEN-
Redialing
TION ASSIST assessment.
The on-board computer saves the last names
The assistance graphic displays the status of
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
and information from the following driving
X Use on the steering wheel to call up systems or driving safety systems:
the list of menus. RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191)
X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel RDistance warning and the autonomous
to select the Telephone menu. braking function COLLISION PREVENTION
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering ASSIST PLUS (Y page 245)
wheel. RPRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 74)
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 217) or Active
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 221)
Z
RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 216) X Use : or 9 to select the Coolant

RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 219) or Active submenu.

Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 224) X Press a to confirm your selection.
The coolant temperature is shown in a bar
display.
Maintenance menu
Introduction
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Service menu, you have the following

options:
RCalling up display messages in message In the Settings menu, you have the following
memory (Y page 250) options:
RChecking the tire pressure electronically RChanging assistance settings
(Y page 367) (Y page 244)
RCalling up the service due date RChanging head-up display settings
(Y page 329) (Y page 246)
RDisplaying the coolant temperature RChanging the light settings (Y page 247)
(Y page 244) RChanging the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 248)
Displaying the coolant temperature RRestoring the factory settings
The coolant temperature is also shown in the (Y page 249)

instrument cluster in the tachometer.
Observe the notes on coolant temperature Assistance submenu
(Y page 231).
Deactivating/activating ESP
the list of menus. Observe the "Important safety notes" section
in the description of ESP (Y page 72).
ing wheel to select the Service menu. G WARNING
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta-
wheel. bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP in the fol- X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs

lowing situations: sist submenu.
Rwhen using snow chains X Press a to confirm.
Rin deep snow X Use 9 or : to select Collision
Ron sand or gravel

Prevention.
Prevention
X Press a to confirm.
For further information about ESP, see
The current selection is displayed.
(Y page 71).
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
X Start the engine.
button again.
X Use on the steering wheel to call up When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
the list of menus. PLUS is deactivated, the symbol
X Press the : or 9 button on the steer- appears in the multifunction display in the
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Assistance Graphic menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering For further information about COLLISION
wheel. PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 69).
X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs
sist submenu. Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE
Brake
X Press the : or 9 button to select PRESAFE Brake is only available in vehicles
ESP.
ESP with DISTRONIC PLUS.
X Press a to confirm. X Use on the steering wheel to call up
The current selection is displayed. the list of menus.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a X Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
button again. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
If the warning lamp in the instrument X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
cluster lights up when the vehicle is ready wheel.
to drive, ESP is deactivated. X Use : or 9 to select the Drive
If the and warning lamps light up Assist submenu.

continuously, ESP is not available due to a X Press a to confirm.
malfunction. X Press the : or 9 button to select
Observe the information on warning lamps PRE-SAFE Brake.
Brake
(Y page 288). X Press a to confirm.
Observe the information on display messages The current selection is displayed.
(Y page 251). X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-
VENTION ASSIST PLUS When PRE-SAFE Brake is deactivated, the
symbol appears in the Assistance
Graphic menu in the multifunction dis-
the list of menus. play.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. For more information on PRESAFE Brake,
see (Y page 74).
wheel.
Z
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off,
X Use on the steering wheel to call up Standard or Sensitive

Sensitive.
the list of menus. X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
X Press the : or 9 button on the steer- tion.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering the symbol appears in the Assis
wheel. tance Info Display menu in the multi-
function display when the ignition is on.
X Use : or 9 to select the Drive
Assist submenu. For further information about ATTENTION
X Press a to confirm. ASSIST, see (Y page 216).
X Press the : or 9 button to select Setting Lane Keeping Assist
Blind Spot Assist.
Assist X Use on the steering wheel to call up
X Press a to confirm. the list of menus.
The current selection is displayed. X Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
X To activate/deactivate: press the a ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
button again. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
When Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot wheel.
Assist is activated, gray radar waves prop- X Use : or 9 to select the Drive
agating backwards appear next to the vehi- Assist submenu.
cle in the Assistance Graphic menu in
the multifunction display.
X Press : or 9 to select Lane Keep
For further information about Blind Spot
ing Assist.
Assist
Assist, see (Y page 217).
For further information about Active Blind
The current selection Standard or Adap
Spot Assist, see (Y page 221).
tive is displayed.
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST X To change the setting: press a again.
X Use on the steering wheel to call up For further information about Lane Keeping
the list of menus. Assist, see (Y page 219).
X Press the : or 9 button on the steer- For further information about Active Lane
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Keeping Assist, see (Y page 224).
wheel. Head-up display submenu
X Use : or 9 to select the Drive
Assist submenu. Switching other displays on/off
X Press a to confirm. This function is only available if the vehicle is
equipped with Navigation and/or Traffic Sign
Assist.
Attention Assist.
Assist
In the on-board computer, you can select
which contents are shown on the windshield
when the head-up display is activated
(Y page 233).
X Use on the steering wheel to call up Using the Memory function, you can save and

the list of menus. call up the position of the Head-up display as
X Press the : or 9 button on the steer- a single memory preset (Y page 120).
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Setting the brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the displayed
wheel.
contents on the windshield.
X Switch on the Head-up display
Head-up Display submenu.
(Y page 234).
X Press the : or 9 buttons to select
the list of menus.
Display Content.
Content
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Switching the navigation messages dis- X Confirm by pressing a on the steering
play on/off wheel.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Use the : or 9 button to select the
When you switch on the Navigation Mes Head-up Display submenu.
sages display, navigation messages are X Press a to confirm.
shown on the windshield when the head-up X Press the : or 9 button to select the
display is activated. Brightness function.
For more information on navigation, see the X Press the a button to save the setting.
separate operating instructions. X Press the : or 9 button to set the
Setting the position brightness from Level +5 (bright) to

Level -5 (dark).
You can adjust the position of the displayed
X Press the a or % button to save the
contents on the windshield.
setting.
X Switch on the Head-up display
(Y page 234).
Light submenu
the list of menus. Switching the daytime running lamps on/
X Press the : or 9 button on the steer- off
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. This function is not available in Canada.
wheel. the list of menus.
X Use the : or 9 button to select the
Head-up Display submenu. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Use the : or 9 button to select the wheel.
Position function. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting. Light submenu.
X Use the : or 9 button to set the X Press a to confirm.
position from Level +5 to Level -5. -5
X Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Z
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Selecting the permanent display function
Daytime Running Lights function. Using the Permanent Display: function you
If the Daytime Running Lights function can enable outside temperature and addi-
has been switched on, the cone of light and tional speedometer displays in the status
the W symbol in the multifunction dis- area of the multifunction display.
play are shown in white. X Use on the steering wheel to call up
X Press the a button to save the setting. the list of menus.
Further information on daytime running X Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
lamps (Y page 124). ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Instrument cluster submenu wheel.
Selecting the unit of measurement for dis-
tance Instrument Cluster submenu.
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function allows you to choose whether cer- X Press : or 9 to select the Perma
tain displays appear in kilometers or miles in nent Display function.

the multifunction display. X Press a to confirm.
X Use on the steering wheel to call up The current selection Outside Tempera
the list of menus. ture or Speedometer is displayed.
X Press the : or 9 button on the steer- X To change the setting: press a again.

Switching the additional speedometer
on/off
wheel.
Use the Additional Speedometer function
to choose whether the status area in the mul-
Instrument Cluster submenu. tifunction display shows the speed digitally.
X Press a to confirm. The unit in the additional speedometer is
X Press the : or 9 button to select the always inverse to the speedometer unit.
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func- X Use on the steering wheel to call up
tion. the list of menus.
You will see the selected setting: km or X Press the : or 9 button on the steer-
miles.
miles
X Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for dis- wheel.
tance applies to: X Press the : or 9 button to select the
RDigitalspeedometer in the Trip menu Instrument Cluster submenu.
ROdometer and the trip odometer X Press a to confirm.
RTrip computer X Use : or 9 to select the Addi
RCurrent consumption and the range tional Speedometer function.
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu
The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
RCruise control
button again.
RDISTRONIC PLUS
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
Restoring the factory settings

the list of menus.
wheel.
Factory Settings submenu.
The Reset All Settings? message
appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to select No
or Yes
Yes.
X Press a to confirm the selection.
If you have selected Yes
Yes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lights function in the Lights submenu is
only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
Z
250 Display messages
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.
You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message
memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 196)
RParking (Y page 174)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-
play messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-
sages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call
up the display messages:
X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.
X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel.
X Press : or 9 to select the message memory.
If there are no display messages, you will see No Messages in the multifunction display.
If there are display messages, the number of messages stored is shown.
X Press the : or 9 button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages 251
Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
! ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), ESP (Electronic Stability Program),

BAS (Brake Assist), PRESAFE, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist,
Currently Unavail hill start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
able See Opera Active Blind Spot Assist are temporarily unavailable.
tor's Manual
BAS PLUS, PRESAFE Brake, PRESAFE PLUS and COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.
In addition, the , and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
! ABS, ESP, BAS, PRESAFE, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist,

hill start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Inoperative See Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Operator's Manual
The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
G WARNING
Z


increase.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
ESP, BAS, PRESAFE, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist, hill

start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Inoperative See Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Operator's Manual
In addition, the and warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.

ESP, BAS, PRESAFE, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist, hill
start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and
Currently Unavail Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
able See Opera
tor's Manual BAS PLUS, PRESAFE Brake, PRESAFE PLUS and COLLISION
In addition, the and warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
Z

T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP, BAS,

PRESAFE, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist, hill start assist,
STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind
Inoperative See Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Operator's Manual BAS PLUS, PRESAFE Brake, PRESAFE PLUS and COLLISION
In addition, the , and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
increase.
F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic
only)!(Canada release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 176).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release X Release the electric parking brake manually.
Parking Brake
The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds.
You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking
brake (Y page 176).
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only)!(Canada To apply:
only)
X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See
Operator's Manual X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
X Shift the transmission to P.

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only)/!
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 176).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
To release:
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 382).
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA

only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then goes out or remains lit.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or

release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only)/!
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to
apply the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to P as the electric parking brake is not
being applied automatically.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:


F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
only)!(Canada seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
only) released. It then goes out or remains lit.
Parking Brake Inop The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
erative voltage or undervoltage.
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking

brake:
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA

only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-
only) tion was switched off.
Turn On the Igni X Switch on the ignition.
tion to Release
the Parking Brake
Z

$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning
only)J(Canada lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
only) sounds.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

USA only: the red $ brake system warning lamp also lights up
Check Brake Pad while the engine is running.
Wear
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-

tioning.
Inoperative
X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified
Collision Preven COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not opera-

tion Assist Plus tional. Possible causes are:
Currently Unavail Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
able See Opera electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tor's Manual tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
sage disappears.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Restart the engine.

Collision Preven COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative
tion Assist Plus due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE Inopera Important functions of PRE-SAFE have failed. All other occupant
tive See Opera safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
tor's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Functions PRESAFE PLUS or PRESAFE Brake is temporarily inoperative.

Currently Limited Possible causes are:
See Operator's Man R
function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
ual
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
sage disappears.
PRESAFE PLUS and PRESAFE Brake are operational again.
PRE-SAFE Functions PRESAFE PLUS or PRESAFE Brake is unavailable due to a mal-

Limited See Opera function. BAS PLUS may also have failed.
tor's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

Radar Sensors At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys-
Dirty See Opera tems is temporarily restricted or inoperative:
tor's Manual RPRE-SAFE PLUS
RPRE-SAFE Brake
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RActive Blind Spot Assist
RDISTRONIC PLUS
Possible causes are:
Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty.
Rthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety system
is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
A warning tone also sounds.
sage disappears. All driving systems/driving safety systems are
operative again.
X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 334):
Rin the radiator trim
Rin the front bumper
Rin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear
bumper
The display message disappears.
6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights

up in the instrument cluster.
SRS Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
For further information about the restraint system, see

(Y page 42).

6 The front left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunc-
tioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
Front Left Malfunc cluster.
tion Service
Required or Front G WARNING
Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
6 The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunc-

tioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
Rear Left Malfunc cluster.
tion Service
Required or Rear G WARNING
Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
6 The rear center restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Rear Center Mal
function Service G WARNING
Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-

tain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
Left Side Curtain cluster.
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
or Right Side Cur The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
tain Airbag Mal unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-
function Service gered.
Required There is an increased risk of injury.
Z

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even
Airbag Disabled though:
See Operator's Man Ran adult
ual
or
Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-
passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-
pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON
indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-
imately six seconds.
Rafter this, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must
be lit and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has dis-
abled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 52).
Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag
Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON
indicator lamps remain lit or go out depends on how OCS classifies
the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System,

see (Y page 52).
Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
Airbag Enabled See though:
Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-
tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional
weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The air bag may deploy unintentionally.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON
indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-
imately six seconds.
Rafter this, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must
be lit and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant
Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air
bag (Y page 52).
Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag
Z

Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON
indicator lamps remain lit or go out depends on how OCS classifies
the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,

see (Y page 52).
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

Check Left Corner
ing Light or Check
Right Cornering
Light
b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Low
(Y page 130).
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Rear Left
(Y page 130).
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.
Check Front Left
(Y page 130).
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

defective.
Check Left Mirror
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal
b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Brake
Lamp or Check
Right Brake Lamp
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

Check Center Brake
Lamp
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail
and Brake Lamps
b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
Lamp or Check
Right Tail Lamp
b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

Check Left High
(Y page 130).
Beam or Check
Right High Beam or
b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.

License Plate Lamp
Z

b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right
Parking Lamp
b The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.

Backup Light
(Y page 130).
or
b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.

Check Rear Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

Check Left Daytime
Running Light or
Check Right Day
time Running Light
b The active light function is defective.

Active Headlamps
Inoperative
b The exterior lighting is defective.

Malfunction See
Operators Manual
b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative

b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights
X Turn the light switch to .
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-

Assist Currently ative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, display

message Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available is dis-
played.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Level See Opera cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
tor's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 327).
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
? The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 (120 ), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Z

? The coolant is too hot.

Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 (120 ). Other-
wise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 (120 ).
# The battery is not being charged.

See Operator's Man
ual Possible causes are:
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

# The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level
is too low.
Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.
Operator's Manual
X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual
display message.
# The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
Start Engine See
the rear window defroster and interior lighting.
Operator's Manual
X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long dis-
tance.
The battery is being charged.
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
At Next Refueling
(Y page 325).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 326).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Z

4 Display message only for AMG vehicles:

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
Check Engine Oil
Level (Add 1 quart) X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
(Y page 325).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
4 The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.
Engine Oil Level
Low Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine Off
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 325).
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Gas Cap Loose
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
Driving systems

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
ATTENTION ASSIST: also sounds.
Take a Break!
X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Vehicle Rising
The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn-
ing tone also sounds.
Vehicle Rising
X Do not pull away.
Please Wait
The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
Stop Vehicle Vehi period.
cle Too Low
X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.

X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front
fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement
is too large.
X Listen for scraping sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the
vehicle.
Z

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling char-

acteristics may be affected.
Malfunction
X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
Assist Currently and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Operator's Manual
or Active Lane
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Keeping Assist Cur
rently Unavailable Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
See Operator's Man When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-
ual sage disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
Assist Inopera X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tive or Active
Lane Keeping
Assist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-
Currently Unavail erative. Possible causes are:
able See Opera Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
tor's Manual or
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
Active Blind Spot
range.
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
sage disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
Inoperative or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot
Assist Inoperative
Park Assist Can The driver's door is open.

celed X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with
the driver's door closed.
You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-

vention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-
function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 202).
Park Assist Inoper PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.

ative X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with
PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 202).
Z

Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.

X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.
If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (the j symbol

is not shown in the multifunction display):
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 196).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 196).
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 185).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-
Available rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 185).

DISTRONIC PLUS Cur DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.
rently Unavailable DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are also tem-
See Operator's Man porarily inoperative.
ual Possible causes are:
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
sage disappears.
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.

Inoperative The following may have also failed:
RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist
RPRE-SAFE Brake
RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
DISTRONIC PLUS Sus You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
pended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 185).
Z

DTR+: Steering DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are tempo-
Assist. Currently rarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Operator's Manual
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
sage disappears.
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative
again.
DTR+: Steering DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are malfunc-
Assist. Inopera tioning.
tive However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.
Cruise Control Cruise control is defective.

Inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 183).
Tires

Check Tire Pres Canada only:
sure Soon The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal-
led new wheels and tires.
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires is not correct.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 341).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres-
sure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 369).
Check Tire Pres Canada only:

sure Then Restart The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-
Run Flat Indicator sage and has not been restarted since.
X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 369).
Run Flat Indicator Canada only:

Inoperative The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Z

Please Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 365).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 367).
Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 365).

Warning Tire Mal The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
function wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
Tire Press. Moni Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
tor Currently from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
Unavailable malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.
Tire Press. Sen There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
sor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Mon The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
itor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
No Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Moni The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

tor Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Vehicle

Shift to 'P' or You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
'N' to Start Engine position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being
Malfunction charged.
Apply Brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
Shift from 'P' position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
Transmission Not The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or
in P Risk of Vehi D.
cle Rolling Away A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer
If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving.

when Vehicle is X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Stationary attention to road and traffic conditions.
N The trunk lid is open.

X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
_ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or

right-hand side.
Rear Left Backrest
X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Not Latched or
Rear Right Back
rest Not Latched
_ The center rear seat backrest is not engaged.

X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Rear Center Back
rest Not Engaged
The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering Mal
function See Oper G WARNING
ator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Z

The electric steering lock is malfunctioning.
Steering Malfunc G WARNING

tion See Opera The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.
tor's Manual There is a risk of an accident.
X Do not drive on and consult the nearest qualified specialist
workshop.
_ The electric steering lock was unable to unlock the steering.

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
Before Starting
X To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly.
the Engine, Turn
Steering Wheel X Insert the key into the ignition lock again.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid
X Add washer fluid (Y page 327).
SmartKey
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key from
Ignition
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key

The SmartKey batteries are discharged.
X Change the batteries (Y page 84).
Replace Key Battery
The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the
driver's door with the engine switched off.
Don't Forget Your This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds
Key and is simply a reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
The SmartKey is currently undetected.

X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
Key Not Detected
(white display mes- If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
sage) X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected
(red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Locate the SmartKey.
X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-
sage.
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,

the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
The SmartKey is continually undetected.

The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or
Remove 'Start' But is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
ton and Insert Key
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
Z
284 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety
Seat belts
Warning/ N Signal type

indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for
6 seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten
their seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46).
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addi-
tion, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The warning tone ceases.
N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as
the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a
secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is
being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a
secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 285
Safety systems

lamp
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp
is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics
may be affected.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-
ces.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp
is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-
ces.
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction.
$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is
running. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the
# symbol.
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
Z


lamp
! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore
BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP
(Electronic Stability Program), Crosswind Assist, PRESAFE, PRESAFE
PLUS, PRESAFE Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, STEER CONTROL,
Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions
listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The
braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems,
such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be
available.

lamp
! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS,
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP, Crosswind Assist, PRESAFE,
PRESAFE PLUS, PRESAFE Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, STEER
CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also
unavailable.
G WARNING
listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard,
for example.
Z


lamp
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp, the
yellow ESP and ESP OFF warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are
! lit while the engine is running.
ABS and ESP are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore BAS, BAS
PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, PRESAFE, PRESAFE
PLUS, PRESAFE Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist,
STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are
also unavailable.
G WARNING
listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard,
for example.
N The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or
at least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP.
In rare cases (Y page 72), it may be best to deactivate ESP.

Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 72).

lamp
N The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRESAFE,
PRESAFE PLUS, PRESAFE Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, Cross-
wind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind
Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
G WARNING
listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
N The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the
ECO start/stop function is activated.
ESP is deactivated.
G WARNING
If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
X Reactivate ESP.
In rare cases (Y page 72), it may be best to deactivate ESP.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 72).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP cannot be activated:

X Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z


lamp
F! N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake is lit.
6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is faulty.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unin-
tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop imme-
diately.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42).
Engine

lamp
; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emer-
gency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal
requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal
regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly
or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the bar display.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any
circumstances.
Z


lamp
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked
or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine
has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 327).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant
system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by
snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248
(120 ). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous
terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 (120 ). The airflow to the
engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can
occur just by opening the hood.

lamp
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine
has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 327).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant
system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by
snow, slush or ice.
X At coolant temperatures below 248 (120 ), drive to the nearest qualified
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous
terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems

lamp
N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at
too high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on PRESAFE Brake (Y page 74).
For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 69).
Z
Tires

lamp
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)
is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the
tires.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers.
Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 341).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 365).
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)

flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
Vehicle

lamp
N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power steering is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist
workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest
qualified specialist workshop.
Z
296
297

Stowage areas .................................. 298
Features ............................................. 306
Stowage and features

298 Stowage areas
Useful information Always be particularly careful around the

exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
i This Operator's Manual describes all these components to cool down before touch-
models and all standard and optional equip- ing them.
ment of your vehicle available at the time of
publication of the Operator's Manual. The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-
Country-specific differences are possible. cle are dependent on the distribution of the
Please note that your vehicle may not be load within the vehicle. For this reason, you
equipped with all features described. This should observe the following notes when
also applies to safety-related systems and transporting a load:

functions. RNever exceed the maximum permissible
i Read the information on qualified special- gross vehicle weight or the gross axle
ist workshops (Y page 26). weight rating of the vehicle (including occu-
pants). The values are specified on the vehi-
cle identification plate on the B-pillar of the
Stowage areas driver's door.
RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry
Loading guidelines objects.
RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
G WARNING
sible and as low down in the trunk as pos-
sible.
RThe load must not protrude above the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, upper edge of the seat backrests.
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
risk of poisoning. seats if possible.
Always switch off the engine before opening RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges
open. for protection.
G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or Stowage spaces
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip Important safety notes
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- G WARNING
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- If you do not correctly store objects in the
den change in direction. vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
Always store objects so that they cannot be around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-
loads against slipping or tipping before the ing or abruptly changing directions.
journey. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be
flung around in these or in similar situa-
G WARNING tions.
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
become very hot. If you come into contact trude from stowage compartments, parcel
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn nets or stowage nets.
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Stowage areas 299
RClose lockable stowage compartments X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
while driving. lock and turn it 90 clockwise to position
RStow and secure objects that are heavy, 2.
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into
large in the trunk. the lock and turn it 90 counter-clockwise
to position 1.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298).
Eyeglasses compartment
Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box
X To open: press marking :.

The eyeglasses compartment opens down-
wards.
X To open: pull handle : and open glove box X To close: press marking : again and the
flap ;. eyeglasses compartment returns upwards
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards and engages.
until it engages. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment
Objects in A4 format or an iPad, for example, is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
can be stored in the glove box. For vehicles
Stowage compartment in the front center
with a perfume atomizer (Y page 150) the
console
storage space of the glove box is restricted.
The glove box can only be locked and

X Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the
unlocked using the mechanical key. arrow.
Cover : swings upwards.
Z
300 Stowage areas
Stowage compartment under the armrest Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear seat
armrest
! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cover of the stowage compart-
ment before folding the rear seat armrest
back into the seat backrest.
X To open: press button : at the front.

The stowage space opens.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
following may be in the stowage space:
Ra multimedia connector unit with 2 USB
ports and a SD card slot, e.g. for use with an
iPod, iPhone or MP3 player, see the sep-
arate Operator's Manual
Ra small stowage space in the upper front
section X To open: fold down the seat armrest.
X Press on the front of release catch : and
Stowage compartment in the doors fold the cover of the armrest upwards.
Additional stowage space

Depending on the equipment, the following
additional stowage areas are available in the
vehicle:
Rcard and coin holder in the dashboard
above the light switch (not suitable for hold-
ing thin objects such as shopping tokens)
Rthe open stowage compartment in the cen-
You can store items such as a rolled-up fluo- ter console
rescent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicle Rstowage net in front-passenger footwell
document wallet (front-passenger door) in Rthe map pockets on the back of the driver's
stowage compartment : in the doors.
and front-passenger seat
In doors ; you can store bottles with a capa- Rthe parcel nets on the left and right-hand
city of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).
side in the trunk
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 298).
Stowage areas 301
Ski and snowboard bag X Close the ski and snowboard bag.
X Pull tensioning strap ; tight by the loose
Important safety notes end until the skis or snowboards are held
G WARNING firmly inside the ski and snowboard bag.
The skibag in conjunction with the lashing
straps cannot restrain any objects other than
skis.
Vehicle occupants could be struck in the
event of sudden braking or an accident, for

instance, if you:
Rtransport other heavy or sharp-edged
objects in the skibag
Rdo not secure the skibag with the lashing
straps
There is a risk of accident and injury. X Engage tensioning strap = in a diagonal
Store only skis in the skibag. Always secure pattern on hooks ? in cargo tie-down rings
the skibag with the lashing straps so that it A as shown.
cannot move around.
A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow- Rear bench seat through-loading fea-
boards can be transported in the ski and ture
snowboard bag.
Securing the ski and snowboard bag in
the trunk G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be
restrained by the seat backrest.
X Fold the middle rear seat backrest forwards
(Y page 302). There is an increased risk of injury.
X Slide the ski and snowboard bag between Before every trip, make sure that the seat
the two outside rear seat backrests. Ensure backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
that the wheels of the ski and snowboard are engaged.
bag are in the trunk.
X Open the ski and snowboard bag with zip-
per : and place the skis or snowboards The outside and the middle rear seat backr-
inside it. ests can be folded down separately to
Z
302 Stowage areas
increase the trunk capacity. The division ratio

is 40% to 20% to 40%.
Folding the rear seat backrests forward

X Vehicles without memory function: if nec-
essary, move the driver's or front-
passenger seat forward.
X Vehicles with memory function: when one
or both parts of the rear seat backrest are
folded forward, the respective front seat

moves forward slightly, when necessary, in X Fold corresponding rear seat backrest ;
order to avoid contact. forward.
X Open the trunk. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head back if necessary.
restraints.
Folding the rear seat backrest back
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
Left and right seat backrest

X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat back-
rest release handle :.
The corresponding rear seat backrest is
released.
Left and right seat backrest
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
engages.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunc-
tion display in the instrument cluster. A
Middle rear seat backrest

X Pull release lever ; forwards.
Rear seat backrest : is released.
Stowage areas 303
X To lock: fold the left and center seat backr-

ests forward. Make sure that the center and
left seat backrests are engaged and joined
together.
X Slide catch : upwards.
The release mechanism of the center seat
backrest is locked.
X To unlock: fold back the left and center
rear seat backrests.

X Slide catch : downward from inside the
Middle rear seat backrest trunk.

forward if necessary. Securing cargo
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer Cargo tie-down rings
visible.
General notes
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
Observe the following notes on securing
(Y page 111).
loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines
back if necessary.
(Y page 298).
You should always engage the rear seat RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
backrests if you do not need the through-
rings.
loading feature. This will prevent unauthor-
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
ized access to the trunk from the vehicle inte-
rior. rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
Locking the center rear seat backrest a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
In order to prevent the trunk from being

accessed by unauthorized persons, the cen-
ter seat backrest can be locked using a catch.
The center seat backrest can only be folded
forward together with the left seat backrest.
Z
304 Stowage areas
Trunk EASY-PACK trunk box

G WARNING
When the load surface moves up, your hands
may become trapped on the frame of the
EASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury.
When the load surface moves up, make sure
that your hands are not within the sweep of
the load surface. If someone becomes trap-

ped, carefully push the center of the load sur-
Sedan with through-loading feature in the rear face downward.
bench seat
! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulled
X Fold up the cargo tie-down rings next to the
out, no objects may be placed on the frame
rear seat backrest and put them through
of the box, nor should the frame be pushed
the slots in the carpet.
from above. Otherwise, the box could be
damaged.
Bag hook
! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects
G WARNING can damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects then be thrown out. There is a risk of injury.
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug- Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or
gage could be flung around and thereby hit fragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly Always store and secure these or similar
changing directions. There is a risk of injury. objects in the trunk outside of the EASY-
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. PACK trunk box.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile ! If you exceed the maximum permitted
objects on the bag hooks. load of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects
can be thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of box and strike vehicle occupants. There is a
6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to
risk of injury, particularly in the event of
secure a load.
sudden braking or a sudden change in
direction.
Always observe the maximum permitted
load of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always
store and secure heavy objects in the trunk
outside of the EASY-PACK trunk box.
The maximum permitted load of the EASY-
PACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load
of above approximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bot-
tom of the box moves downward until it rests
on the mat of the trunk floor. Thus, overload-
: Bag hook ing of the box is avoided.
Stowage areas 305
Adjusting the height to any position

X Raise box : and press hooks A into
Example anchorage ? as far as they will go.
X Turn left-hand rotating catch B counter-
X Pull the box out by handle : in the direc-
tion of the arrow all the way to the stop. clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B
clockwise by 90.
X Lowering the load surface: push the cen-
X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch
ter of load surface ; down by hand in the
direction of the arrow until load surface ; B clockwise and right-hand rotating catch
has reached the desired position and the B counter-clockwise by 90.
box is the desired size. X Move box : downwards and pull it out
X To raise the load surface: press switch

from anchorages ?.
=. Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat sur-
Load surface ; of the box moves up auto- face after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf.
matically.
X To stow the box: push the box in by han-
dle : all the way to the stop. Stowage well under the trunk floor
! Unhook the handle before again before
Removing and installing closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to
prevent the handle flap from protruding.
Otherwise, you could damage the handle.
Example
X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into
slots = The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are
located in the stowage compartment.
X To open: pull handle : up.
Z
306 Features
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof

load may become detached from the vehicle.
You must therefore ensure that you observe
the roof carrier manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Vehicles with a panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel: the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be
opened if a roof carrier is installed. The pan-
orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can

still be raised to allow ventilation of the vehi-
X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. cle interior.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel makes contact with a roof carrier
Roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will
Important safety notes lower slightly but remain raised at the rear.
G WARNING Attaching the roof carrier

When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
load, the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.
The maximum roof load can be found in the

"Technical data" (Y page 403).
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you X Open covers : carefully in the direction of
only use roof carriers that have been tested the arrow.
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. X Fold covers : upwards.
This helps to avoid damage to the vehicle. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-
Position the load on the roof carrier in such age points under covers :.
a way that the vehicle will not sustain dam- X Observe the manufacturer's installation
age even when it is in motion. instructions.
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that when the roof carrier is instal-
led you can: Features
Rraisethe sliding sunroof/panorama roof Cup holder
with power tilt/sliding panel fully
Ropen the trunk lid fully Important safety notes
! To avoid damaging or scratching the cov- ! Only use the cup holders for containers of
ers, do not use metallic or hard objects to the right size and which have lids. The
open them. drinks could otherwise spill.
Features 307
G WARNING You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat

If you do not correctly store objects in the for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung water only.
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when brak- Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
ing or abruptly changing directions. ! Do not sit on or support your body weight
RAlways store objects so that they cannot be on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
flung around in these or in similar situa- down, as you could otherwise damage it.
tions.

! Close the cup holder before folding the
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
trude from stowage compartments, parcel
holder could be damaged.
nets or stowage nets.
RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the trunk.
Cup holder in the front-compartment

center console
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X To open: press the front of cup holder :
or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
X To fold out: place a container in the cup
holder.
The cup holder folds down automatically.
X To fold in: remove the container.
The cup holder folds in automatically.
X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back
If you remove the cup holder insert, you can until it engages.
use the resulting compartment for stowage.
X To open: open the stowage compartment
(Y page 299). Sun visors
X To remove: slide catch = forwards and Overview
pull out cup holder ;.
X To insert: insert cup holder ; and slide G WARNING
back catch =. If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
X To close: push cover : of the stowage up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
compartment closed. blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Z
308 Features
Always keep the mirror cover folded down

while driving.
X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by

tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the
top of the window.
: Mirror light
; Bracket
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Rear window roller sunblind
? Vanity mirror
A Mirror cover
G WARNING
Vanity mirror in the sun visor When extending or retracting, parts of the
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor body could become trapped within the sweep
is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A of the roller sunblind. There is a risk of injury.
has been folded up. When extending or retracting, make sure that
no one has any parts of the body within the
Glare from the side sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone
becomes trapped, briefly press the button
X Fold down the sun visor. again. The opening or closing procedure will
X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. be stopped.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
! Make sure that the roller sunblind can
move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind
Rear side window roller sunblinds or other objects could be damaged.
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Extending/retracting the roller sun-
Do not let it snap back suddenly as this blind
would damage the automatic roller mech-
anism.
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller
sunblind hooked in and the side windows
opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind
can jump out of the retainers and spring
back suddenly when driving at high speeds,
e.g. when driving on the freeway. This could
damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either
close the side window or retract the roller
sunblind before driving at high speeds.
Features 309
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the Rear-compartment ashtray

X To extend or retract: briefly press but-
ton :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
X To stop: briefly press button : again.
The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves
back into the out-of-use position.

Ashtray
X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge.
Front ashtray X To remove the insert: push ribbing =
! The stowage space under the ashtray is from the left side and pull insert :
not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga- upwards.
rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the X To install the insert: install insert : from
ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the above into the holder and press down into
stowage space could be damaged. the holder until it engages.
Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
X To open: open the stowage compartment
objects, for example
(Y page 299).
There is a risk of fire and injury.
X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at its
right side =. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
X To remove the insert: hold the sides of
out of reach of children. Never leave children
insert ?, push it upwards gently ; and unsupervised in the vehicle.
pull it out.
X To re-install the insert: press insert ? Your attention must always be focused on the
into the holder until it engages. traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
X To close: close the cover of the ashtray. lighter when road and traffic conditions per-
X Push cover : of the stowage compart-
mit.
ment closed.
i You can remove the ashtray insert and
use the resulting compartment for stow-
age.
Z
310 Features
Socket in the front-compartment center

console

X To open: open the stowage compartment X To open: open the stowage compartment
(Y page 299). (Y page 299).
X Press in cigarette lighter ;. X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati- X To close: push cover : of the stowage
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
compartment closed.
X To close: push cover : of the stowage
compartment closed.
Socket in the rear-compartment center
console
12 V sockets
General notes
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-
ries include such items as lamps or chargers
for mobile phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may X Pull cover ; out by its top edge.
discharge. X Lift up the cover of socket :.
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the mbrace
sockets is automatically cut. This ensures
that there is sufficient power to start the General notes
engine.
The mbrace system is only available in the
If you have connected a device to the 12 V USA.
socket, leave the cover of the stowage com-
You must have a license agreement to acti-
partment open. This prevents the cover from
vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your
being blocked.
system is activated and operational. To log in,
press the MB Info call button. If any of
Features 311
the steps mentioned are not carried out, the System self-test
system may not be activated.
After you have switched on the ignition, the
If you have questions about the activation, system carries out a self-diagnosis.
contact one of the following telephone hot-
A malfunction in the system has been detec-
lines:
ted if one of the following occurs:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007 not come on during the system self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Shortly after successfully registering with the

mbrace service, a user ID and password will Assistance button does not light up during
be sent to you by mail. You can use this pass- self-diagnosis of the system.
word to log onto the mbrace area under "Own- RThe indicator lamp in the MB Info call
ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. button does not light up during self-diag-
The system is available if: nosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the
Rit has been activated and is operational
following buttons continues to light up red
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
after the system self-diagnosis:
available for transmitting data to the Cus- - SOS button
tomer Center
- F Roadside Assistance call button
Ra service subscription is available
- MB Info call button
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
RThe Inoperative or the Service Not
Determining the location of the vehicle on a
Activated message appears in the multi-
map is only possible if:
function display after the system self-diag-
RGPS reception is available. nosis.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
the Customer Assistance Center. above, the system may not operate as expec-
ted. In the event of an emergency, help will
The mbrace system have to be summoned by other means.
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as Have the system checked at the nearest
follows: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
the following service hotlines:
X Press the W or X button on the mul-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
tifunction steering wheel.
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or or 1-866-990-9007
X Use the COMAND/Audio 20 volume con-
trol.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
RAutomatic and manual emergency call
RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call
You can find information and a description of
all available features under "Owners Online"
at http://www.mbusa.com.
Z
312 Features
Emergency call All important information on the emergency is

transmitted, for example:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-
G WARNING mined by the GPS system)
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, Rvehicle identification number
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an Rinformation on the severity of the accident
emergency if:
Shortly after the emergency call has been ini-
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- tiated, a voice connection is automatically
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident established between the Customer Assis-
Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of tance Center and the vehicle occupants.
road RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
seen by other road users, particularly when ter attempts to get more information on the
dark or in poor visibility conditions emergency.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. RIf there is no response from the vehicle
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi- occupants, an ambulance is immediately
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. sent to the vehicle.
Move to a safe location along with other vehi- If no voice connection can be established to
cle occupants. In such situations, secure the the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
vehicle in accordance with national regula- Center, the system has been unable to initiate
tions, e. g. with a warning triangle. an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
General notes
mobile phone network is not available. The
Observe the notes on system activation indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-
(Y page 310). tinuously.
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an The Call Failed message appears in the
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is multifunction display and must be confirmed.
triggered. You cannot end an automatically In this case, summon assistance by other
triggered emergency call yourself. means.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually. Making an emergency call
As soon as the emergency call has been ini-
tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The Connecting Call message
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the
Call Connected message appears in the
Features 313
X To initiate an emergency call manually: If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
press cover : briefly to open. are available, the system transfers data to the
X Press SOS button ; briefly. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; for example:
flashes until the emergency call is conclu- Rcurrent location of the vehicle
ded. Rvehicle identification number
X Wait for a voice connection to the
The COMAND/Audio 20 display indicates
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- that a call is active. During the call, you can
ter. change to the navigation menu by pressing

X After the emergency call, close cover :. the NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, for
If the mobile phone network is unavailable, example.
mbrace will not be able to make the emer- Voice output is not available in this case.
gency call. If you leave the vehicle immedi- A voice connection is established between
ately after pressing the SOS button, you will the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
not know whether mbrace placed the emer- Center and the vehicle occupants.
gency call. In this case, always summon assis- From the vehicle remote malfunction diagno-
tance by other means. sis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center can ascertain the nature of the prob-
Roadside Assistance button lem (Y page 317).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
Benz technician or makes arrangements for
your vehicle to be transported to the nearest
You may be charged for services such as
repair work and/or towing.
You can find more information in the separate
mbrace manual.
The system has not been able to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call, if:
X To call Roadside Assistance: press but-
ton : for Roadside Assistance. Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz call button F is flashing continuously.
Customer Assistance Center. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance Customer Assistance Center was estab-
button : flashes while the call is active. lished.
The Connecting Call message appears in This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
the multifunction display. The audio output network is not available, for example.
is muted. The Call Failed message appears in the
If a connection can be made, the Call Con multifunction display.
nected message appears in the multifunction X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
display. multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio
20 button for ending a phone call.
Z
314 Features
MB Info call button You can find further information on the

mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
The system has not been able to initiate an
MB Info call, if:
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button
is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
X To call MB Info: press MB Info call but-
The Call Failed message appears in the
ton :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : multifunction steering wheel.

flashes while the connection is being made. or
The Connecting Call message appears in X Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio
the multifunction display. The audio output 20 button for ending a phone call.
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con Call priority
nected message appears in the multifunction
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
display.
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception call can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-
are available, the system transfers data to the gency call will take priority and override all
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, other active calls.
for example:
The indicator lamp of the respective button
Rcurrent location of the vehicle flashes until the call is ended.
Rvehicle identification number An emergency call can only be terminated by
The COMAND/Audio 20 display indicates the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
that a call is active. During the call, you can Center.
change to the navigation menu by pressing All other calls can be ended by pressing:
the NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, for Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer-
example.
ing wheel
Voice output is not available in this case. Rthe corresponding button in COMAND/
A voice connection is established between Audio 20 to end the voice call
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
When a call is initiated, the audio system is
Center and the vehicle occupants.
muted.
You receive information about operating your
The mobile phone is no longer connected to
vehicle, about the nearest authorized
COMAND/Audio 20.
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-
ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz. However, if you want to use your mobile
phone, do so only when the vehicle is station-
ary and in a safe location.
Features 315
Downloading destinations Search & Send

Downloading destinations General notes
Downloading destinations gives you access To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be
to a database with over 15 million points of equipped with mbrace and a navigation sys-
interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on tem. Additionally, an mbrace service sub-
the navigation system in your vehicle. If you scription must be completed.
know the destination, the address can be "Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-
downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the vice. A destination address which is found on

location of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor- Google Maps can be transferred via mbrace
tant destinations in the vicinity. directly to your vehicle's navigation system.
Furthermore, you can download routes with
up to four way points. Specifying and sending the destination
address
You are prompted to confirm route guidance
X Go to the website http://
to the address entered.
maps.google.com and enter a destination
X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY address into the entry field.
the controller and confirm with W. X To send the destination address to the
The system calculates the route and sub- e-mail address of your mbrace account:
sequently starts the route guidance with
click on the corresponding button on the
the address entered.
website.
If you select No the address can be stored in
Example:
the address book.
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
The destination download function is availa- 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
ble if: will be sent to your vehicle.
Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
system. Enter the e-mail address you specified
Rthe relevant mobile phone network is avail- when setting up your mbrace account into
able and data transfer is possible. the corresponding field.
X Click "Send".
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack- Information on specific commands such as
age and cannot be purchased separately. "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the
You can use the route assistance function website.
even if the vehicle is not equipped with a nav- Calling up a transmitted destination
igation system. address
Within the framework of this service, you X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
receive a professional and reliable form of tion lock (Y page 157).
navigation support without having to leave The transmitted destination address is loa-
your vehicle. ded into the vehicle's navigation system.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's
current position and the desired destination.
You will then be guided live through the cur-
rent route section.
Z
316 Features
A display message appears, asking Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:
whether navigation should be started. Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY section
the controller and confirm with W. Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone,
The system calculates the route and sub-
Android)
sequently starts the route guidance with
the address entered. To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
If you select No the address can be stored in
the address book.
Vehicle remote closing
If you have sent more than one destination

address, each individual destination must The vehicle remote-closing feature can be
be confirmed separately. used when you have forgotten to lock the
vehicle and you are no longer nearby.
Destination addresses are loaded in the same
order as the order in which they were sent. The vehicle can then be locked by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles
with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: The vehicle can be immediately remotely
locked within four days of the ignition being
If multiple vehicles are registered under the
turned off. After this time, remote closing may
same e-mail address, the destination will be
be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days
sent to all the vehicles.
the vehicle can no longer be locked remotely.
Vehicle remote opening The vehicle remote closing feature is availa-
ble if the relevant mobile phone network is
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you available and a data connection is possible.
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and X Contact the following service hotlines:
a replacement SmartKey is not available.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Benz Customer Assistance Center. (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
The vehicle can be immediately opened You will be asked for your password.
remotely within four days of the ignition being
The next time you are inside the vehicle and
turned off. After this time, the remote unlock-
you switch on the ignition, the Doors
ing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
Locked Remotely message appears in the
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
remotely.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
The vehicle remote unlocking feature is avail-
able if the relevant mobile phone network is Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
available and a data connection is possible. section
X Contact the following service hotlines: Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone,
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- Android)

ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes To do this, you will need your identification
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 number and password.
You will be asked for your password.
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center.
Features 317
Stolen vehicle recovery service X Press the Yes button to confirm the mes-
sage.
If your vehicle has been stolen:
X When the Vehicle Diagnostics
X Notify the police. Please Start Ignition message
The police will issue a numbered incident appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
report. the ignition lock (Y page 157).
X This number will be forwarded to the
X If the Please follow the instruc
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- tions received by phone and move
ter together with your PIN. your vehicle to a safe position.

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance message appears: please follow the
Center then tries to locate the system. The instructions received by phone and move
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- your vehicle to a safe position.
ter contacts you and the local law enforce- The message in the display disappears.
ment agency if the vehicle is located.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
However, only the law enforcement agency During this procedure, you will see the
is informed of the location of the vehicle. Vehicle Diagnostics Active message.
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for If you select Cancel the vehicle remote
longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz malfunction diagnosis is canceled com-
Customer Assistance Center is automatically pletely.
notified.
When the check is complete, the Sending
vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis
connection may be interrupted dur
With the vehicle remote malfunction diagno- ing data transfer) message appears. The
sis, the Customer Assistance Center can pro- vehicle data can now be sent.
vide improved support for problems with your X Press the OK button to confirm the mes-
vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is sage.
transferred to the Customer Assistance Cen- The voice connection with the Customer
ter. Assistance Center is terminated.
The customer service representative can use The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer
the received data to decide what kind of ring Data... message appears.
assistance is required. You are then, for
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
example, guided to the nearest authorized
Assistance Center.
Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle
is called. Depending on what the customer service rep-
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during resentative agreed with you, the voice con-
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, nection is re-established after the transfer is
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance complete. If necessary, you will be contacted
Center. at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-
mail or phone.
You will see the following message in the
COMAND display: Roadside Assistance Another function of the vehicle remote mal-
Connected. If the remote malfunction diag-
Connected function diagnosis is the transfer of service
nosis can be started, the Request for data to the Customer Assistance Center. If a
Vehicle Diagnostics Received Start service is overdue, the COMAND display
vehicle diagnostics? message appears in shows a message about various special offers
the display. at your workshop.
Z
318 Features
This information can also be called up under The data you receive contains the following
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. information:
Information on the data stored in the vehicle Rthe location where the speed limit was
(Y page 28). exceeded
Information on Roadside Assistance Rthe time at which the speed limit was
(Y page 24). exceeded
Rthe selected speed limit which was excee-
Downloading routes ded
Downloading routes allows you to transfer

and save predefined routes in the navigation Geo fencing
system. Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
A route can be prepared and sent by either a the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
customer service representative or under be informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. daries of the selected areas. You can select
Each route can include up to four way points. the way in which you receive this information
Once a route has been received by the navi- beforehand. Possible options include text
gation system, you will see the The "Route message, e-mail or an automated call.
name" external route has been saved The area can be determined as either a circle
to "Previous Destinations". Would or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
you like to start navigation? mes- You can specify up to ten areas simultane-
sage. The route is saved to the hard disk. ously. Different settings are possible for each
X To start route guidance: select YesYes. area.
An overview of the route is shown in the These settings can be called up under "Own-
display. ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
If you select No the saved route can be Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
called up later in the navigation menu. and inform the customer service representa-
X Start
Start. tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.
Route guidance is started. Currently inactive areas can be activated by
Downloaded and saved data can be called up text message.
again via COMAND.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
You can find further information in the sepa-
rate COMAND Operating Instructions. With this function, you can trigger the vehi-
cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm
Speed alert sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.
Depending on the setting, the panic alarm
You can define the upper speed limit, which
lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the
must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
alarm switches off.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-
cle, a message will be sent to the Customer
Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance Garage door opener
Center then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive General notes
this information beforehand. Possible options The HomeLink garage door opener integra-
include text message, e-mail or an automated ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper-
call.
Features 319
ate up to three different door and gate sys- When using the integrated garage door
tems. opener, always make sure that nobody is
Use the integrated garage door opener only within the range of movement of the garage
on garage doors that: door.
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
Rmeet
G WARNING
current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
function of the garage door system's remote

is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
control. Please also read the operating
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
instructions for the garage door system.
out sufficient ventilation.
When programing a garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the
Programming
engine while programing.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible Programming buttons
with the integrated garage door opener. If you Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
have difficulty programing the integrated (Y page 319).
garage door opener, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free
of charge)
More information on HomeLink and/or Garage door remote control A is not inclu-
compatible products is also available online ded with the integrated garage door opener.
at http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 26).
X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
control the garage door drive.
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 X To start programming mode: press and
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the inte-
grated garage door opener.
G WARNING The garage door opener is now in program-
ming mode. After a short time, indicator
When you operate or program the garage door
lamp : lights up yellow.
with the integrated garage door opener, per-
sons in the range of movement of the garage Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
door can become trapped or struck by the as button ;, = or ? is programmed for
garage door. There is a risk of injury. the first time. If the selected button has
already been programmed, indicator
Z
320 Features
lamp : will only light up yellow after ten gramming of additional remote controls",
seconds have elapsed. before carrying out the following steps.
X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator Your vehicle must be within reach of the
lamp : flashes yellow. garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure
X To program the remote control: point that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
garage door remote control A towards objects are present within the sweep of the
buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at door or gate.
a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Press and hold button B on remote control tion lock (Y page 157).
A until indicator lamp : lights up green. X Get out of the vehicle.

When indicator lamp : lights up green: X Press the programming button on the door
programming is finished. drive unit.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-
gramming was successful. The next step is tiate the next step.
to synchronize the rolling code. X Get into the vehicle.
X Release button B on remote control A for
X Press previously programmed button ;,
the garage door drive system.
= or ? on the integrated garage door
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
opener until the door closes.
programing procedure for the correspond-
The rolling code synchronization is then
ing button on the rear-view mirror. When
complete.
doing so, vary the distance between remote
control A and the rear-view mirror. Notes on programming the remote con-
The required distance between remote trol
control A and the integrated garage door Canadian radio frequency laws require a
opener depends on the garage door drive "break" (or interruption) of the transmission
system. Several attempts might be neces- signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
sary. You should test every position for at Therefore, these signals may not last long
least 25 seconds before trying another enough for the integrated garage door
position. opener. The signal is not recognized during
programming. Comparable with Canadian
Synchronizing the rolling code
law, some U.S. garage door openers also fea-
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" ture a "break".
(Y page 319).
Proceed as follows:
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
Rif you live in Canada
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door Rif you have difficulties programming the
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you garage door opener (regardless of where
will need to use the programming button on you live) when using the programming
the door drive control panel. The program- steps.
ming button may be positioned at different X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
locations depending on the manufacturer. It the integrated garage door opener.
is usually located on the door drive unit on the After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
garage ceiling. up yellow.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door X Release the button.
drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro- Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
Features 321
X Press button B of garage door remote RWhen programming, hold remote control
control A for two seconds, then release it A at varying distances and angles from the
for two seconds. button which you are programming. Try var-
X Press button B again for two seconds. ious angles at a distance between 2and
X Repeat this sequence on button B of
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
remote control A until indicator lamp : but at varying distances.
lights up green. RIf another remote control is available for the
When indicator lamp : lights up green: same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming is finished. programming steps with this remote con-

When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- trol. Before performing these steps, make
gramming was successful. The next step is sure that new batteries have been installed
to synchronize the rolling code. in garage door drive remote control A.
RNote that some remote controls only trans-
X Release button B of remote control A of
the garage door drive. mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the cator lamp on the remote control goes out).
programming process for the correspond- Press button B on remote control A again
ing button on the rear-view mirror. When before transmission ends.
doing so, vary the distance between remote RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
control A and the rear-view mirror. opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
The required distance between remote tion/transmission.
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive Opening/closing the garage door
system. Several attempts might be neces- After it has been programmed, the integrated
sary. You should test every position for at garage door opener performs the function of
least 25 seconds before trying another the garage door system remote control.
position. Please also read the operating instructions
for the garage door system.
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programing
the integrated garage door opener on the
rear-view mirror, take note of the following X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
instructions: programmed to operate the garage door.

Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by cator lamp : lights up green.
garage door drive remote control A and
Garage door system with a rolling code:
whether it is supported. The transmitter
indicator lamp : flashes green.
frequency can usually be found on the back
of the garage door drive remote control. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
The integrated garage door opener is com- as the button is pressed. The transmission is
patible with devices that have units which halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
operate in the frequency range of 280 to indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press but-
433 MHz. ton ;, = or ? again if necessary.
RReplace the batteries in garage door
remote control A. This increases the like- Clearing the memory
lihood that garage door remote control A Make sure that you clear the memory of the
will transmit a strong and precise signal to integrated garage door opener before selling
the integrated garage door opener. the vehicle.
Z
322 Features

X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
X Slide the relevant seat back.

X To install: place the floormat in the foot-
well.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-
ers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
323

Engine compartment ........................ 324
ASSYST PLUS .................................... 328
Care .................................................... 329
Maintenance and care

324 Engine compartment
Useful information G WARNING

The engine compartment contains moving
i This Operator's Manual describes all components. Certain components, such as
models and all standard and optional equip- the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
ment of your vehicle available at the time of again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
publication of the Operator's Manual. is a risk of injury.
Country-specific differences are possible. If you need to do any work inside the engine
Please note that your vehicle may not be compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
functions. Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
i Read the information on qualified special- such as the fan rotation area
Rremove jewelry and watches
Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Engine compartment ple, away from moving parts
Hood G WARNING
Important safety notes The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
tem work under high voltage. If you touch
G WARNING components which are under voltage, you
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. injury.
There is a risk of an accident. Never touch components of the ignition sys-
Never unlatch the hood while driving. tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
is switched on.
G WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may Opening the hood
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of G WARNING
movement of the hood. Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Open and close the hood only when no one is
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
within its range of movement.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
G WARNING
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
touch only the components described in the
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
following.
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury. G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
Let an overheated engine cool down before
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department. Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
Engine compartment 325
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are Radiator

not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield Do not cover up the radiator, such as with a
wipers or the hood. thermal mat or insect protection cover. The
readings of the on-board-diagnostic system
may otherwise be inaccurate. Some of these
readings are required by law and must be
accurate at all times.
Engine oil
General notes

Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
Example
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption
may be higher than this when the vehicle is
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are new or if you frequently drive at high engine
turned off. speeds.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
The hood is released. be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han- Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
dle ; up and lift the hood. stick
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in G WARNING
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
Certain components in the engine compart-
automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Closing the hood Working in the engine compartment poses a
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height risk of injury.
of approximately 8 in (20 cm). Where possible, let the engine cool down and
X Check that the hood has engaged properly. touch only the components described in the
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not following.
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.
Z
326 Engine compartment
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that

have been approved for vehicles with a ser-
vice system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Example
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide center.

tube. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. caused by the following:
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
tube to the stop, and take it out again. not been specifically approved for the
If the level is between MIN mark = and service system
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark =
the interval for replacement specified by
or below, add 1.0 l of engine oil. the service system has been exceeded
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = Rusing engine oil additives.
or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine
oil. ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
engine oil can result in damage to the
Adding engine oil engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
excess engine oil siphoned off.
G WARNING
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- Example
ponents in the engine compartment, it may X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. it.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to X Add engine oil.
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of
ponents before starting the engine. engine oil.
Engine compartment 327
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn Only check the coolant level when the vehi-
clockwise. cle is on a level surface and the engine has
Ensure that the cap locks into place cooled down.
securely. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- tion lock (Y page 157).
stick (Y page 325). or
Further information on engine oil X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
(Y page 400). Start/Stop button twice (Y page 157).
X Check the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster.
Additional service products The coolant temperature must be below

Checking coolant level 158 (70 ).
X Turn the SmartKey to position
G WARNING 0 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock.
Certain components in the engine compart- or
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, pull the
of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
Working in the engine compartment poses a (Y page 157).
risk of injury.
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
Where possible, let the engine cool down and clockwise to allow excess pressure to
touch only the components described in the escape.
following.
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
G WARNING If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
The engine cooling system is pressurized, par- in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
ticularly when the engine is warm. When coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler
Let the engine cool down before opening the neck when warm, there is enough coolant
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when in expansion tank ;.
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-
turn to allow pressure to escape.
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 401).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield

washer system
G WARNING
X Park the vehicle on a level surface. of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Z
328 ASSYST PLUS
Working in the engine compartment poses a You can obtain further information from an
risk of injury. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
Where possible, let the engine cool down and http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
touch only the components described in the i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
following. does not show any information on the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
G WARNING engine oil level (Y page 325).
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if The multifunction display shows a service
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- message for several seconds, e.g.:
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
RService A in .. Days
fire and injury.
RService A Due
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. RService A Overdue by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, indicates the type
of service. A stands for a minor service and B
for a major service.
You can obtain further information from an
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not take into account any periods of
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab time during which the battery is disconnec-
and open. ted.
X Add the premixed washer fluid. Maintaining the time-dependent service
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck schedule:
until it engages. X Note down the service due date displayed
If the washer fluid level drops below the rec- in the multifunction display before discon-
ommended minimum of 1 liter, a message necting the battery.
appears in the multifunction display prompt- or
ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 282). X After reconnecting the battery, subtract
Further information on windshield washer the battery disconnection periods from the
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 402). service date shown on the display.
ASSYST PLUS Hiding a service message

Service message X Press the a or % button on the steer-
ing wheel.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance
Booklet).
Care 329
Displaying service messages Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road

surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long peri-
ods
the list of menus.
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
X Press the 9 or : button on the steer-
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
ing wheel to select the Service menu and replaced or changed more frequently. Under
press a to confirm. arduous operating conditions, the tires must
X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- be checked more often. Further information
ing wheel to select the ASSYST PLUS sub- can be obtained at a qualified specialist work-
menu and press a to confirm. shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
The service due date appears in the multi- ter.

function display.
Driving abroad
Information about Service An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network

is also available in other countries. You can
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service obtain further information from any author-
interval display ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play has been inadvertently reset, this set- Care
ting can be corrected at a qualified special-
ist workshop. General notes
Have service work carried out as described
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-
erwise lead to increased wear and damage Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
to the major assemblies or the vehicle. cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
ner.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display of the following:
after the service work has been carried out.
Rdry, rough or hard cloths
You can also obtain further information on
Rabrasive cleaning agents
maintenance work, for example.
Rsolvents
Special service requirements Rcleaning agents containing solvents
The specified maintenance interval takes only Do not scrub.

the normal operation of the vehicle into Do not touch the surfaces or protective
account. Under arduous operating conditions films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
or increased load on the vehicle, mainte- scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
nance work must be carried out more fre- damage the surfaces and protective film.
quently, for example: ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- period straight after cleaning it, particularly
ate stops after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
short distances increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
Z
330 Care
should drive for a few minutes after clean- ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec-
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the following
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The situations, for example, could lead to the
vehicle can then be parked. unintentional opening of the trunk:
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for Rusing a car wash
retaining the quality in the long term. Rusing a power washer
Use care products and cleaning agents rec- Make sure that the SmartKey is at least
ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.
! Make sure that the automatic transmis-
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the sion is in neutral position N when washing
your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The
paintwork
vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
Automatic car wash ROperating with the SmartKey:
G WARNING Do not remove the SmartKey from the

Braking efficiency is reduced after washing ignition lock. Do not open the driver's
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. door when the engine is switched off or
at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
transmission position D or R the auto-
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
matic transmission will automatically
conditions until full braking power is restored.
switch to park position P and block the
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function wheels.
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- ROperating with the Start/Stop button:
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- Do not open the driver's door when the
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC engine is switched off or at very low
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission
ing or other similar situations: position D or R the automatic transmis-
Rwhen towing the vehicle sion will automatically switch to park
Rin
position P and block the wheels.
the car wash
Observe the following to make sure that the
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless automatic transmission stays in position N
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
neutral:
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts. Operating with the SmartKey:
! Make sure that: X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed. X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off X Shift to neutral N.

(the OFF button has been pressed). X Release the brake pedal.
Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position X Release the electric parking brake, if nec-
0. essary.
Rthe 360 camera or rear view camera is X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
switched off. Key in the ignition lock.
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
Care 331
Operating with the Start/Stop button: X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
X Make sure that the ignition is switched on. sponge frequently.
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
thoroughly with a chamois.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
X Engage park position P.
paintwork.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition
soon as possible when driving in winter.
lock (Y page 157).
Power washers

X Depress and hold the brake pedal. G WARNING
X Shift to neutral N. The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
X Release the electric parking brake, if nec- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
essary. edly. There is a risk of an accident.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart- Do not use power washers with circular jet
Key in the ignition lock. nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car tires or chassis components replaced imme-
wash from the very start. diately.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! Always maintain a distance of at least
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off power washer nozzle. Information about
wax from the windshield and the wiper the correct distance is available from the
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce equipment manufacturer.
wiping noises caused by residue on the wind-
Move the power washer nozzle around
shield.
when cleaning your vehicle.
Washing by hand Do not aim directly at any of the following:
Rtires
In some countries, washing by hand is only
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each coun- Relectrical components
try. Rbattery
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Rconnectors
vehicle in direct sunlight. Rlights
X Use a soft sponge to clean. Rseals
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car Rtrim
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rventilation slots
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
Damaged seals or electrical components
gentle jet of water. can lead to leaks or failures.
X Do not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet.
Z
332 Care
! If the SmartKey is within the rear detec- Do not use these care products in the sun or
tion range of KEYLESS-GO, the following on the hood while the hood is hot.
situations, for example, could lead to the X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
unintentional opening of the trunk: Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
Rusing a car wash the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Rusing a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least Matte finish care
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
Cleaning the paintwork shine.
! Do not affix: ! The following may cause the paint to

Rstickers become shiny and thus reduce the matte
Rfilms effect:
Rmagnetic plates or similar items RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise rials.
damage the paintwork. RFrequent use of car washes.
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by inade- ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-
quate care cannot always be completely ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe- wax. These products are only suitable for
cialist workshop. high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, with matte finish leads to considerable sur-
while avoiding rubbing too hard. face damage (shiny, spotted areas).
X Soak insect remains with insect remover Always have paintwork repairs carried out
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
off the treated areas afterwards. treatment under any circumstances.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
lighter fluid. treatment.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
X Use silicone remover to remove wax. with a clear matte finish.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint The vehicle should preferably be washed by
surface, use the paint care products recom- hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. plenty of water.
This is the case approximately every three to Use only insect remover and car shampoo
five months, depending on the climate con- from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz
ditions and the care product used. care products.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz should be used.
Care 333
Cleaning the vehicle parts ! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
Cleaning the wheels intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
and pollen may under certain circumstan-
G WARNING
ces prevent water from draining away. This
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt can lead to corrosion damage and damage
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to electronic components.
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- X Clean the inside and outside of the win-
edly. There is a risk of an accident. dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
product that is recommended and
Do not use power washers with circular jet
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged

tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately. Cleaning wiper blades
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products G WARNING

to remove brake dust. This could damage You could become trapped by the windshield
wheel bolts and brake components. wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended injury.
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
wiper blades.
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
should drive for a few minutes after clean- the wiper blade could be damaged.
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
vehicle can then be parked. do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
Cleaning the windows could cause wiper noise.
G WARNING ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding

back. The windshield could be damaged if
You could become trapped by the windshield the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
injury. the windshield.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or damp cloth.

wiper blades. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- Cleaning the exterior lighting
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. cloths which are suitable for plastic light
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
windows. cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
the plastic light lenses.
Z
334 Care
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
lights with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning tion lock.
agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or Shutters : open automatically after
cleaning cloths. approximately 120 seconds.
X Clean the location points of shutters ; in
Cleaning the mirror turn signals the radiator trim with a power washer.
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Cleaning the sensors
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning ! If you clean the sensors with a power
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic washer, make sure that you keep a dis-
lenses of the mirror turn signals. tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
signals in the exterior mirror housing using Information about the correct distance is
a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. available from the equipment manufac-
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning turer.
cloths.
Cleaning AIRPANEL
! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a dis-
tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufac-
turer.
Vehicles with AIRPANEL have shutters in the
radiator trim. If the vehicle is very dusty, the
adjustment range of the shutters may be
restricted. The actuation mechanics of the
radiator trim must then be cleaned with a
power washer. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
Care 335
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and

that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To open the cover of the 360 camera:
with COMAND or Audio 20 activated, call
up the vehicle menu: press the but-
ton.
X To switch to the menu bar: slide the
controller.
X To select System Settings:
Settings turn and
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and press the controller.

that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the X To select the 360 camera
camera: turn and press
ignition lock. the controller.
X To open the cover of the rear view cam- X To select Open camera cover:
cover turn and
era: with COMAND or Audio 20 activated, press the controller.
call up the vehicle menu: press the The cover of the 360 camera opens.
button. X To clean the 360 camera: clean camera
X To switch to the menu bar: slide the lens : with clean water and a soft cloth.
controller. If you drive at speeds above 20 mph
X To select System Settings:
Settings turn and (30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in position 0
press the controller. or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360
X To select Rear view camera:
camera turn and camera closes automatically.
press the controller.
X To select Open camera cover:
cover turn and Cleaning the exhaust pipes
press the controller.
G WARNING
The rear view camera cover opens.
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
X To clean the rear view camera: use clear
become very hot. If you come into contact
water and a soft cloth to clean camera with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
lens :. yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
Cleaning the 360 camera exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area these components to cool down before touch-
around the 360 camera with a power ing them.
washer.360
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents such as sanitary
cleansers or wheel cleaners.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-
ter and after washing.
Z
336 Care
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. look of the surfaces.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
Interior care X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
Cleaning the display ucts recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- The surface may change color temporarily.
lowing: Wait until the surface is dry again.
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
Rabrasive cleaning agents Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
Rcommercially-available household clean- selector lever

ing agents X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
These may damage the display surface. Do leather care agents that have been recom-
not put pressure on the display surface mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-
ble damage to the display. Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that ments
it is switched off and has cooled down.
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
X Clean the display surface using a commer-
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-
cially available microfiber cloth and ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of
TFT/LCD display cleaner. damaging the surface.
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
fiber cloth. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and
Cleaning the plastic trim
can lose their shine if chrome polish is
G WARNING used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
when cleaning the trim pieces.
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
come loose in the event of air bag deploy- are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
ment. There is a risk of injury. are chrome-plated or not, consult an
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit. X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa- cloth.
ces: X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
Rstickers ucts recommended and approved by
Rfilms Mercedes-Benz.
Rscented oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the
Care 337
Cleaning the seat covers results depend on the type of dirt and
how long it has been there.
General notes Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean gen- cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA seat sections to avoid leaving visible
covers. If used often, these can damage the lines.
cover.
Note that regular care is essential to ensure Cleaning the seat belts
that the appearance and comfort of the cov-
ers is retained over time. G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
Genuine leather seat covers bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat

! To retain the natural appearance of the belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
leather, observe the following cleaning an accident. This poses an increased risk of
instructions: injury or fatal injury.
RClean genuine leather covers carefully Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-
ers down with a dry cloth. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
RMake sure that the leather does not
by heating at temperatures above 176
become soaked. It may otherwise (80 ) or in direct sunlight.
become rough and cracked.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
been tested and approved by Mercedes- tion.
Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-
fied specialist workshop. Cleaning the headliner and carpets
Leather is a natural product. X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for or dry shampoo.
example: X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-
Rdifferences in the texture ing agents recommended and approved by
Rmarks caused by growth and injury Mercedes-Benz.
Rslight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning
Z
338
339

Where will I find...? ........................... 340
Flat tire .............................................. 341
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 345
Jump-starting .................................... 349
Towing and tow-starting .................. 351
Fuses .................................................. 354
Roadside Assistance
340 Where will I find...?
Useful information Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

functions.
(Example)
: Tire inflation compressor
; Tire sealant filler bottle
Roadside Assistance
Where will I find...? = Towing eye
Vehicle tool kit X Open the trunk lid.

X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 305).
General notes X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 342).
The towing eye is located in the stowage well
under the trunk floor. Vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires
In vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires with with run-flat characteristics)
run-flat characteristics) the towing eye is
located in a bracket under the parcel shelf.
Apart from certain country-specific varia-
tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a
tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing
a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more
information on which tire changing tools are
required and approved to perform a wheel
change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
Tools required for changing a wheel may
include, for example: : Towing eye
RJack X To remove the towing eye: open the trunk
RWheel chock lid.
RLug wrench X Pull towing eye : to the left and remove it.
RRatchet wrench X To replace the towing eye: slide towing
RAlignment bolt
eye : with the thread into the rear end of
the bracket.
X Push towing eye : on the eyelet towards
the right until it engages in the bracket.
Flat tire 341
Flat tire MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat

properties)
Preparing the vehicle
General notes
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat prop- With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
erties) (Y page 341) characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
pressure in one or more tires. The affected
vehicles with MOExtended tires
tire must not show any clearly visible damage.
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 340)
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
Information on changing/mounting a wheel MOExtended marking which appears on the
(Y page 381). sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and next to the tire size designation, the load-
level ground, as far away as possible from bearing capacity and the speed index
traffic. (Y page 375).
Roadside Assistance
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. MOExtended tires may only be used in con-
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away junction with an active tire pressure loss
(Y page 174). warning system or with an active tire pressure
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the monitor.
straight-ahead position. If the pressure loss warning message
X Switch off the engine. appears in the multifunction display:
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition RObserve the instructions in the display
lock. messages (Y page 277).
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func- RCheck the tire for damage.
tion or KEYLESSGO RIf driving on, observe the following notes.
X Open the driver's door. The maximum driving distance is approx-
The on-board electronics now have status imately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having partially laden and approximately 18 miles
been removed. (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.
X Remove the Start/Stop button from the In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
ignition lock (Y page 157). tance possible depends upon:
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. RSpeed
Make sure that they are not endangered as RRoad condition
they do so.
ROutside temperature
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
area while a wheel is being changed. Any-
may be reduced by extreme driving condi-
one who is not directly assisting in the
tions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
wheel change should, for example, stand
through a moderate style of driving.
behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
The maximum permissible distance which
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
fic conditions when doing so.
the moment the tire pressure loss warning
X Close the driver's door.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
342 Flat tire
When replacing one or all tires, make sure TIREFIT kit

that you use only tires:
Rof the size specified for the vehicle and
Rmarked "MOExtended" TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
be used as a temporary measure. Make sure tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-
that you use the proper size and type (sum- peratures down to 4 (20 ).
mer or winter tire). G WARNING
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are In the following situations, the tire sealant is
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
It is therefore recommended that you addi- tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
you mount tires that do not feature run-flat
than those mentioned above.
Roadside Assistance
properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may

be obtained from a qualified specialist work- Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
shop. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
Important safety notes There is a risk of an accident.
G WARNING Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
G WARNING
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
There is a risk of an accident. The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
from children. There is a risk of injury.
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
vehicle. If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin
Ryou hear banging noises.
immediately with water.
Rthe vehicle starts to shake.
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
RESP is intervening constantly. oughly with clean water.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
After driving in emergency mode, have the rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
workshop with regard to their further use. The and seek medical attention immediately.
defective tire must be replaced in every case. RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
Flat tire 343
! Do not operate the tire inflation compres- X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out
sor for longer than eight minutes at a time of the housing.
without a break. It may otherwise overheat. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire seal-
The tire inflation compressor can be oper- ant bottle :.
ated again once it has cooled down. X Place tire sealant bottle : head down-
Comply with the manufacturers safety wards into recess ; of the tire inflation
instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.
compressor.
Using the TIREFIT kit
Roadside Assistance
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X Do not remove any foreign objects which X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket
have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or (Y page 310) in your vehicle.
nails.
X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-
panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-
X Press on/off switch = on the tire inflation
tion compressor from the stowage well
underneath the trunk floor (Y page 340). compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within
on. The tire is inflated.
the driver's field of vision.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
The pressure can briefly rise to approx-
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run
for five minutes. The tire should then have
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure reached" (Y page 344).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has not been attained after five minutes, see
"Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 344).
Z
344 Flat tire
If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can instrument cluster in the driver's field of
then be removed like a layer of film. vision.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, ! Residue from the tire sealant may come
have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at out of the filler hose after use. This could
a dry cleaner as soon as possible. cause stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
Tire pressure not reached bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes:
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of workshop.
the faulty tire.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
approximately 30 ft (10 m). has been attained after five minutes:
Roadside Assistance
X Pump up the tire again. X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
After a maximum of five minutes the tire X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ the faulty tire.
26 psi). X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
inflation compressor.
G WARNING X Pull away immediately.
If the required tire pressure is not reached
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
minutes and check the tire pressure with
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
the tire inflation compressor.
pressure that is too low can significantly
The tire pressure must now be at least
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
acteristics. There is a risk of accident. G WARNING
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified If the required tire pressure is not reached
specialist workshop. after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
Tire pressure reached the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
G WARNING impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
impairs the driving characteristics and is not Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of specialist workshop.
accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style i In cases such as the one mentioned
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed above, contact an authorized Mercedes-
the specified maximum speed with a tire that Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
has been repaired using tire sealant. (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-
ada).
The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire
X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the
Loading Information placard on the driver's
Battery (vehicle) 345
side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the have all work involving the battery carried out
fuel filler flap for values. at a qualified specialist workshop.
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on
G WARNING
the tire inflation compressor.
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-
tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP
(Electronic Stability Program). The operating
safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You
could lose control of the vehicle, for example:
Rbraking
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver
Roadside Assistance
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
X To reduce the tire pressure: depress
adapted to the road conditions
pressure release button E next to pres-
sure gauge F. There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
the filler hose from the valve of the sealed
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
tire.
should have all work involving the battery car-
X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
the sealed tire.
X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire i For further information about ABS and
inflation compressor. ESP, see (Y page 66) and (Y page 71).
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
G WARNING
sealant bottle.
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
inflation compressor. sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist explosion.
workshop and have the tire changed there. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as body to remove any existing electrostatic
soon as possible at a qualified specialist build-up.
workshop.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
four years at a qualified specialist work- charging the battery as well as when jump-
shop. starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged. A build-
Battery (vehicle) up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for
example:
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
Special tools and expert knowledge are fibers
required when working on the battery, e.g. Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
removal and installing. You should therefore
Z
346 Battery (vehicle)
Rif you push or pull the battery across the cialist workshop or a special
carpet or other synthetic materials collection point for used bat-
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth teries.
G WARNING
! Have the battery checked regularly at a
During the charging process, a battery produ- qualified specialist workshop.
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
Observe the service intervals in the Main-
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
cialist workshop for more information.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into con- ! You should have all work involving the
tact with vehicle parts. battery carried out at a qualified specialist
RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat- workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
tery. necessary for you to disconnect the battery
yourself, make sure that:
RIt is important that you observe the descri-
Roadside Assistance
Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from roll-

bed order of the battery terminals when
connecting and disconnecting a battery. ing away.
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are SmartKey. Make sure the ignition is
connected. switched off. Check that all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster are off.
RIt is particularly important to observe the
Otherwise, electronic components, such
described order when connecting and dis-
as the alternator, may be damaged.
connecting the jumper cables.
Ryou first remove the negative terminal
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
clamp and then the positive terminal
terminals while the engine is running.
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-
G WARNING tem may be damaged.
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Rthe transmission is locked in position P
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. after disconnecting the battery. The vehi-
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean cle is secured against rolling away. You
over the battery. Keep children away from can then no longer move the vehicle.
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
The battery and the cover of the positive
water and seek medical attention.
terminal clamp must be installed securely
during operation.
Batteries contain dangerous Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
substances. It is against the tective measures when handling batteries.
law to dispose of them with Risk of explosion.
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
Fire, open flames and smoking are
environment.
prohibited when handling the bat-
Dispose of batteries in an tery. Avoid creating sparks.
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
Battery (vehicle) 347
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- The vehicle will then use very little energy,
tact with skin, eyes or clothing. thus conserving battery power.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
especially gloves, apron and face-
guard. Charging the battery
Rinse any acid spills immediately G WARNING
with clear water. Contact a physi-
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
cian if necessary.
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
Wear eye protection. risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
Keep children away. ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.
Roadside Assistance
G WARNING
Observe this Operator's Manual. Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- over the battery. Keep children away from
mends that you only use batteries which have batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
been tested and approved for your vehicle by water and seek medical attention.
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehi- G WARNING
cle occupants from suffering acid burns A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
should the battery be damaged in the event of tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
an accident. ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
mum possible service life, it must always be an explosion.
sufficiently charged. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can charging it or jump-starting.
discharge over time if you do not use the
vehicle. In this case, have the battery discon- ! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
can also charge the battery with a charger ! Only charge the battery using the jump-
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a starting connection point.
qualified specialist workshop for further infor-
The jump-starting connection point is in the
mation.
engine compartment (Y page 349).
Have the battery condition of charge checked
X Open the hood.
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle X Connect the battery charger to the positive
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe- terminal and ground point in the same
cialist workshop if you wish to leave your order as when connecting the donor bat-
vehicle parked for a long period of time. tery in the jump-starting procedure
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle (Y page 349).
and do not require any electrical consumers.
Z
348 Battery (vehicle)
Never charge the battery if it is still installed in

the vehicle, unless you use a battery charger
which has been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit spe-
cially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles
and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz
is available as an accessory. It permits the
charging of the battery in its installed posi-
tion. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for further information and availabil-
ity. Read the battery charger's operating
instructions before charging the battery.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do
not light up, it is highly likely that the dis-
Roadside Assistance
charged battery has frozen. In this case you

may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge
the battery. The service life of a thawed-out
battery may be shorter. The starting charac-
teristics can be impaired, particularly at low
temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting 349
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek
medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
Roadside Assistance
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither
charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
350 Jump-starting
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Roadside Assistance
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.

Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal
clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 157). All indicator lamps in the instrument
cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it (Y page 157).
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
Towing and tow-starting 351
X Slide cover A of positive terminal : in the direction of the arrow.

X Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery B
using the jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal : on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery B to ground point ? of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point ? and negative terminal =, then from
positive clamp : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X Close cover A of positive clamp : after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Roadside Assistance
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
Towing and tow-starting G WARNING

When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible
G WARNING gross weight of your vehicle, the:
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or Rthe towing eye could detach itself
no longer available if: Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
Rthe engine is not running. over.
Rthe brake system or the power steering is There is a risk of an accident.
malfunctioning. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply its weight should not be greater than the per-
or the vehicle's electrical system. missible gross weight of your vehicle.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake. ! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
There is a risk of an accident. PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-
tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto-
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
matically in certain situations. To avoid
make sure that the steering moves freely.
damage to the vehicle, deactivate these
systems in the following or similar situa-
G WARNING tions:
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
Rwhen towing the vehicle
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
is a risk of an accident. Rin the car wash
Always switch off the ignition when towing the ! Make sure that the electric parking brake
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. is released. If the electric parking brake is
faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
352 Towing and tow-starting
! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the The battery must be connected and charged.
towing eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle Otherwise, you:
could become damaged. Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery the ignition lock
purposes as this could damage the vehicle. Rcannot release the electric parking brake
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
! When towing, pull away slowly and position N

smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, Disarm the automatic locking feature before
the vehicles could be damaged. the vehicle is towed (Y page 88). You could
otherwise be locked out when pushing or
! Shift the automatic transmission to N and towing the vehicle.
do not open the driver's or front passeng-
er's door during towing. The automatic
transmission may otherwise shift to posi- Installing/removing the towing eye
tion P, which could damage the transmis-
Roadside Assistance
sion. Installing the towing eye

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
weight must not exceed the maximum per-
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-
cle.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle
weight of your vehicle can be found on the
vehicle identification plate (Y page 396).
The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are
It is better to have the vehicle transported
located in the bumpers. They are at the rear
than to have it towed away.
and at the front, under covers :.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam-
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
age, have it transported on a transporter or
tool kit/stowage tray (Y page 340).
trailer.
X Press the mark on cover : inwards and
The automatic transmission must be in posi-
remove.
tion N when the vehicle is being towed. If the
X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clock-
automatic transmission cannot be shifted to
position N, have the vehicle transported on a wise to the stop.
transporter or trailer.
Towing and tow-starting 353
Removing the towing eye Towing a vehicle with both axles on

X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. the ground
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press The automatic transmission automatically
until it engages. shifts to position P when you open the driver's
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit/ or front-passenger door or when you remove
stowage tray. the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order
to ensure that the automatic transmission
stays in position N when towing the vehicle,
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle you must observe the following points:
raised X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
towed with the rear axle raised. tion lock.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
Roadside Assistance
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission. tion N.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
away with both axles on the ground or be loa- ignition lock.
ded up and transported. X Release the brake pedal.
! The ignition must be switched off if you
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
raised. Intervention by ESP could other- (Y page 127).
wise damage the brake system. In order to signal a change of direction when
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
(Y page 127). lamps switched on, use the combination
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
switch as usual. In this case, only the indica-
ahead position. tor lamps for the direction of travel flash.
After resetting the combination switch, the
X If necessary, turn the SmartKey in the igni-
hazard warning lamp starts flashing again.
tion lock to position 0 and remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave Transporting the vehicle
the vehicle.
! You may only secure the vehicle by the
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
raised, it is important that you observe the axle or steering components. Otherwise,
safety instructions (Y page 351). the vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes.
tion lock.
tion N.
Z
354 Fuses
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: Fuses

X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by Important safety notes
applying the electric parking brake.
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- G WARNING
tion P. If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
tion lock and remove it. age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
X Secure the vehicle.
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles new fuses having the correct amperage.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
with either the front or the rear axle raised, the same rating, which you can recognize by
as doing so will damage the transmission. the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
Roadside Assistance
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed in the fuse allocation chart.
away with both axles on the ground or be loa- If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
ded up and transported. cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported Mercedes-Benz Center.
on a truck or trailer. ! Only use fuses that have been approved
In the event of damage to the electrical for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
system: if the battery is defective, the auto- have the correct fuse rating for the system
matic transmission will be locked in position concerned. Otherwise, components or sys-
P. To shift the automatic transmission to posi- tems could be damaged.
tion N, you must provide power to the vehi- The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
cle's electrical system in the same way as faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
when jump-starting (Y page 349). nents on the circuit and their functions stop
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter operating.
or trailer.
Before changing a fuse

Tow-starting (emergency engine X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
starting)
(Y page 174).
! Vehicles with automatic transmission X Switch off all electrical consumers.
must not be tow-started. You could other- X Make sure that the ignition is switched off
wise damage the automatic transmission. (Y page 157).
i You can find information on "Jump-start- or
ing" under (Y page 349). X When using the SmartKey, turn the Smart-
Key to position 0 in the ignition lock and
remove it (Y page 157).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
Fuses 355
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-
RFuse box on the driver's side of the dash- well
board ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell fuse box when the cover is open.
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
driver's side
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
RFuse box under the trunk floor on the right-
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the the operation of the fuses.
direction of travel
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in
the trunk (Y page 356).
Dashboard fuse box
Roadside Assistance
! Do not use a pointed object such as a
screwdriver to open the cover in the dash-
board. You could damage the dashboard or
the cover.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture X To open: fold cover : out towards the rear
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair and remove it.
the operation of the fuses. X To close: clip in cover : at the rear.
X Fold cover : forwards until it engages.
Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
the ignition before opening the hood.
X To open: pull out cover : slightly at the ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
bottom in the direction of arrow =. fuse box when the cover is open.
X Fold cover : outwards in the direction of ! When closing the cover, make sure that it
arrow ;. is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
X To close: fold in cover : until it engages. seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
Z
356 Fuses
X Open the hood. X Open the trunk lid.

X To open: press safety clips : on the cover X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 305).
together. X To open: swing cover : upwards in the
X Remove fuse box cover ; upwards. direction of the arrow.
Roadside Assistance
X To close: fold down cover : in the oppo-

site direction to the arrow.
Make sure that the cover is in the recess
provided for it.
i The fuse allocation chart is located in a
recess at the side of the fuse box. You can
find the corresponding fuse rating and fuse
type on the fuse allocation chart.
X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture

from the fuse box.
X Loosen screws =, fold up fuse box lid ?
and remove it.
X To close: check whether the seal is posi-
tioned correctly in the lid ?.
X Insert lid ? into the bracket at the rear of
the fuse box.
X Fold down lid ? of the fuse box and tighten
screws =.
Fuse box in the trunk

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
357

Operation ........................................... 358
Winter operation ............................... 360
Check ................................................. 361
Loading the vehicle .......................... 369
All about wheels and tires ............... 373
Changing a wheel ............................. 381
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 386
Wheels and tires

358 Operation
Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and warn-
i This Operator's Manual describes all ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
models and all standard and optional equip- run-flat characteristics).
publication of the Operator's Manual. Accessories that are not approved for your
Country-specific differences are possible. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
Please note that your vehicle may not be used correctly can impair the operating
equipped with all features described. This safety.
also applies to safety-related systems and Before purchasing and using non-approved
functions. accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
i Read the information on qualified special- shop and inquire about:
ist workshops (Y page 26). Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Information on the dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
G WARNING
in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
Wheels and tires
(Y page 386).
the wheel brakes or suspension components
Information on air pressure for the tires on
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-
your vehicle can be found:
dent.
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 369)
part. Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the flap (Y page 172)
correct: Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 361)
Rdesignation
Rmodel
Operation
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct: Information on driving
Rdesignation If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire
Rmanufacturer pressures and correct them if necessary.
Rmodel While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteristics,
G WARNING e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-
pect that a tire is defective, reduce your
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
There is a risk of accident.
as possible to check the wheels and tires for
Tires without run-flat characteristics: damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. causing the unusual handling characteristics.
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or and wheels checked at a qualified specialist
consult a qualified specialist workshop. workshop.
Operation 359
When parking your vehicle, make sure that The service life of tires depends, among other
the tires do not get deformed by the curb or things, on the following factors:
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over RDrivingstyle
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try
RTirepressure
to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-
RDistance covered
erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,
may be damaged.
Important safety notes on the tire
Regular checking of wheels and tires tread
G WARNING G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
ditions. There is a risk of accident.
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
Wheels and tires

well as after driving off-road or on rough ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of should regularly check the tread depth and
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam- the condition of the tread across the entire
age such as: width of all tires.
Rcuts in the tires Minimum tire tread depth for:
Rpunctures RSummer tires: in (3 mm)
Rtears in the tires RM+S tires: in (4 mm)
Rbulges on tires For safety reasons, replace the tires before
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (Y page 359). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire into the tire tread.
pressure as necessary (Y page 361). Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
tread. They are visible once a tread depth of
Z
360 Winter operation
approximately in (1.6 mm) has been A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali-
reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn fied specialist workshop.
that it must be replaced.
Winter operation
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires General notes
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-
type and make. fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-
ter.
Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires section (Y page 381).
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 341).
Driving with summer tires
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
the wheels. At temperatures below 45 (+7 ), summer
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach braking power. Change the tires on your vehi-
their full performance after this distance. cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very
Wheels and tires
RDo not drive with tires which have too little

cold temperatures could cause cracks to
form, thereby damaging the tires perma-
tread depth, as this significantly reduces
nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
responsibility for this type of damage.
RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-
est, regardless of wear. G WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
properties) Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat and replace any damaged tires immediately.
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires. M+S tires
MOExtended tires may only be used in con-
G WARNING
junction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
monitor and on wheels specifically tested by in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
Mercedes-Benz. and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
a flat tire (Y page 341). M+S tires with a tread depth of less than in
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the At temperatures below 45 (+7 ), use win-
factory. It is therefore recommended that ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire
you additionally equip your vehicle with a are identified by the M+S marking.
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-
Check 361
vide the best possible grip in wintry road con- If you intend to mount snow chains, please
ditions. Only these tires will allow driving bear the following points in mind:
safety systems such as ABS and ESP to RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
function optimally in winter. These tires have wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
been developed specifically for driving in wheel-tire combinations (Y page 386).
snow. ROnly use snow chains when driving on
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on roads completely covered by snow.
all wheels to maintain safe handling charac- Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-
teristics. ble when you come to a road that is not
Always observe the maximum permissible snow-covered.
speed specified for the M+S tires you have RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
mounted. snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-
When you have mounted the M+S tires: ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 365). RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres- speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
sure loss warning system (Y page 369). ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive
X Restart the tire pressure monitor

at raised vehicle level if snow chains have
(Y page 367). been installed (Y page 197).
Wheels and tires

You may wish to deactivate ESP when pull-
ing away with snow chains installed
Snow chains (Y page 72). You can thereby allow the wheels
to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an
G WARNING increased driving force (cutting action).
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could Check
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
Tire pressure specifications
To avoid hazardous situations: Important safety notes
Rnever install snow chains to the front G WARNING
wheels
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
following risks:
rear wheels.
Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you and vehicle speed increase.
mount snow chains on steel wheels, you Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
caps from the relevant wheels before traction.
mounting the snow chains. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
mends that you only use snow chains that There is a risk of an accident.
have been specially approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality.
Z
362 Check
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires includ- are valid for the maximum permissible load
ing the spare wheel: and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.
Rmonthly, at least
Rif the load changes Tire pressure table
Rbefore beginning a long journey
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
The specifications on the sample Tire and

Loading Information placard and tire pressure
tables are examples. Tire pressure specifica-
tions are vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data shown here. The tire pressure
specifications that are valid for your vehicle
can be found on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard and tire pressure table on the
vehicle.
Wheels and tires
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted

for this vehicle by the factory
General notes
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
The recommended tire pressures for the tires mended pressures for cold tires for various
mounted at the factory can be found on the operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
labels described here. speed conditions.
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire and Loading Information placard
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
pressure information following is only valid
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially
: Recommended tire pressures laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the
The Tire and Loading Information placard is table for different numbers of occupants and
on the B-pillar on the driver's side amounts of luggage. The actual number of
(Y page 369). seats may differ.
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for
Check 363
G WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
can be found on the tire sidewall does not permit any reliable conclusion about
(Y page 375). the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
If the tire pressures have been set to the the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower pressure can be checked in the on-board
road speeds, the pressures should be reset to computer.
the higher values:
Wheels and tires

The tire temperature and pressure increase
Rif you want to drive with an increased load when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-
and/or ent on the driving speed and the load.
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or sures when the tires are cold.
higher road speeds, shown in the tire pres- The tires are cold:
sure table, may have a negative effect on driv- Rif the vehicle has been parked without
ing comfort. direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this hours and
can lead to an excessive build up of heat and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
a sudden loss of pressure. than 1 mile (1.6 km)
For more information, contact a qualified spe- The tire temperature changes depending on
cialist workshop. the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 (10 ), the tire pressure
Important notes on tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
G WARNING 1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-
ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correct
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
the tire pressure if it is too low for the current
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
operating conditions. If you check the tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
pressure when the tires are warm, the result-
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
ing value will be higher than if the tires were
RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the pressure to the value specified for cold tires.
valve is leaking. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
364 Check
Observe the recommended tire pressures for Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
cold tires: Rbe more susceptible to damage
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side Maximum tire pressures
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the
fuel filler flap
Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
sure
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident. Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the inflation pressure. Always observe the rec-
Wheels and tires
tires, including the spare wheel. ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
when adjusting the tire pressure
Underinflated tires may: (Y page 361).
Roverheat, leading to tire defects i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
Radversely affect handling specific and may deviate from the values in
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly the illustration.
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Checking the tire pressures

Overinflated tires
G WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst Observe the notes on tire pressure
because they are damaged more easily by (Y page 361).
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they Information on air pressure for the tires on
also suffer from irregular wear, which can your vehicle can be found:
severely impair the braking properties and the Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an tion placard on the B-pillar
accident. Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the flap
tires, including the spare wheel. Rin the "Tire pressure" section
Overinflated tires may:

Rincrease the braking distance
Radversely affect handling
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Check 365
Checking tire pressures manually

To determine and set the correct tire pres-
sure, proceed as follows:
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
be checked.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with
the recommended value on the Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 361).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to
For information on the message display, refer
to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-
the recommended value.
cally" section (Y page 367).
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by
pressing down the metal pin in the valve.
Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then,
check the tire pressure again using the tire G WARNING
pressure gauge. Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. should be checked at least once every two
Wheels and tires

X Repeat these steps for the other tires. weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
Tire pressure monitor on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If
General notes your vehicle has tires of a different size than
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi- the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the Information placard or, if available, the tire
tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres- pressure label, you should determine the
sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops proper tire pressure for those tires.
in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
monitor only functions if the correct sensors been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
are installed on all wheels. system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
Information on tire pressures is displayed in sure telltale when one or more of your tires
the multifunction display. After a few minutes are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
of driving, the current tire pressure of each when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,
tire is shown in the Service menu of the mul- you should stop and check your tires as soon
tifunction display; see illustration (example). as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin-
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
Z
366 Check
underinflation has not reached the level to The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
sure telltale. tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
the system is not operating properly. The abrupt steering maneuvers.
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether
will flash for approximately a minute and then the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-
remain continuously illuminated. This cates whether a tire pressure is too low or the
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi- tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
cle is started as long as the malfunction Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu- tire pressure on one or more tires is signif-
minated, the system may not be able to detect icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is
or signal low tire pressure as intended. not malfunctioning.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
reasons, including the installation of incom- minute and then remains lit constantly, the
patible replacement or alternate tires or tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
Wheels and tires
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS In addition to the warning lamp, a message
from functioning properly. Always check the appears in the multifunction display. Further
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one information can be found on (Y page 277).
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,
ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
it may take more than ten minutes for the tire
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
pressure warning lamp to inform you of the
function properly.
malfunction by flashing for approximately one
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire minute and then remaining lit. When the mal-
pressure to that recommended for cold tires function has been rectified, the tire pressure
which is suitable for the operating situation warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of
(Y page 361). Note that the correct tire pres- driving.
sure for the current operating situation must The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. board computer may differ from those meas-
If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.
warning threshold for the warning message is The tire pressures shown by the on-board
aligned to the reference values taught-in. computer refer to those measured at sea
Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust- level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-
ing the pressure of the cold tires ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higher
(Y page 367). The current pressures are than those shown by the on-board computer.
saved as new reference values. As a result, a In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.
warning message will appear if the tire pres- The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
sure drops significantly. be affected by interference from radio trans-
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,
of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe two-way radios) that may be being operated
the notes on the recommended tire pressure in or near the vehicle.
(Y page 361).
Check 367
Checking the tire pressure electroni- one or more tires has dropped significantly
cally and the tires must be checked.
RIf the Caution Tire Malfunction
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). appears in the multifunction display, the
tire pressure in one or more tires has drop-
ped suddenly and the tires must be
the list of menus.
checked.
X Press the 9 or : button on the steer-
Observe the instructions and safety notes in
ing wheel to select the Service menu. the display messages in the "Tires" section
X Press the a button. (Y page 277).
X Press the 9 or : button to select If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rota-
Tire Pressure.
Pressure ted, the tire pressures may be displayed for
X Press the a button. the wrong positions for a short time. This is
The current tire pressure of each tire is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and
shown in the multifunction display. the tire pressures are displayed for the cor-
If the vehicle has been parked for over rect positions.
20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
displayed after driving a few Restarting the tire pressure monitor
minutes message appears. When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
Wheels and tires

After a teach-in process, the tire pressure existing warning messages are deleted and
monitor automatically detects new wheels or the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the currently set tire pressures as the refer-
the tire pressure value to the individual ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the
wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure tire pressure monitor will automatically
Monitor Active display message is shown detect the new reference values after you
instead of the tire pressure display. The tire have changed the tire pressure. However, you
pressures are already being monitored. can also define reference values manually as
described here. The tire pressure monitor
Tire pressure monitor warning mes- then monitors the new tire pressure values.
sages X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure mended for the corresponding driving sit-
loss in one or more tires, a warning message uation on the Tire and Loading Information
is shown in the multifunction display and the placard on the driver's side
yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp B-pillar (Y page 361).
comes on. Additional tire pressure values for different
RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure loads can also be found on the tire pressure
message appears in the multifunction dis- table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is (Y page 361).
too low and must be corrected at the next X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
opportunity. on all four wheels.

RIf the Check Tires message appears in the X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
multifunction display, the tire pressure in 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157).
the list of menus.
Z
368 Check
X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- Tire pressure loss warning system
ing wheel to select the Service menu.
General notes
X Press the 9 or : button to select While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pres-
Tire Pressure.
Pressure sure loss warning system monitors the set
X Press the a button. tire pressure using the rotational speed of the
The multifunction display shows the cur- wheels. This enables the system to detect
rent tire pressure for the individual tires or significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
the Tire pressure will be displayed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a
after driving a few minutes mes- loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
sage. message will appear in the multifunction dis-
X Press the : button.
play.
The Use Current Pressures as New You can recognize the tire pressure loss warn-
Reference Values message appears in ing by the Run Flat Indicator Active
the multifunction display. Press 'OK' to Restart message which
appears in the Service menu of the multi-
If you wish to confirm the restart: function display. Information on the message
X Press the a button. display can be found in the "Restarting the tire
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted pressure loss warning system" section
Wheels and tires
message appears in the multifunction dis- (Y page 369).

play.
After driving for a few minutes, the system Important safety notes
checks whether the current tire pressures The tire pressure warning system does not
are within the specified range. The new tire warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
pressures are then accepted as reference Observe the notes on the recommended tire
values and monitored. pressure (Y page 361).
If you wish to cancel the restart: The tire pressure loss warning does not
X Press the % button. replace the need to regularly check the tire
The tire pressure values stored at the last pressure. An even loss of pressure on several
restart will continue to be monitored. tires at the same time cannot be detected by
the tire pressure loss warning system.
Radio type approval for the tire pres- The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
sure monitor you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
Country Radio type approval number event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A abrupt steering maneuvers.
FCC ID: MRXGG4 The function of the tire pressure loss warning
FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4 system is limited or delayed if:
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
tires.
IC: 2546A-GG4
Rroad conditions are wintry.
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
Loading the vehicle 369
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor- If you wish to confirm the restart:
nering at high speeds or driving with high X Press the a button.
rates of acceleration). The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the appears in the multifunction display.
vehicle or on the roof). X Press the 9 or : button to select
Yes.
Yes
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-
ing system
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system message appears in the multifunction dis-
if you have: play.
Rchanged the tire pressure After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
Rchanged the wheels or tires loss warning system will monitor the set
tire pressures of all four tires.
Rmounted new wheels or tires
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire

If you wish to cancel the restart:
pressures are set properly on all four tires X Press the % button.
for the respective operating conditions. or
The recommended tire pressure can be X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
found on the Tire and Loading Information appears, use the 9 or : button to
Wheels and tires

placard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire select Cancel
Cancel.
pressure table is attached to the fuel filler X Press the a button.
flap. The tire pressure loss warning system The tire pressure values stored at the last
can only give reliable warnings if you have restart will continue to be monitored.
set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect
tire pressure is set, these incorrect values
will be monitored.
Loading the vehicle
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 361). Instruction labels for tires and loads
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
G WARNING
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157).
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
the list of menus. steering and driving characteristics and lead
X Press the 9 or : button on the steer- to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
ing wheel to select the Service menu. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
X Press the a button. rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
X Press the 9 or : button to select your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
Tire Pressure.
Pressure exceeding the maximum load.
The Run Flat Indicator Active Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
Press 'OK' to Restart message the maximum possible load.
appears in the multifunction display. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum permis-
Z
370 Loading the vehicle
sible vehicle load. It also contains details Information placard: "The combined weight
of the tire sizes and corresponding pres- of occupants and cargo should never
sures for tires mounted at the factory. exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle load and luggage must not exceed the speci-
identification plate informs you of the fied value.
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu- i The specifications shown on the Tire and
pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can Loading Information placard in the illustra-
also find information about the maximum tion are examples. The maximum permis-
gross axle weight rating on the front and sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-
rear axle. specific and may differ from that in the
illustration. You can find the valid maximum
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
permissible gross vehicle weight rating for
the maximum weight that can be carried
your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor-
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
mation placard.
exceed the maximum load or the maxi-
mum gross axle weight rating for the
front or rear axle.
Number of seats
Wheels and tires
: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
Maximum permissible gross vehicle travel in the vehicle. This information can be
weight rating found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
tion are examples. The number of seats is
vehicle-specific and can differ from the
details shown. The number of seats in your
vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard.
X Specification for maximum gross vehicle

weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Loading the vehicle 371
Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicles Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
Wheels and tires

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load capa-
city calculated in step 4.
Z
372 Loading the vehicle
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are
using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard (Y page 369).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Step 2
Wheels and tires

Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(73 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
All about wheels and tires 373
Step 3

Permissible load 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
(maximum gross vehi- 750 lbs (340 kg) = 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
cle weight rating from 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
the Tire and Loading
Information placard
minus the gross
weight of all occu-
pants)
Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires

Even if you have calculated the total cargo Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
carefully, you should still make sure that the ards
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
be found on the vehicle identification plate on ards
Wheels and tires

the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 369).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all
passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight
(if applicable) must not exceed the permissi-
ble gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the
maximum permissible weight that can be car-
ried by one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross vehi- Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
cle weight and maximum gross axle weight U.S. government specifications. Their pur-
rating), have your loaded vehicle (including pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-
driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if ble information on tire performance data. Tire
applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle manufacturers have to grade tires using three
weighbridge. performance factors: : tread wear grade, ;
traction grade and = temperature grade.
These regulations do not apply to Canada.
Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America
are provided with the corresponding quality
grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applica-
ble, on the tire sidewall between the tread
shoulder and maximum tire width.
Z
374 All about wheels and tires
Example: The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy

RTreadwear grade: 200 road is always lower than on dry road surfa-
ces.
RTraction grade: AA
You should pay special attention to road con-
RTemperature grade: A
ditions when temperatures are around freez-
All passenger car tires must conform to the ing point.
statutory safety requirements in addition to Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
these grades. tread depth of in (4 mm) on all four winter
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tires. Observe the legally required minimum
specific and may deviate from the values in tire tread depth (Y page 359). Winter tires can
the illustration. reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
Treadwear The braking distance is still much further than
on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested Further information on winter tires (M+S
under controlled conditions on a specified tires) (Y page 360).
U.S. government course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Temperature
times as well on the government course as a
Wheels and tires
tire graded 100. G WARNING

The relative performance of tires depends The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
upon the actual conditions of their use, how- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ever, and may depart significantly from the not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
norm due to variations in driving habits, ser- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
vice practices and differences in road char- in combination, can cause excessive heat
acteristics and climate conditions. build-up and possible tire failure.
Traction The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C. They represent the tire's resistance to
G WARNING the generation of heat and its ability to dissi-
The traction grade assigned to this tire is pate heat when tested under controlled con-
based on straight-ahead braking traction ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- the material of the tire to degenerate and
acteristics. reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage corresponds to a level of performance which
to the drive train. all passenger car tires must meet under the
The traction grades from highest to lowest Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as of performance on the laboratory test wheel
measured under controlled conditions on than the minimum required by law.
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Tire labeling Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Overview tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard ? Rim diameter
Wheels and tires

(Y page 379) A Load bearing index
; DOT, Tire Identification Number B Speed rating
(Y page 378) General: depending on the manufacturer's
= Maximum tire load (Y page 377) standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 364) may not contain any letters or may contain
A Manufacturer one letter that precedes the size description.
B Tire material (Y page 378) If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa- tion (as shown above): these are passenger
city and speed rating (Y page 375) vehicle tires according to European manufac-
D Load index (Y page 377) turing standards.
E Tire name If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
The markings described above are on the tire
manufacturing standards.
in addition to the tire name (sales designa-
tion) and the manufacturer's name. If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S. manu-
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- facturing standards.
ate from the data in the example. If "T" precedes the size description: these are
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing pressure, to be used only temporarily in an
capacity and speed rating emergency.
G WARNING Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- tire width in millimeters.
city and the approved maximum speed could Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There size ratio between the tire height and tire
is a risk of accident. width and is shown in percent. The aspect
Z
ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by Index Speed rating

the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the man- W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diam-
eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
is a numerical code that specifies the maxi-
mum load-bearing capacity of a tire. ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
specified load limit. The maximum permissi- the size description, depending on the
Wheels and tires
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on The service specification is made up of
the driver's side (Y page 369). load-bearing index A and speed rating B.
Example: RIf the size description of your tire includes
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum "ZR" and there are no service specifica-
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order to
bear. For further information on the maximum find out the maximum speed.
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see If a service specification is available, the
(Y page 377). maximum speed is limited according to the
For further information on the load bearing speed rating in the service specification.
index, see "Load index" (Y page 377). Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The
approved maximum speed of the tire. letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The
maximum speed of the tire is limited to
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- 186 mph (300 km/h).
ate from the data in the example. RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
Regardless of the speed rating, always mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and must include "ZR", and the service specifi-
adapt your driving style to the traffic condi- cation must be given in parentheses. Exam-
tions. ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating
Summer tires "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of
the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask
Index Speed rating the tire manufacturer about the maximum
speed.
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
All-weather tires and winter tires Load index

Index Speed rating
Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide

the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires In addition to the load-bearing index, load
also have the i snowflake symbol on index : may also be imprinted on the side-
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill wall of the tire. You will find this after the let-
the requirements of the Rubber Manufac- ter that identifies the speed rating
turers Association (RMA) and the Rubber (Y page 375).
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
tire traction on snow. They have been espe- example above), represents a standard
Wheels and tires

cially developed for driving on snow. load (SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph tire
(210km/h). RLight Load: represents a light load tire
The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac- RC, D, E: represents a load range that
tory may be higher than the maximum speed depends on the maximum load that the tire
that the electronic speed limiter permits. can carry at a certain pressure
Make sure that your tires have the required i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The ate from the data in the example.
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 386). Maximum load rating
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
Maximum tire load : is the maximum per-

missible weight for which the tire is approved.
1 Or M+S i for winter tires.
Z
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
specified load limit. The maximum permissi- by the manufacturer as a code to describe
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and specific characteristics of the tire.
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
the driver's side (Y page 369). A provides information about the age of a
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tire. The first and second positions represent
specific and may deviate from the values in the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
the illustration. for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire 2008.
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN
in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
Wheels and tires
The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retread-
ers to inform purchasers of recalls and other
safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible This information describes the type of tire
for the purchaser to easily identify the affec- cord and the number of layers in sidewall :
ted tires. and under tire tread ;.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi- i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
cation code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? ate from the data in the example.
and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire Definition of terms for tires and loading
symbol : marks that the tire complies with
the requirements of the U.S. Department of Tire ply composition and material used
Transportation. Describes the number of plies or the number
Manufacturer identification code: manu- of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
facturer identification code ; provides tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires nylon, polyester and other materials.
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded Bar
tires have a code with four symbols.
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
For further information about retreaded tires,
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals
see (Y page 358).
(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Speed rating

DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of The speed rating is part of the tire identifica-
the U S Department of Transportation. tion. It specifies the speed range for which the
tire is approved.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehi- GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
(150 lbs). of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-
A uniform standard to grade the quality of ble. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as
and temperature characteristics. The quality specified on the vehicle identification plate on
grading assessment is made by the manufac- the B-pillar on the driver's side.
turer following specifications from the U.S.
government. The ratings are molded into the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
sidewall of the tire. The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
Recommended tire pressures the vehicle including all accessories, occu-
The recommended tire pressure applies to pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-
Wheels and tires

the tires mounted at the factory. weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
The Tire and Loading Information placard con- weight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-
tains the recommended tire pressures for tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the side.
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
mended pressures for cold tires for various The maximum weight is the sum of:
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
speed conditions. Rthe weight of the accessories
Increased vehicle weight due to optional Rthe load limit
equipment Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
The combined weight of all standard and equipment

optional equipment available for the vehicle, Kilopascal (kPa)
regardless of whether it is actually installed
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
on the vehicle or not.
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure
Rim is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva-
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire lent of 1 bar.
is mounted. Load index
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
rating. The actual load on an axle must never the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The city more precisely.
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side.
Z
Curb weight Tread

The weight of a vehicle with standard equip- The part of the tire that comes into contact
ment including the maximum capacity of fuel, with the road.
oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-
tioning system and optional equipment if Bead
these are installed in the vehicle, but does not The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
include passengers or luggage. securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
Maximum load rating coming loose from the wheel rim.
The maximum load rating is the maximum
permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for Sidewall
which a tire is approved. The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one Weight of optional extras
tire. The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
Maximum load on one tire parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated optional extras, such as high-performance
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-
Wheels and tires
by two. performance battery, are not included in the

curb weight and the weight of the accesso-
PSI (pounds per square inch) ries.
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Aspect ratio This is a unique identifier which can be used
Relationship between tire height and tire by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
width in percent. example for a product recall, and thus identify
Tire pressure the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
This is pressure inside the tire applying an type code and the manufacturing date.
outward force to each square inch of the tire's
surface. The tire pressure is specified in Load bearing index
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal The load bearing index (also load index) is a
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only code that contains the maximum load bearing
be corrected when the tires are cold. capacity of a tire.
Cold tire pressure Traction
The tires are cold: Traction is the result of friction between the
Rif the vehicle has been parked without tires and the road surface.
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three Treadwear indicators
hours and
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
level with the bars, the wear limit of in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
Changing a wheel 381
Occupant distribution Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
their designated seating positions. wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
Total load limit If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg can rotate the wheels according to the inter-
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book
the vehicle. in your vehicle documents. If no warranty
book is available, the tires should be rotated
every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
Changing a wheel 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires.
Flat tire Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
The "Breakdown assistance" section the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
(Y page 341) contains information and notes is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec-
on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on essary, restart the tire pressure loss warning
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of system (Y page 369) or the tire pressure
a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended monitor (Y page 367).
tires (tires with run-flat characteristics"
(Y page 341).
Wheels and tires

Direction of rotation
Rotating the wheels Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
G WARNING of hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben-
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may efits if the correct direction of rotation is
severely impair the driving characteristics if maintained.
the wheels or tires have different dimensions. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
The wheel brakes or suspension components its correct direction of rotation.
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
dent.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels Storing wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions. Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
monitor, electronic components are loca-
ted in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used Mounting a wheel
near the valve. This could damage the elec-
tronic components. Preparing the vehicle
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
cialist workshop. level ground.
Always observe the instructions and safety X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
(Y page 381). ahead position.
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires X Shift the transmission to position P.
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Z
382 Changing a wheel
X Make sure that in vehicles with AIRMATIC, X Fold both plates upwards :.
the vehicle level is set to "Normal" X Fold out lower plate ;.
(Y page 197). X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
X Switch off the engine. the openings in base plate =.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
tion or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's
door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/
Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 157). Securing the vehicle on level ground
X If included in the vehicle equipment, X On level ground: place chocks or other
remove the tire-change tool kit from the suitable items under the front and rear of
vehicle. the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
Wheels and tires
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling wheel you wish to change.
away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

rolling away
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients

X On light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit Raising the vehicle
(Y page 340).
G WARNING
The folding wheel chock is an additional
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from If you do not position the jack correctly at the
rolling away, for example when changing a appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
wheel. jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
must be positioned vertically, directly under RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid
the jacking point of the vehicle. when the vehicle is raised.
RMake sure that no persons are present in
! The jack is designed exclusively for jack- the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
ing up the vehicle at the jacking points. Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps:
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap.
Observe the following when raising the Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you
vehicle: must remove the hub cap. Two different var-
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle- iants can be installed.
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-
rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-
cle raised.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for per-
forming maintenance work under the vehi-
cle.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and
Wheels and tires

downhill slopes. Alloy wheel with plastic hub cap
RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
Vehicles with plastic hub cap:
rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen- X To remove: turn the center cover of hub
gage the parking brake while the vehicle is cap : counter-clockwise and remove.
raised. X To install: before installing, ensure that
RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and hub cap : is in the open position. To do so,
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a turn the center cover counter-clockwise.
large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be X Put hub cap : in position and turn the
used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip center cover clockwise until you feel and
underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. hear hub cap : engage.
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar X Make sure that hub cap : is installed
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the securely.
jack will not be able to achieve its load-
bearing capacity due to the restricted
height.
RMake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RNever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Alloy wheel with aluminum hub cap
Vehicles with aluminum hub cap:
Z
384 Changing a wheel
X To remove: take socket ; and lug wrench

= from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 340).
X Position socket ; on hub cap :.
X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and
loosen hub cap : counter-clockwise.
X Remove hub cap :.
X To install: before installing, check hub
cap : and the wheel area for soiling and
clean if necessary.
X Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is
in the right position. The jacking points are located just behind the
X Position socket ; on hub cap :. front wheel housings and just in front of the
X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and
rear wheel housings (arrows).
tighten hub cap :. Vehicles with AMG equipment: the vehicle
The tightening torque must be has covers installed to protect the vehicle
18 lb-ft (25 Nm). body next to the jacking points on the outer
sills.
i Note that the hub cap should be tight-
Wheels and tires
ened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft

(25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you have the hub cap installed at a
X Vehicles with AMG equipment: fold

cover ? upwards.
X Using a lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on

the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
pletely.
X Position jack B at jacking point A.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.

X Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
beneath the jacking point.
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
X Turn crank C clockwise until jack B sits specialist workshop immediately. Have the
completely on jacking point A and the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
X Turn crank C until the tire is raised a max-
imum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
Wheels and tires

Removing a wheel when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub when the vehicle is on the ground.
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in. Always pay attention to the instructions and
When mounting/removing wheels, and for as safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-
long as the wheels are removed, avoid apply- tion (Y page 381).
ing any external force on the brake disks. This Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
could impair the level of comfort when brak- for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
ing. sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-

pletely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
Z
386 Wheel and tire combinations
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-

wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:
to A). The specified tightening torque is
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the trunk again.
X Vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the
cover into the outer sill.
X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
surfaces. Observe the recommended tire pressure
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the (Y page 361).
alignment bolt and push it on. When you are driving with the collapsible
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin- spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss
ger-tight. warning system or the tire pressure monitor
X Unscrew the alignment bolt. cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- pressure loss warning system/the tire pres-
Wheels and tires
tight. sure monitor when the damaged wheel has

been replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-
Lowering the vehicle
tem: all installed wheels must be equipped
G WARNING with functioning sensors.
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts When you are driving with the emergency
and bolts are not tightened to the specified spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. warning system cannot function reliably. Only
Have the tightening torque immediately restart the tire pressure loss warning system
checked at a qualified specialist workshop when the defective wheel has been replaced
after a wheel is changed. with a new wheel.
Wheel and tire combinations

General notes
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you only use tires and
wheels which have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
cle.
X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clock-

wise until the vehicle is once again standing
firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
Wheel and tire combinations 387
These tires have been specially adapted for Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
use with the control systems, such as ABS the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-
or ESP, and are marked as follows: nance recommendations of the tire manufac-
RMO
turer in the vehicle document wallet.
= Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
Notes on the vehicle equipment always
equip the vehicle with:
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
tain AMG tires) right)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
may only be used on wheels that have been mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes- ferent type or make in the event of a flat
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer- tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle with run-flat characteristics" section
noise emissions or fuel consumption, may (Y page 341).
otherwise be adversely affected. In addi- Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen- not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
sion variations could cause the tires to It is therefore recommended that you addi-
come into contact with the bodywork and tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if
Wheels and tires

axle components. This could result in dam- you mount tires that do not feature run-flat
age to the tires or the vehicle. properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for be obtained from a qualified specialist work-
damage resulting from the use of tires, shop.
wheels or accessories other than those tes- i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
ted and approved. available at the factory for all countries.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any
i On the following pages, you can find infor-
mation on approved wheel rims and tire
sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter
Overview of abbreviations used in the follow- tires. Winter tires are not available at the
ing tire tables: factory as standard equipment or optional
RBA: both axles extras.
RFA: front axle If you would like to equip your vehicle with
RRA: rear axle approved winter tires, you may also, in cer-
tain circumstances, require rims of the
The recommended pressures for various
appropriate size. The size of the approved
operating conditions can be found:
winter tires may deviate from that of the
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard standard tires. This is dependent on the
with the recommended tire pressures on model and the equipment installed at the
the B-pillar on the driver's side factory.
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
fuel filler flap information, can be obtained at a qualified
Observe the notes on recommended tire specialist workshop.
pressures under various operating conditions
(Y page 361).
Z
Tires
C 300
Summer tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/50 R17 94 W BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm)
R 18
Tires Wheels
FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm)
Wheels and tires
FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2, 3 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
R 19
Tires Wheels
FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
2 Available as MOExtended.
3 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch).
All-weather tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/50 R17 94 H2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2
R 18
Tires Wheels
FA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm)
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheels and tires

Winter tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2
R 18
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
C 300 4MATIC
Summer tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/50 R17 94 W BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2
Z
R 18
Tires Wheels
FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
R 19
Tires Wheels
FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2
Wheels and tires
RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
All-weather tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/50 R17 94 H2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2
R 18
Tires Wheels
FA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2
Wheels and tires

R 18
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
C 400 4MATIC
Summer tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/50 R17 94 W BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2
Z
R 18
Tires Wheels
FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
R 19
Tires Wheels
FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2
Wheels and tires
RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
All-weather tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/50 R17 94 H2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2
R 18
Tires Wheels
FA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R 17
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2
Wheels and tires

R 18
Tires Wheels
BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2
Z
394
395

Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 396
Identification plates ......................... 396
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 397
Vehicle data ...................................... 403
Technical data
396 Identification plates
Useful information

functions.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
i Read the information on qualified special- ; VIN
ist workshops (Y page 26). = Vehicle model
Information regarding technical data
i The data stated here specifically refers to

a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels.
Technical data
Identification plates Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

Vehicle identification plate with vehi- ; VIN
cle identification number (VIN) = Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-
tion plate is used only as an example. This
data is different for every vehicle and can
deviate from the data shown here. You can
find the data applicable to your vehicle on
the vehicle identification plate.

You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Service products and filling capacities 397
VIN Service products and filling capaci-

ties
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-
of the reach of children.
most position.
X Fold floor covering ; upwards.
The VIN is visible :.
Dispose of service products in an environ-
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle mentally responsible manner.
identification plate (Y page 396).
The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of Service products include the following:
the windshield (Y page 397). RFuels
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
RCoolant
Technical data
Engine number
RBrake fluid
RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must be
matched. Only use products recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused
by the use of products which have not been
recommended is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill ges-
tures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz
Operator's Manual in the appropriate section.
: Emission control information plate, Information on tested and approved products
including the certification of both federal can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-
and Californian emissions standards Benz Center or on the Internet at
; Engine number (stamped into the crank- http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
case) You can recognize service products approved
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
tion on the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indi-
cate a level of quality or a specification in
Z
398 Service products and filling capacities
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. Tank capacity

MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Model Total capacity
Other identifications, for example: All models 17.4 US gal
R0 W-30 (66.0 l)
R5 W-30
R5 W-40 Model Of which
reserve
Fuel All models Approx.

1.8 US gal
Important safety notes (7.0 l)
G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
Gasoline
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- Fuel grade
sion.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
tion if you accidentally refuel with the
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
refueling.
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
G WARNING
Technical data
fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-

Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. fied specialist workshop and have the fuel
There is a risk of injury. tank and fuel lines drained completely.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
! Only refuel using unleaded premium
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
95 RON.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-
observe the following: ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to
RWash
engine failure.
away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water. ! Do not use the following:
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)
immediately rinse them thoroughly with RE100 (100% ethanol)
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
out delay.
RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
ing. RM100 (100% methanol)

RImmediately change out of clothing which RGasoline with metalliferous additives
has come into contact with fuel. RDiesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-
tives. Otherwise, engine damage may
occur. This does not include cleaning addi- Additives

tives for the removal and prevention of res- ! Operating the engine with fuel additives
idue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixed added later can lead to engine failure. Do
with cleaning additives recommended by not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can not include additives for the removal and
obtain further information from any author- prevention of residue buildup. gasoline
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. must only be mixed with additives recom-
! To ensure the longevity and full perform- mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with
ance of the engine, only premium-grade the instructions for use on the product
unleaded gasoline must be used. label. More information about recommen-
ded additives can be obtained from any
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-
ble and you have to refuel with unleaded
gasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol- Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
lowing precautions: branded fuels that have additives.
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg- The quality of the fuel available in some coun-
ular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest tries may not be sufficient. Residue could
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline build up in the injection system as a result. In
as soon as possible. such cases, and in consultation with an
RDo not drive at the maximum speed.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-
line may be mixed with the cleaning additive
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must
speeds over 3,000 rpm. observe the notes and mixing ratios specified
You will usually find information about the fuel on the container.
Technical data
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
label on the pump, ask the staff for assis- Fuel consumption information
tance.
i For further information, consult a quali- CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-
fied specialist workshop or visit
tists believe to be principally responsible for
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to
Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can fuel consumption and therefore depend on:
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
C 300 4MATIC: as a temporary measure, if Rdriving style
the recommended fuel is not available, you Rother non-technical factors, such as envi-
may also use regular unleaded gasoline with ronmental influences, road conditions or
an octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON. traffic flow
All other models: as a temporary measure, if You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis-
the recommended fuel is not available, you sions by driving carefully and having it serv-
may also use regular unleaded gasoline with iced regularly.
an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may
reduce engine performance and increase fuel The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the
consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and following situations:
sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel
Rat very low outside temperatures
with a lower AKI.
Rin city traffic
Information on refueling (Y page 172).
Z
Ron short journeys Filling capacities

Rin mountainous terrain The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Engine oil Model Capacity
General notes C 300 7.4 qt (7.0 l)

C 300 4MATIC
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
specification other than is necessary to ful- C 400 4MATIC 6.9 qt (6.5 l)
fill the prescribed service intervals. Do not
change the engine oil or oil filter in order to Additives
achieve longer replacement intervals than
those prescribed. You could otherwise ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
cause engine damage or damage to the This could damage the engine.
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions in the service inter- Engine oil viscosity
val display regarding the oil change. Other-
wise, you may damage the engine and the
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 397).
Technical data
The engine oils are matched to the perform-

ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service
intervals. You should therefore only use
engine oils and oil filters that are approved for
vehicles with maintenance systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
ter. Or visit the website this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. means that it is thin.
The table shows which engine oils have been Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
approved for your vehicle. (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
temperatures. The table shows you which
Model Engin MB Approval SAE classifications are to be used. The low-
e temperature characteristics of engine oils
model can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore
C 300 274 229.3, 229.5,
strongly recommended that you carry out reg-
C 300 4MATIC 229.51,
ular oil changes using an approved engine oil
229.52
with the appropriate SAE classification.
C 400 4MATIC 276 229.5
AMG vehicles 177 229.5
i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-

tainers.
Brake fluid Further information on coolants can be

found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
G WARNING for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture on the Internet at
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake tact a qualified specialist workshop.
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
brake system when the brakes are applied
even in countries where high temperatures
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
the specified intervals.
overheating.
When handling brake fluid, observe the i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
important safety notes on service products qualified specialist workshop and the
(Y page 397). replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
The brake fluid change intervals can be found Booklet.
in the Maintenance Booklet. The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. following tasks:
Information about approved brake fluid can Rcorrosion protection
be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
Rantifreeze protection
shop or on the Internet at
Technical data
Rraising the boiling point
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at to -35 (-37 ), the boiling point of the cool-
a qualified specialist workshop and the ant during operation is approximately 266
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance (130 ).
Booklet.
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
tion in the engine cooling system should:
Coolant Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
Important safety notes approximately -35 (-37 ).
G WARNING Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- down to -49 [-45 ]). Otherwise, heat
ponents in the engine compartment, it may will not be dissipated as effectively.
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
Let the engine cool down before you add anti- corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod-
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the ucts 310.1.
antifreeze from components before starting The coolant is checked with every mainte-
the engine. nance interval at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
led with a coolant mixture that ensures
could otherwise damage the engine.
Z
adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec- At temperatures above freezing:

tion. X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
i The coolant is checked with every main- of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
tenance interval at a qualified specialist MB SummerFit.
workshop. Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
Filling capacities
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
Model Capacity of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-
Fit.
C 300 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the
C 300 4MATIC information on the antifreeze reservoir.
C 400 4MATIC 11.5 US qt (10.9 l) i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion fluid all year round.
inhibitor/antifreeze.
Climate control system refrigerant

Windshield/headlamp cleaning sys-
tem Important safety notes
Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is

filled with refrigerant R134a.
Technical data
G WARNING The instruction label regarding the refrigerant

Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if type used can be found on the radiator cross
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- member.
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of ! Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG
fire and injury.
oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
Make sure that no windshield washer con- used. The approved PAG oil may not be
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for wise, the climate control system may be
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or damaged.
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
could damage the plastic lenses of the Service work, such as topping up refrigerant
headlamps. or replacing components, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to applicable regulations must be adhered to,
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the SAE standard J639 included.
level sensor may be damaged. Always have work on the climate control sys-
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-
washer fluid should be mixed together. The shop.
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Vehicle data 403
Refrigerant instruction label Vehicle data

General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
of:
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Example: refrigerant instruction label Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
: Warning symbol payload.
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
? PAG oil part number Dimensions and weights
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises you about:
Rpossible dangers
Rhaving service work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop
Technical data
Filling capacities
Model Refrigerant
All models 22.2 0.4 oz
(630 10 g) Model : Opening height
C 300 69.6 in (1768 mm)
Model PAG oil All other models 69.8 in (1774 mm)
All models 2.8 oz
(80 g) All models
Vehicle length 184.5 in (4686 mm)
Vehicle width 79.5 in (2020 mm)
including exterior
mirrors
Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm)
Turning radius 36.8 ft (11.22 m)
Z
404 Vehicle data
All models
Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg)
Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
load
Model Vehicle height

C 300 57.0 in (1447 mm)
All other models 57.2 in (1452 mm)
Technical data

2015 C Sedan OperatorsManual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 C Sedan OperatorsManual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C-Class

Order no. 6515 0935 13 Part no. 2055844601 Edition C-2015

! Notes on material damage alert you to

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31

Introduction ......................................... 22 Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 79

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 107

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 123

Climate control ................................. 137

Driving and parking .......................... 155

On-board computer and displays .... 229

Stowage and features ...................... 297

Maintenance and care ...................... 323

Roadside Assistance ........................ 339

Wheels and tires ............................... 357

Technical data ................................... 395

1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Armrest Engaging neutral ............................ 165

Brake Assist Care

Children Setting the temperature ................ 145

Cornering light function Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 250

Driving safety system Driving abroad ............................... 124

Emissions control Exterior lighting

Fuel tank Storing settings (memory func-

Overview ........................................ 129 High-beam headlamps ................... 126

Downloading routes ....................... 318 Messages

Operation ......................................... 52 Operating system

Range of the sensors ..................... 199 Radio-wave reception/transmis-

Reserve (fuel tank) center rear-compartment seat ......... 47

Side marker lamp (display mes- Segments ...................................... 231

Stowage well beneath the trunk Notes ............................................. 363

Labeling (overview) ........................ 375 Top Tether ............................................ 62

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 403 Vehicle identification number

Storing ........................................... 381

Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and War-

Information for customers in Califor- Maintenance

Operating safety curb or an unpaved road

In situations like this, the body, the under- Diagnostics connection

Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- 98 Vanderhoof Avenue

State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that

Function Page Function Page

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

= Distance warning 293 J Seat belt 284

? Power steering 295 K K High-beam head-

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

Center console, lower section

? ECO start/stop func- G Audio 20/COMAND con-

Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page

= G SOS button (mbrace F Rear-view mirror 117

Door control panel

Useful information .............................. 42

Useful information Occupant safety

of the vehicle's interior in the event of an

Panic alarm The components of the restraint system work

For more information about children traveling G WARNING

Restraint system warning lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp :

A malfunction has occurred if the 6 front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-

RChildren in a child restraint system:

The shoulder section of the belt must always

Releasing seat belts The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain

Front-passenger front air bag ; will only